Post-Tensioning Manual
Post-Tensioning Manual
Post-Tensioning Manual
POST-TENSIONING
m INSTITUTE
301 W. Osborn, Suite 3500 / Phoenix, AZ 85013
Telephone: (602) 265-9158
. ..
INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . VIII
. .
- 111 -
4.3.2.2 System Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240
4.3.2.3 Factorsof Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241
4.3.2.4 Anchor Tendon Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241
4.3.2.5 FreeStressing Length . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241
4.3.2.6 Bond Length . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241
4.3.3 Fabrication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242
4.3.3.1 Materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242
4.3.3.2 Fabrication of Anchors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244
4.3.4 Drilling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244
4.3.5 Watertightness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244
4.3.6 Insertion and Anchor Grouting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245
4.3.7 Anchor Testing and Stressing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247
4.3.7.1 Performance Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247
4.3.7.2 Proof Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249
4.3.7.3 CreepTest . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250
4.3.7.4 FurtherChecks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250
4.3.7.5 Cutting of Tendon Protrusions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251
4.3.8 Acceptance Criteria . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251
4.3.9 Long Time Monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252
4.3.10 Records . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252
- iv -
4.6 CORROSION PROTECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270
4.6.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270
4.6.2 Materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271
4.6.3 Protection Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272
4.6.3.1 Bond Length . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272
4.6.3.2 Bond and Stressing Length Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272
4.6.3.3 Stressing Length . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273
4.6.3.4 Area Underneath the Anchorage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274
4.6.3.5 Stressing Anchorage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274
4.7 SPECIFICATIONS FOR ANCHOR WORK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274
4.8 SECECTED BIBLIOGRAPHY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276
-V-
6.2.3 One-Way Joists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341
6.2.4 Two-Way Flat Plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343
6.2.5 Two-Way Slabs with Dropped Panels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 346
6.2.6 Two-Way Joists (Waffle Slab) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347
6.2.7 Detailing of Anchorage Zones . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347
6.2.8 Detailing To Avoid or Minimize Development of
Restraint to Dimensional Changes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348
6.3 CONSTRUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 349
6.3.1 Formwork . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 349
6.3.2 Tendon Placing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350
6.3.3 Concrete placement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 351
6.3.4 Stressing Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 352
6.3.5 Inspection Guidelines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 353
6.3.6 Grouting.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 353
6.3.7 Form Removal and Reshoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 353
6.3.8 Protection of End Anchorages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 353
6.3.9 Slab Penatrations and Openings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355
- vii -
INTRODUCTION
. ..
- VIII -
Chapter I
Applications
of
Post-Tensioning
1.1 GENERAL
In this chapter, specific project examples are of light-frame buildings. The 300-foot wide by
presented to illustrate the wide range of appli- 800-foot long exhibition hall is spanned by
cations in which the use of post-tensioning eight pairs of concrete arches (Fig. 7.7)
has been found to be beneficial. In some providing a column-free underground space
cases, the descriptions of projects illustrated which is the largest of its kind in the world.
include discussions of typical construction The successful design and construction of
procedures and details. The tendon types and these arches depended on the use of post-
sizes mentioned in the various examples are tensioned arch ties in three ways. First, the
considered to be representative applications. thrust of 6,000 tons could not be resisted by
However, in most cases, other types and sizes the abutting soil. Therefore, multi-strand tie
of tendons might have been used, and it is not cables were used to resist the force. Secondly,
to be inferred that the examples show the only the ties were used to physically move one end
appropriate post-tensioning solution for the of each arch 3-l/2 inches inward, thus forcing
job. See Section 2.1 for a brief discussion of the crown up 4 inches. This procedure was
the three basic types of post-tensioning carried out after the roof was loaded with 400
tendons. psf. With the addition of all dead and live loads,
totalling 800 psf, the arch crown was expected
to remain above its original position. Thirdly,
1.2 LOW-RISE BUILDINGS
the cables were curved vertically within the
1.2.1 The George Moscone Convention 6-foot thick mat foundation (convexed upward)
Center to exert downward forces, thus helping counter-
San Francisco, California act the large uplift from ground water. The
The Moscone Convention Center, located ground water level is 10 feet above the finished
within walking distance of downtown San floor of the exhibit hall. Post-tensioning was
Francisco, occupies an entire city block and also used to insure safe transfer of the
provides 261,000 square feet of column-free horizontal shear between the arch abutments
exhibition space with a maximum ceiling and the mat. A system of inclined and looped
height of 37 feet. The roof structure was strand tendons between abutment and mat
designed to support 3 feet of soil or 3-stories was utilized for this purpose.
-2-
prestressed system areas follows: (1) reduced
slab thickness, (2) reduced dead loads which
reduced the size of the spread footings, (3)
reduced seismic mass which reduced the
number and size of the shear walls, (4)
elimination of extra reinforcement and beams
around roof skylight openings, (5) ability of
the post-tensioned prestressed system to
handle the large spans with a flat slab design,
and the bonus of crack control on the exposed
interior slab bottoms.
-3-
1.2.4 Brown and Root C&course Crete by 2,800 cu. yds., building height by 16
Office Building in. and reducing construction cost by $500,000.
Houston, Texas There were a limited number of typical joists,
The unique shape of the 600,000 square-foot beams and columns because the unusual
three-story office building in Houston shown building shape caused every joist and beam
in Fig. 7.4 has been described as hour-glass, line in a delta (one of four triangles formed by
bow-tie, and butterfly. By definition, the bisecting each half of the building) to be
building consists of two triangles arranged different. This unusual and nontypical build-
point to point with a square-shaped core at ing configuration required comprehensive
their intersection. The bow-tie is sliced from three-dimensional wind, gravity, and temper-
end to end by a vaulted aluminum and plexi- ature computer analysis to predict the design
glass skylight, 500 long, which lights the main forces and moments. The core or center of the
interior corridor of the building at all three bow-tie shaped building was designed as an
floors. Pedestrian bridges, six in number, cross independent framework containing heavily pre-
thecorridor, which alsofunctionsasan atrium, stressed simple spans 75 ft. long with 25 foot
at the second and third floors. At each end of cantilevers, and was supported by only eight
the bow-tie, six circular pods house mechan- columns. The building shape dictated each
ical and support facilities for the building, floor be separated into five parts - the core
freeing the interior for open plan space for and four deltas-for construction. Each delta
2,300 employees. The core area contains was divided into five pours, with construction
escalators and serves as a lobby and employee of deltas averaging 19 days. Floor framing
entrance. began 20 days into construction, and the
entire structure was completed one week
The structure was redesigned from a conven- ahead of schedule in spite of the extra time
tional reinforced concrete to a post-tensioned required for preparing design alteinates.
concrete scheme, reducing volume of con-
Fig. 1.4 - Brown and Root Concourse Offlce BulldIng, Houston, Texas.
-4-
1.3 MID-RISE BUILDINGS 1.3.2 Pacific Northwest Bell Office Building
1.3.1 Continental Park Plaza Bellevue, Washington
El Segundo, California With 476,000 square feet of floor area, the
The Continental Park Plaza project (Fig. 7.5) Pacific Northwest Bell Office Building shown
incorporates a six-story office building with in Fig. 7.6 includes computer space, admin-
approximately 520,000 square feet of lease- istrative and programmer work space, and
able area, and an adjacent g-level parking miscellaneous support spaces. The building
structure for 1770 cars of approximately form and massing was a direct result of the
500,000 square feet including the roof top three distinct functions to be housed, i.e.,
health club and tennis courts. Nearly the computers, offices, and automobiles. Each
entire 1 .l million square feet of elevated deck function dictated unique requirements in
is post-tensioned. Because of its irregular terms of circulating. security,. and mode of
shape and stepped-back terraced design, a operation. The challenge was to combine
flexible floor system was required which these three diverse components into one
would be adaptable to each different floor and cohesive building. This was done by bridging
yet capable of being consistent so that the administrative wings over the computers
economy and speed of construction would be and parking garage making a dramatic co-
maintained. Typical bay sizes were 32 feet by hesive statement. Separation of the lower
32 feet, and because of a critical height limit- support structure from the upper adminis-
ation, alternate structural systems would have trative wings was enhanced by contrasting
been unacceptable. Coordination with mechan- surface textures and matching surface colors
ical was also important, as the owner desired 9 on the lower wall elements.
foot ceilings. The floor system was designed Post-tensioned prestressed concrete was
for a live load of 75 pounds per square foot and utilized extensively in three distinct areas:
additional dead load of 25 pounds per square
foot to provide maximum flexibility for tenants. l Precast, perimeter shear walls.
Typical balconies and terraces are cantilever- l Long-span perimeter spandrel beams.
ed 12 feet 4 inches. All these design criteria l Long-span floor joints.
were met by an 8-l/2 inch post-tensioned flat The precast architectural panels used for the
plate floor system. The parking structure principal building shear walls were prestres-
utilizes a post-tensioned beam and slab sed horizontally in the precast plant and post-
system. Concrete work for the entire project tensioned vertically in place to form a vertical
was completed from foundations to topping diaphragm uniquely interconnected to a cast-
out in less than 15 months. in-place concrete frame. The two-way prestres-
-6-
The 770,000 square foot floor system of the 1.4 HIGH-RISE BUILDINGS
office spaces between the cores was also
supported by the core walls. There are approx- 1.4.1 Riverplace: The Falls Condominium;
imately 600 post-tensioned T beams, 3 ft. The Pinnacle Housing Tower
deep, spaced on a 4 ft. 8 in. c-c module with Minneapolis, Minnesota
diaphragms between the beams. The dia- Riverplace (Fig. 7.9) includes a 24 story rental
phragms, spaced 4 ft. 8 in. apart, form an housing tower, and a 16 story luxury con-
exposed coffer ceiling which houses square dominium, both constructed over a 4 level
light fixtures. The post-tensioned T-beams parking garage. The total project area in-
span up to 65 feet 4 inches and were formed corporates 621,700 square feet.
with fiber-glass pansallowing up to IO reuses. The unique rental housing tower floor plan was
achieved by using a column grid that was
1.3.4 Terracentre irregular in one direction. For ease of placing
Denver, Colorado cables, a simple arrangement of banded
The unique trapezoidal plan of the fifteen cablesoverthein-linecolumnswithuniform-
story Terracentre (Fig. 7.8) was selected to fit ly spaced cables perpendicular to the bands
the small lot size. The stepped-back form at was used. Spans of up to 32 feet were attained
the lower levels creates a pyramid effect and using an 8 inch post-tensioned flat plate.
fits handsomely into the view plane of the To achieve the optimum view of both the
Capitol Building. The exposed concrete in- downtown skyline and the adjacent riverfront,
terior and exterior surfaces feature a blend of the tower was skewed at 45 degrees to the
exposed aggregate and board-form concrete. parking garage below. To preserve traffic flow
With a total leaseable space of 160,000 square patterns in the parking garage, two major
feet, the office space ranges from 5,300 to columns were terminated at the plaza level
15,000 square feet per floor. The post-tension- above the garage on 108 inch deep post-
ed flat plate floor system of the Terracentre tensioned transfer beams. The beams were
permitted the use of relatively long cantilevers post-tensioned in three stages as construction
for dramatic overhangs and column-free progressed to control excess camber and
spaces. balance stresses.
The luxury condominium building form result-
ed in a very complex series of step-backs
which occurred in some cases at midspan of
the 28foot bays. Because architectural require-
ments of limited structural thicknesses pre-
cluded the possibility of cantilevering at these
step-backs, a series of 1, 2 and 3 story inter-
mediate columns were incorporated into the
structure. To support these columns, the basic
8 inch post-tensioned slabs were either thicken-
ed to IO inches or stiffened with shallow post-
tensioned beams.
The underlying requirement for choosing a
post-tensioned structure for this project was
to provide a structure which could economical-
ly achieve the complex architectural form. The
cost reductions provided by the structural
system resulted from t.he considerations listed
below:
1. Reduced Building Heights -- By using a
minimum structural thickness with a post-
tensioned flat plate, the overall build-
ing height was reduced resulting in sub-
stantial savings in building curtain walls,
shear walls, columns, interior partions as
Fig 1 8 - Terracentre, Denver, Colorado well as mechanical and electrical risers.
-7-
2. Speed of Construction -- The flat plate
post-tensioned slabs built with flying
forms allowed construction to continue
through the winter with a five day turn
around cycle.
3. Structure Costs -- By using flat plate
post-tensioned slabs with span to depth
ratios of 45 to 48, the amount of concrete
used on the project was kept to a minimum
and dead load of the structure was re-
duced. This resulted in savings in colums
and foundations.
4 . Finishes--The crack-free flat slabs allow-
ed ceiling finishes to be applied directly to
the underside of slabs.
5. Fireproofing -- No additional fire proofing
was necessary.
6. Repetition of Structural System --The use of
a similar system throughout this project
maintained continuity of the contractors
work and increased overall efficiency such
that completion time and cost of the project
were minimized in spite of the architectural
complexities.
-8-
1.4.2 Parklane Plaza Condominium
Houston, Texas
This 400,000 square-foot, 35story structure
(See Fig. 7.70) is square in shape with sides of
105 feet and rounded corners. These corners
created cantilevers ranging in size from 18feet in
one direction to 12 feet in the other. The struc-
tural deck was an 8-inch post-tensioned con-
crete flat plate spanning from a central core
shear wall to the outside perimeter columns. The
column arrangement, which was dictated by
architectural considerations, defined a 42 foot x
30 foot interior bay. This large bay and the
double cantilever at the building corners made
the flat plate design most critical. The core area
contains the stairs, elevators, and major mech-
anical chases, and is defined by 42-4 square,
18-inch thick shear walls.
Because the architectural scheme dictated long
spans, post-tensioned flat plate construction
was the most economical system for this struc-
ture. By using a thin post-tensioned slab of
lightweight concrete, cost savings were realized
in the column and foundation mat systems as
well as the floor slab itself. Detailed analysisand
design were required to control stresses and
deflections caused by the long interior and
cantilever spans.
The two-way cantilevers created critical stresses
at the building corners. These stresses were
controlled ,by locating a conventionally rein-
forced diagonal slab beam spanning to columns
on either side of the corner, and judiciously
locating post-tensioning bands along the build-
ing perimeter. This design effectively reduced
the cantilever to eight feet in the building diago-
nal. Diagonal top and bottom bar was placed
over the slab beam to carry the cantilever load.
The banded, post-tensioning tendons located at
the slab edge and continuing to the corner,
placed the slab in compression, resulting in a
crack-free cantilever. Because of the unusual
design details at the corner cantilevers, accurate
perimeter insert placement for the precast win-
dow wall system and the many mechanical
sleeves was extremely important. The contractor
scheduled one floor per week with no excep-
tions for weather, holidays, or mechanical fail-
ures. To assure this performance, a full-scale
mock-up was fabricated for a typical floor. All
tendons, rebar, sleeves, and inserts were placed,
and conflicts resolved prior to start of slab con-
struction. As a result 35 floors were constructed
without missing a cycle, with virtually no over-
time, and without a single misplaced embedment. Fig. 1.10 - Parklane Plaza Condominium, Houston, Texas.
-9-
1.4.3 Western Canadian Place imately 10 separate floor levels. Stair openings
Calgary, Alberta, Canada of about 14 ft. by 14 ft. were easily cut into post-
Western Canadian Place, figs. 1.17 and 7.72, tensioned slabs without the use of extensive
incorporates two towers, one of a 41 foot height shoring, and in most cases without requiring any
and the other a 31 floor height. The office towers additional support beams. Interior designers
are interconnected from the fourth floor down, were requested only to avoid beam locations
and enclose a three-story atrium and commercial and end spans when locating stair openings, and
base. There are two levels of underground that did not unduly restrict their planning.
parking. The total total floor area is 1,420,OOO Neither a cost nor a design restraint was created
square feet. The structural framing system in locating stair openings, due to the fact that the
incorporates a wide, flat beam and slab system floor system was post-tensioned.
with longest beam spans of about 40 feet. The In the two towers, there are 64 office and
slab thickness varied between 7 and 8-l/4 mechanical room floors, of which the first was
inches, and the beam depths ranged from about poured in November of 1981 and the last was
18 to 21 inches. The open, rounded corners were poured during November of 1982. Use of post-
a special design requirement that was resolved tensioning was a strong factor in ensuring fast
through the use of post-tensioning. construction, in spite of working through months
After completion of the project, a change in of cold winter conditions. In the total project,
tenant requirements made it desirable to provide there are 1,465,OOO Ibs. of 0.6 diameter post-
stair openings to interconnect floors at approx- tensioning strand.
- ll-
1.4.4 Energy Centre 8) Due to poor soil conditions, the building is
New Orleans, Louisiana founded on 18 inch octagonal and 14 inch
square prestressed piles driven 203 ft. and
The Energy Centre shown in fig. 1.73 is a 39- 170 ft., respectively. Design loads were
story highrise tower located in downtown New determined by in-place load testing.
Orleans. It consists of 32 office levels construct-
ed over a 7 level parking garage. The structural
system is a post-tensioned cast-in-place con-
crete frame with interiorcore shear walls. The
total area of the project is approximately 1.1
million square feet. There are 816,800 square
feet of construction in the tower with 25,525
square feet on each typical floor. The parking
garage has space for approximately 630 cars
with a mechanical mezzanine separating the
tower and garage.
Special design features incorporated in the
Energy Centre were as follows:
1) The design of the building required a very
open layout with 42clear spans, 90ceiling
heights, and a 23 ceiling plenum for
mechanical HVAC, ceiling lights, and sprink-
lers, while maintaining a 126 floor to floor
height. A post-tensioned lightweight con-
crete slab and beam structure was chosen
as the most economical structural system to
accomplish these goals.
2) The floor framing spans 42 feet using 14
inch deep post-tensioned, tapered haunch-
ed beams with a 5 inch post-tensioned slab
spanning 20 feet between beams.
3 ) The building has a unique parallelogram-
shape with twelve column-free, bay-window
lease spaces on each floor requiring the
slab to cantilever 10 feet. The slabs were to
8 in these areas to support the floor and the
granite thickened exterior.
4) Control of deflections in the cantilevers was
carefully investigated using two-way load
balancing to avoid potential problems due
to live load and long term effects.
5) Post-tensioned shrinkage and temperature
reinforcement was used in lieu of conven-
tional rebar reinforcement.
6) Building setbacks at the top of structure
required 42 post-tensioned transfer girders
supporting 6 levels.
7) The owner requested several floors to be
designed for 125 psf live load to allow for
leasing flexibility. This live load greatly
exceeded the local code requirements, but
did not revise the geometry of the floor
framing. This factor was of primary import-
ance for the constructabililty of the project
using flying forms. Fig. 1.13 - The Energy Centre, New Orleans, Louisiana.
- 12-
1.4.5 Huron Plaza Office and was possible to show that the post-tensioning
Apartment Building greatly reduced the need for shoring and reshor-
Chicago, Illinois ing. This in turn allowed finishing work to follow
closely the casting of the concrete frame.
The Huron Plaza Office and Apartment Building
(fig. 7.74) is a 56-story highrise with an adjacent A subtle advantage of post-tensioned construc-
IO-story garage located just north of downtown tion for this project was the resulting flatness of
Chicago. The structural system is a post-tension- the slabs, which made it easier for the finishing
ed cast-in-place concrete frame which also trades to install dry-walls, shower bases, bath
forms the exterior of the building with exposed tubs, and tiles, kitchen cabinets, and align trims
architectural concrete columns and spandrel and moldings. The crack-free exterior spandrel
beams. The typical floor is 70 x 130 yielding system is also a result of the compression
9,100 sq. ft. for a total of 510,000 sq. ft. for the introduced by the prestressing tendons.
tower. The garage is 80 x 180 or 14,400 sq. ft. for
a total of 144,000 sq. ft.
The design program called for 8 office floors
with a column-free area around a compact
center core below 48 apartment floors. Due to
the narrow tower, it was necessary to provide
three lines of coupled shear walls in order to
maintain acceptable stiffness. These, however,
could not be permitted within the 8 commercial
floors at the lower part of the tower, where only
the shaft could be accommodated. This was
resolved by the use of the exterior columns as
outriggers resulting in a moment diagram for
the shear wall system, center core as shown in
Fig. 7.75. These moments were readily handled
by the shear wall system. The slabs were
designed as a combination of one-way and
banded flat plate post-tensioned slabs. The
architectural layout did not lend itself to a
straight and disciplined column layout. This,
however, was overcome by deflecting the band-
ed tendon runs in the transverse direction
laterally to correspond to the column layout. The
longitudinal tendons were generally uniformly
spaced, except where deflected laterally around
slab openings and mechanical obstructions.
Whereas the selection of post-tensioning was
natural for the lo-story parking garage, the
decision to use a post-tensioned design for the
tower was based upon the need for a column-
free floor plan for theeight commercial floorsat
the lower part of the tower, as well as the desire
to place concrete shear walls on the dividing
lines between apartments, which resulted in
typical spans of 276. With weight at a premium,
only a post-tensioned design could achieve
these spans with a 7 thick slab.
In order to allow casting of two floors each week,
three days per floor and working on Saturdays, a
slight upgrading of the concretedesign strength
was necessary, from fc = 4000 psi to 4600 psi.
With the improved concrete strength, and the
Fig. 1.14 - Huron Plaza Office and Apartment BulldIng,
relatively low shear stresses for this design, it Chicago, IlImos
- 73-
1.5.1 Parking Structures for the
New Orleans Superdome
The initial design decision relative to the parking
structures for the New Orleans Superdome was
the selection of a concrete framing system due
to fire rating requirements. Various bay sizes
and framing systems were then studied and
detailed cost estimates were developed for
structures with a rectangular bay size. The
lowest estimate was for a 54 x 18-ft. bay post-
tensioned structures using lightweight concrete
(115 lb. per cu. ft.).
The basic framing system is an 18 ft. span with 5
in. slab spanning between 16 x 28 in. beams
spanning 54ft. Expansion joints are provided on
lines running east to west which divide the
structures into units of eight bays at 18 ft. with
the end units four bays at 18 ft. In the north to
south directions the expansion joints divide the
structures into segments of up to three bays at
54 ft. Joints through the slabs are terminated at
the expansion joints with dual beams and
columns. The joints through the beams are
accommodated with beam bracketson one side
of the column and neoprene bearing pads to
allow for movement due to temperature, shrink-
age and creep.
The completed parking structures shown in Fig.
7.76 measure378~864ft.onthewestsideofthe
BENDING stadium, and 324 x 864 ft. on the east side. The
- $;ENTS three level parking structures accommodate a
CORE total of 5,000 automobiles.
Fig. 1.15 - Moment Diagram for Shear Walls and Center Core,
Huron Plaza Office and Apartment Building,
Chicago, Illmols.
-14-
Fig. 1.17 -Transportation Center Parking Structure. Dayton, Ohlo.
- 15-
Fig. 1.18 -Williams Square West Garage in Las Colinas, Irving. Texas
- 76-
Fig. 1.19 - Crushed granite Aggregate Concrete Surface Treatment,
Williams Square West Garage, Irving, Texas.
1.5.4 Port Columbus International Airport tapered transverse ribs spaced at 68 on
Parking Structure c e n t e r .
Columbus, Ohio 3. Expansion joints: Three expansion joints at
roughly equal spacing were located along
The parking and enplaning structure for the Port
the 810 length of the structure. The appear-
Columbus Airport Terminal Building, Figs. 7.20
ance of double columns or column brackets
and 1.27, is on prominent public display, There-
would have been objectionable; therefore,
fore, an architecturally pleasing appearance for
the expansion joints were formed by beam
both vertical and horizontal surfaces, along with
brackets at quarter points of the span.
the highest degree of watertightness were of
4. Lateral stability: The stairs, elevators and
major importance. To achieve these goals and to
helices separated from the Parking Struc-
accommodate the intricate traffic pattern of the
two on-grade drives below, the design require- ture by expansion joints to allow for a high
ments for this structure were established as degree of freedom for thermal movements.
follows: Therefore, lateral stability was provided by
moment frames, involving all available col-
1. Column spacing: 60 x 60 bays were select- umns in both directions.
ed to provide clear, open driving lanes for 5. Forming/Shoring system: To achieve a high
the Enplaning, Deplaning, and Parking quality finish, custom-made 30 deep x 54
Drives under the parking levels. wide x 30 (+) long fiberglass pans were used
2. Floor construction: Parking levels; 4: top to form the slabs and ribs.
slab spanning between 30 deep, 16 wide
Fig 1.20 - Port Columbus International Alrport Parklng Structure, Columbus, Ohio
- 18-
1.5.5 Spokane International Airport
Parking Structure,
Spokane, Washington
The cantilever spiral ramps are the main
aesthetic design feature of the Spokane Inter-
national Airport Parking Structure (fig, 1.22).
The clean, smooth look is achieved by the use of
the post-tensioned cantilever slab. To facilitate
construction and to improve appearance, the
tendons were sleeved through the wall so the
core could be built without interruption. The
cantilever moment is resisted by the core wall.
An 8 ft. clear ceiling height was maintained by
Fig 1.21 - View Underneath Port Columbus Internat!onal utilizing post-tensioned joists with a total depth
Alrport Parkmg Structure, Columbus, Ohlo. of 24-l/2 inches, The efficiency of the post-
tensioned joists allowed a spacing of 56 inches.
Several framing systems were given preliminary This created a more open feeling in the garage.
consideration for the parking structure: exposed The joists at the column lines were widened and
structural steel, precast concrete, convention- reinforced to carry the seismic loads.
ally reinforced and post-tensioned cast-in-place To achieve a higher quality slab, post-tensioning
concrete. The following requirements deter- was used even though rebarwould have sufficed.
mined the final selection: Post-tensioning was provided at an added cost
l Fireproof construction of only 17 cents per sq. ft., which compares
l Large bay sizes favorably to other methods of increasing the life
l Highway loading on bridge of the slab.
l High degree of watertightness
The simplicity of the post-tensioned forming
l Minimal maintenance requirements
system and its inherent economy in long span
* Aesthetically pleasing appearance
construction was the key to a very favorable cost
The structural system that best satisfied all these per car. This project was a design/build com-
requirements was considered to be the post- petition which won over local precast and other
tensioned cast-in-place concrete frame. structural systems.
- 20 -
Fig. 1.25 - Cecil Community College, Cecil County, Maryland.
1.6.3 International Aviation Square, is completely column free, the entire structure is
Montreal, Canada supported by the service core and eight exterior
columns which also contain mechanical shafts.
The new headquarters for the International Civil
Between these columns span one story high
Aviation organization (ICAO) shown in Fig. 7.26 architectural precast concrete Vierendeel trusses
is 115ft. by 115ft. in plan with 27 stories plus a which support two floors each. A total of 44
mechanical penthouse. The interior of the tower Vierendeels, each 75ft., 7-in. long by 16-ft., 8-in.
frame the building starting at the sixth floor.
Each Vierendeel truss was subdivided into twenty
precast concrete elements: six l-shaped pieces
as the vertical members of the truss and fourteen
horizontal filler pieces. As illustrated in Fig. 7.27,
segments were supported on scaffolding and
post-tensioned together with four tendons, two
per upper and lower chord of the truss, each
tendon providing a design force fo 600 kips. The
building is designed for earthquake Zone 2 with
75 percent of the loads carried by the interior core
and 25 percent by the columns and Vierendeels.
-2l-
Fig. 1.28 - Calgary Exhibition and Stampede Grandstand, Alberta. Canada
- 22 -
Fig. 1.30 - Hoolulu Park Grandstand, HIIo, Hawall.
Fig. 1.31 -Construction of Domed Field House, University of West Virginia, Morgantown, West Virginia.
-23-
Fig. 1.32 -Central Untversity Ltbrary,
University of California, LaJolla. California
- 24 -
1.9 PRESTRESSED ROCK
AND SOIL ANCHORS
The first application of a prestressed anchor
dates back to 1935 when the late Andre Coyne, a
French engineer, used prestressed anchors to
stabilize the Cheurfas Dam in Algeria. Until
recently, the 1100 ton anchors used in the
Cheurfas Dam were the largest ever installed in a
structure. This project generated a number of
new systems and applications in Europe. How-
ever, the widespread use of prestressed rock and
soil anchors is a relatively recent development in
North America.
A great variety of applications of prestressed
rock and soil anchors has developed, including:
a, Tie-backs for foundation excavations
b. Retaining walls and revetments
c. Stabilization of rock slopes and under-
ground excavations
d. Dam stabilization
e. Anchorage of fixed points and anchorage
against upward water pressure.
The use of prestsressed tie-backs for foundation
excavations is illustrated in Figs. 7.35 and 7.36.
Recommended design and construction pro- Fig. 1.36 - Drilled Concrete Shafts supported by
Three Levels of Tie-Backs and Walers.
cedures for prestressed rock and soil anchors
are presented in Chapter 4.
- 25 -
1.10 FOUNDATIONS, PAVEMENTS
AND SLABS-ON-GROUND
1.10.1 M a t F o u n d a t i o n s
Due to unfavorable soil conditions at a building
site, post-tensioned mat foundations are occa-
sionally used as an alternate to more expensive
pile foundations. The function of post-tension-
ing in the mat is essentially to pick up the
column loads and distribute them more or less
uniformly over the entire plan area of the mat. As
illustrated in Fig. 1.37, the tendon layout re-
quired for this purpose can be visualized as an
upside down flat plate. The post-tensioning
tendons utilized for the mat in Fig. 7.37 were
l/2-in. diameter, 270k, unbonded strand ten-
dons. Fig. 1.37 -Tendon Layout for Post-Tensioned Mat Foundation
- 26 -
Fig. 1.40 - Post-Tensioned Floor Slab, Roundup Centre,
Calgary, Alberta, Canada.
1.10.4 Po&-Tensioned Commercial and cause of the compressive stress induced in the
Industrial Floors concrete by the post-tensioning tendons. Ad-
Post-tensioned industrial floors such as the ditional reduction in industrial floor costs are
150,000 square foot floor of the Roundup Centre, provided by elimination of most slab joints,
Calgary, Alberta, Canada shown in Fig. 7.40 reduced construction time, and, in some cases,
provide initial economy, improved serviceability, the elimination of pile supports or drilled shafts.
and life-cycle cost advantages when compared Life-cycle cost advantages of post-tensioned
to other methods of constructing large concrete floors are also provided because elimination of
floors. For example, the 5-l/2 inch thick slab joints and cracks reduces both slab and vehicle
used for the Roundup Centre was built in three (fork-lift) maintenance costs. For floors of pre-
50,000 square foot sections with construction fabricated metal buildings, the post-tensioning
joints at the third points of each section as also serves as a horizontal tie for the horizontal
shown in Fig. 7.47. Only two expansion joints reaction from the building columns. This elim-
were required for the 150,000 square foot floor inates the need for conventional reinforcing bars
along the two interior column lines. Post-tension- in the slab to dissipate the column reaction into
ing has also been used effectively in construc- the slab, and at the same time eliminates the
tion of superflat industrial floors, tennis courts, possibility of slab cracking associated with such
overlays of deteriorated concrete slabs, drive- detai Is.
ways, parking lots, and many other similar Further discussion of applications and design
applications. and construction procedures for commercial
The primary reason for the initial economy of and industrial floors is available in a separate PTI
post-tensioned industrial floors is the reduced publication Post-Tensioned Commercial and
thickness of the concrete slab permitted be- Industrial Floors.
37
- P O U R STRIP 6 FT. (1100 mm) TYPICAL
I I I I
I I
Fig. 1.41 -Construction Joints
for 50,000 square feet Section
of Roundup Centre Floor.
1 I
I I
1.10.5 Highway and Airport Pavements appear practical. Currently, further research on
prestressed concrete pavement overlays is being
Four full scale prestressed concrete highway
conducted by the University of Texas at Austin
pavement research sections were built between
for the Texas Highway Department.
1971 and 1979 which have a total length of 22
lane miles. These pavements were built in differ- An 800 foot long by 150 foot wide section of a
ent parts of the United States in various climatic heavily traveled runway at OHare International
areas and carried a range of traffic. An assess- Airport in Chicago was replaced with a post-
ment of performance for these pavements pub- tensioned runway in 1980. The project was
lished by the Federal Highway Administration scheduled for a 60-day construction period. It
concluded that Prestressed concrete pave- was completed in 56 days. The section of runway,
ments are competitive on a first cost basis, and shown in use in Fig. 7.42, was heavily instrument-
provide a viable design alternative to other ed, and it has performed very well. Plans are
pavement types. Performance to date would currently under development for other uses of
indicate lower maintenance costs will be incur- post-tensioned pavements at 0 Hare.
red, and prestressed slab lengths up to 600 feet
- 28 -
1.11 BRIDGES
From the inception of prestressing in Europe, a
primary application was the construction of
highway bridges. The use of post-tensioning is
now a major factor in highway bridge construc-
tion in the United States and in various provinces
in Canada. Control of cracking, reduced struc-
tural depth, ease of accommodating curved
roadway alignment, durability, low maintenance
costs, and potential for economical construction
of long spans are some of the more important
reasons for the rise in the use of post-tensioning
in highway bridge construction. The advantages
of post-tensioning have also been applied to the
construction of continuous cast-in-place con-
Crete railway bridges.
Fig. 1.46 - Interstate Grade Separation Bridge, Tennessee. Spans of 127 and 166.5 ft
- 30 -
1.11.2 Precast Segmental Cantilever Bridges segmental box girder bridge construction in
North America was the Bear River Bridge near
The use of precast segmental box girder bridges Digby, Nova Scotia, shown during construction
erected in cantilever (without falsework) began in Fig. 7.47. Although the first of its type in the
in France in 1962. Since that time, this type of Province, the Bear River Bridge won a competi-
construction has become widely used in Europe tive bidding contest against a structural steel
for spans of 200 to 350 or 400 ft., and has been
alternate. The Bear River Bridge was opened to
used throughout the world for many notable
traffic in December, 1972. The first application of
bridges. This method of construction combines
precast segmental box girder bridge construc-
many of the advantages of cast-in-place post-
tion in the United States was the Corpus Christi
tensioned bridge construction with the potential Bridge shown in Fig. 7.48. The Corpus Christi
for remarkable speed of construction, The latter Bridge was designed by the Bridge Division of
advantage is further enhanced because the the Texas Highway Department and has spans
superstructure elements can be cast while the of lOO-ft., 200-ft., IOO-ft. Construction of the
substructure is being built. The Precast Seg- Corpus Christi Bridge followed extensive testing
mental Box Girder Bridge Manual published of a model of the bridge at the University of
jointly by PTI and PCI contains detailed discus- Texas at Austin which demonstrated reserve
sion of the design technology for precast seg- strength capacity substantially in excess of
mental box girder bridges. specification requirements. The Corpus Christi
One of the first major applications of precast Bridge was opened to traffic in 1974.
Following the success of these first projects, 0 The Seven Mile Bridge, Florida Keys (Fig.
precast segmental construction has become a 7.50), with a total length of 35,863 ft. is the
major factor in the construction of large bridges longest continuous prestressed concrete
in North America. A few of the many noteworthy segmental bridge in the world. The 264
bridges of this type that have been completed in spans of 135 ft. length were erected a span
the following years are described below and at a time with an overhead gantry as shown
illustrated in the indicated figures. in Fig. 7.57. Precast segmental design and
l The Kishwaukee River Bridges (Fig. 7.49) construction saved 7 million dollars in con-
near Rockford, Illinois have main spans of struction costs, and the project was com-
250 ft. and total lengths of 1090 ft. These pleted six months ahead of schedule.
bridges were the first in the U.S. to be 0 The Wiscasset Bridge, Maine (Fig. 7.52),
erected with a launching truss, and they opened to traffic in 1983 is the first precast
were also the first to use bar tendons for the segmental box girder bridge in the North-
main longitudinal reinforcement. eastern U.S. The Wiscasset Bridge features
special engineering and construction fea-
tures to provide durability under severe
winter weather and applications of de-icing
salts.
0 The Linn Cove Viaduct, Linville, North
Carolina (construction view shown in Fig.
7.53) illustrates precast segmental construc-
tion on curves with radii as small as 250 ft.
Due to the S shape of the bridge in plan,
the superelevation goes from a full IO
percent in one direction to a full IO percent
in the other direction and part way back
again in the 1,243 ft. length of the bridge.
The segments for the 180 ft. spans are
erected in progressive placement with a
stiff leg derrick and the use of a temporary
erection bent as shown in Fig. 7.53. The use _
of one-way progressive placement and con-
struction of piers from the top of the bridge
deck make the Linn Cove Viaduct the first
bridge in the world to be completely erected
Fig 1.50 - Seven Mile Bridge, Fiorda, Keys from the top.
--32-
__
Fig. 1.51 - Overhead Gantry, Seven Mile Bridge, Florida, Keys Fig 1 53 - Llnn Cove VIaduct, Linville, North Carolma.
- 33 ~
1.11.3 Cast-in-Place Segmental Cantilever tendons. All ducts were adequate for 19
Bridges strand tendons in the event that additional
The cast-in-place segmental cantilever method construction prestress was required. Pre-
of bridge construction developed in Europe stressing bars also were used in the top
following World War II has now been used for slab to provide sufficient post-tensioning
construction of many long span concrete to advance the travelers without stressing
bridges throughout the world. This method the permanent strand tendons. This elimi-
normally utilizes traveling formwork carriages to nated tendon threading and stressing from
cast sections 10 to 15 ft. long at each end of the critical path.
opposing cantilevers. Recently, modifications of The roadway surface of the four-lane
this procedure have been found economical for bridge was post-tensioned transversely
bridges in the 200 ft. to 400 ft. span range where with 4 - 0.6 inch diameter strand tendons.
full cantilevers are cast-in-place on falsework This provided a crack-free deck, thereby
and are then stressed segmentally. However, for enhancing the durability and serviceability
bridges where the use of falsework is impractical, of the structure. To permit the webs to
the cantilever method with cast-in-place seg- carry the high shear forces without crack-
ments provides an economical means of con- ing, the webs were post-tensioned with two
crete bridge construction for spans up to at least strands 0.6 inches in diameter looped to
850 ft., the length of the main span of the form a 4 strand tendon.
Gateway Bridge in Brisbane, Australia. l Douglas Bridge crossing Gastineau Chan-
The first North American application of cast-in- nel, Juneau and Douglas, Alaska. The
place segmental construction was the St. Adele Douglas Bridge, Fig. 7.56, consists of 3
Bridge in Quebec, Canada, completed in 1964. spans, 330 ft.-620 ft.-330 ft., with a total
The St. Adele Bridge has main spans of 265 ft. length of 1,280 ft.
The Knight Street Bridge, Vancouver-Richmond, Because of marine navigation and channel
Canada, with main spans of 360 ft. was com- configuration requirements, g long main
pleted in 1974. The first United States application span (in excess of 600 feet) was needed.
was the Pine Valley Creek Bridge near San The post-tensioned segmental structure
Diego, California, also completed in 1974. The
was the only long span structure of mod-
Pine Valley Creek Bridge shown under construc-
erate cost without substantial structural
tion in Fig. 7.54 has spans of 270, 340, 450, 380
steel. Experience has proved that steel
and 270 ft. The piers range in height from 140 to structures in marine sites require substan-
340 ft. and the roadway is approximately 450 ft. tial maintenance during their lives. Pre-
above the water level in Pine Valley Creek. The stressed concrete, on the other hand, has
examples described below are illustrative of the shown extended maintenance free service.
significant accomplishments in cast-in-place This long, maintenance free life was the
segmental cantilever bridge construction since deciding factor in selecting post-tensioned
1974.
concrete at this site.
l The 750 ft. main span of the Houston Ship The bridge structure is a single box section
Channel Bridge shown in Fig. 7.55 is the of variable depth. The side cantilever
longest in the Americas for a segmental lengths are 72 feet. The box section, in
bridge constructed by the cantilever meth- addition to its structural advantage of high
od. The total length of thechannel crossing torsional stiffness, provided a location for
is 1,500 feet, consisting of the main span of many utilities. The box section protects the
750 feet and two side spans of 375 feet utilities from the sometimes severe weather
each. The cross section consists of a two- while providing a permanent work platform
cell box with a slab overhang of 6 feet. for utility-maintenance and repair.
Three webs, 12 to 16 inches wide, are The structuie is post-tensioned longitud-
spaced at 23feet. The box is 15 feet deep at inally, thedeck is post-tensioned transverse-
midspan with a haunch at the piers 47.5 ly, the webs contain vertical stressing, and
feet deep. The top slab varies from 10.5 looped tendons provide vertical stressing
inches to 24.5 inches; the bottom slab for the piers. Mild steel reinforcing was
varies from 10 inches to 4 feet at the pier. used to resist transverse bending in the
The bridge is stressed longitudinally with a web, and also the bottom flange, which is
mix of 12 and 19 - 0.6 inch diameter strand not transversely stressed.
FIO. 1.54 - Construction View
of-Pine Valley Creek Bridge
near San Diego, California.
Fig. 1.55- H o u s t o n S h i p
Channel Bridge,
Houston, Texas.
Fig. 1.56 - Douglas Bridge Crossing Gastineau Channel, Juneau and Douglas, A&.ka, I
- 35 -
Fig. 1.58 - North Channel I-205 Columbia River Bridge, Portland, Oregon
- 36 -
* North Channel I-205 Columbia River 150 ft. of clearance for river traffic, and
Bridge, Portland, Oregon, Shown under then descends to remain below the flight
construction in fig. 7.57, and following path approaching the airport at the south-
completion in fig. 7.58, the North Channel ern end. Segmental cantilever construction
l-205 Columbia River Bridge features spans eliminated falsework in the river, reducing
ranging from 240 to 600 ft. for a total length river flow problems and navigation con-
of 5,710 ft. Two separate four-lane road- flicts
ways, the full shoulders plus a median l Genesee River Bridge, Rochester, New
bikeway result in a total width of 150 ft. York (Fig. 7.59). The Genesee River Bridge
out-to-out of the structures. The main span utilizes cast-in-place cantilever construc-
series, which required segments up to 32 tion for the 1,332 ft. long river portion, and
feet deep, was built using cast-in-place conventional box girder construction on
segmental cantilever construction to elimi- falsework for a 718 ft. long section over
nate handling very large segments. Seg- Genesee Valley Park. The river portion
ment geometry had to provide for curv- features spans ranging from 180 ft. to 430
ature of both the horizontal and vertical ft. In the longitudinal direction, draped
alignments. In addition, segment depths strand tendons were used in all spans.
tapered from 17 ft. to 12 ft. as span lengths Thread bar tendons were used for trans-
shortened to complement the descending verse post-tensioning of the deck slab and
roadway. The 600 ft. main span provides vertical post-tensioning of the webs.
-Jf -
1.11.5 Rapid Transit Bridges The following design and construction tech-
niques are incorporated in the structures;
Post-tensioned segmental construction of
various types has been applied successfully to saving money and time while still providing
major light rail rapid transit and people-mover the best bridge possible:
bridges. Two outstanding examples described * multiple shear keys in the box webs;
below are the Metropolitan Atlanta Rapid Tran- l span-by span erection;
sit Bridges, and the Walt Disney World Mono- l match-cast segments with no epoxy in the
Fig, 1.61 - Metropolitan Atlanta Rapid Transit Authority Bridges under Construction
- 38 -
ment efficiency yielded substantial cost The replacement of the original San Lorenzo
savings. The beams were erected and simply River Bridge in Santa Cruz County (Fig. 7.63),
supported on precast columns until the beam- California is located on a designated scenic
to-column joints were cast. Six spans were route which is also the only road through the
then post-tensioned with three tendons to area. It spans a waterway which must remain
form a 640-foot long continuous structure. unobstructed due to rain swollen flow and
The parabolic-haunched soffit of the beams large drift from the surrounding forests. Traffic
simplified continuous post-tensioning through was to be maintained at all times. To satisfy
beamway segments, and allowed the stressing these controls, a post-tensioned cast-in-place
tendons to run straight, yet be effective for box girder was selected thus providing the
both positive and negative moments. Use of reduced structure depth required for clear-
continuous post-tensioned segments allowed ances, an unobstructed channel and asmooth
an increase in span lengths, reduced the soffit to accommodate debris. It also simplified
number of expansion joints, and eliminated partial width construction which satisfied
the need for bearings. Future maintenance traffic control needs. Portions of the existing
needs were greatly reduced by the absence of piers were incorporated into the final structure.
typical connection and bearing hardware. Two separate outside structures of about 14
feet in width were constructed while traffic
used the existing structure in the center.
Traffic was then switched to these outer struc-
tures and the center portion was built using
part of the existing piers with new caps. The
structure was completed with the closure
pours connecting the outer sections. Soon
after this structure was completed, it success-
fully survived a large flood which caused
severe damage to many buildings in the
immediate area.
External post-tensioning, as shown in fig. 1.64,
was used to restore the structural integrity of
five cracked cantilever piers for the Route 695
Bridgeover Route 151 in Baltimore, Maryland.
A need for remedial action became apparent
when bridge inspectors discovered open
cracks in the top part of the pier caps indicat-
ing overstress through the cantilever section.
The five skewed piers supported roadway
spans ranging from 71 to 127. The pier caps
were 63 long end to end which included equal
15 cantilever sections. Fabricated structural
steel weldment-bearings on each end of the
pier cap were used as an anchorage for ten
(10) post-tensioning bars (five on each face of
the pier cap). The initial post-tensioning force
applied per bar varied from 123 kips to 170
n)
kips, depending upon the pier being stressed.
Fig. 1.62 - Curved beam section of Walt Disney World Monorall
Orlando, Florida.
In the interest of simplicity and expediency,
the post-tensioning mechanism was identical
for all five piers; however, the total post-
1 .I 1.6 Bridge Repair and Replacement tensioning force on each pier was customized
Post-tensioning has been used effectively in directly for corresponding loads carried by
bridge repair and replacement projects for all each pier. After the end anchorages were
types of steel, concrete and prestressed con- fabricated and the post-tensioning bars were
crete bridges. Two examples are presented in on the site, erection and post-tensioning was
this section as illustrations of the many pos- completed in two weeks.
sible uses of post-tensioning for this purpose. I
Fig 1 63 ~ San Lorenzo Rwer Brtdge, Santa Cruz County, Callfornla
Fig. 1.64 - Repair and Strengthening of pier caps by use of external post-tensioning.
Route 695 Bridge over Route 151. Baltimore, Maryland.
- 40 -
Fig. 1.65 - Treated Water
Storage Reservoir,
Arvada, Colorado.
-41-
Fig. 1.66 - North-West Reservoir, Regina, Saskatchewan
tendons
1.13 NUCLEAR CONTAINMENT VESSELS
tendon z%F
The safety of a nuclear power station is the anchors
first consideration in every reactor structure Cavity
,iner
design. It follows that the modes of failure of a
pressure vessel must be predictable and should
not be approached by any credible fault con-
ditions. It is highly desirable that warning
should be given by slowly progressive failure
modes. These requirements can be attained
tendon #----
with post-tensioned prestressed concrete.
Two types of post-tensioned prestressed con-
crete reactor structures are used. In the first,
the complete pressure circuit embracing
reactor and heat exchangers are placed within -. - - -.
oenetretic
the one concrete vessel (a prestressed con-
crete reactor vessel). The Fort St. Vrain pre-
stressed concrete reactor vessel near Denver,
Colorado, was the first of its type in the United
States, Fig. 7.67 shows details of the Fort St.
Vrain reactor vessel. The vessel is an approxi-
mate hexagonal prism, 106-ft. high and 6i-ft.
across the flats. The internal cavity is 75ft. in
height and 31-ft. in diameter. Fig. 1.67 - Details of Fort St. Vrain Reactor Vessel
- 42 -
The second type of post-tensioned concrete 1.14 SPECIAL APPLICATIONS
reactor structure is called a containment
vessel. In this type of design, the reactor is 1.14.1 Stage Post-Tensioning
contained in a steel pressure vessel connected The City of Chicago recently extended its
by external ducts to heat exchangers. The rapid transit line to OHare International Air-
complete system is then surrounded by a port to provide a direct link to downtown, the
larger more voluminous containment struc- Loop. The new Chicago Transit Authority
ture. Fig. 7.68 shows construction of the post- station at OHare is located beneath an
tensioned containment structure of the Palis- existing six-story 14,000 car parking garage.
ades Nuclear Plant near South Haven, Because the column spacing in the existing
Michigan. garage was not compatible with the operation
of, or movement within, the station, the
caissons supporting two rows of columns had
to be cut off. A system of seven (7) transfer
girders was needed to support the garage over
the top of the station. Each girder, with
dimensions of 10 ft. x IO ft. x 75 ft., supports
five stories of the existing garage, plus the
ground level parking. In addition, they were
designed to accommodate a top-to-bottom
construction procedure.
The advantage in using post-tensioned pre-
stressed concrete was the ability to prestress
the girders in two entirely opposite ways. The
temporary post-tensioning was in the top of
the girder, to resist loads on the cantilevered
ends while the girder was supported on the
existing garage caissons. The final post-
tensioning was in the bottom of the girder to
resist the column loads from the garage above,
while the girder is supported at the ends. Prior
to the final post-tensioning, the temporary
post-tensioning was released. The use of post-
tensioning permitted all the necessary load
transfers to be achieved with virtually no
movement of the existing structure.
Special features of the design and construction
of the transfer girders:
The girders were cast on the ground (Fig.
7.69 and 1.70), before excavation of the
subway station, eliminating the need for
shoring and scaffolding under the form-
work.
Fig. 1.66 - Construction View of Post-Tensioned Containment
Structure of Palisades Nuclear Plant Near South Haven, Michigan The girders were supported on the existing
caissons during excavation of the station
(Fig. 7.77), eliminating the need for tempor-
ary supports. Special temporary post-
tensioning was required for this stage
since the support of the girder by the
garage columns and caissons represented
the opposite of the final structural action
of the girders.
After construction of the permanent sup-
ports for the girders, before cutting off the
- 43 -
Fig. 1.69 -Transfer Girder Construction. OHare International Airport, Chlcago.
- 44 -
existing garage caissons, precisely com-
puted final post-tensioning and detension-
ing was applied to transfer all the existing
load from the caissons to the new sup-
ports. Very careful and sophisticated
analysis was required to ensure that the
caissons were essentially unstressed
(neither compression nor tension) when
they were cut off. Fig. 7.72 illustrates the
process of cutting off the original caissons.
l The second and higher floors of the garage
were in full and normal use during con-
struction, even while the caissons were
being cut off. In fig. 7.73, the completed
transfer girders are in place during the Fig. 1.71 - Excavation Under Transfer Girders Supported
final station construction phase. on Original Caissons.
-46-
Fig. 1 75 Hood Canal Floating Bridge, Construction of West Section in Progress at Far Shore.
-47-
Fig. 1.76 - Construction View, Calgary Olympic Saddledome-Coliseum
- 48 -
Chapter 2
Post-Tensioning
Systems
2.1 GENERAL
Post-tensioning systems may conveniently be diameter. The minimum guaranteed ultimate
divided into three categories depending on strength of thewires is 240,000 psi. Maximum
whether the stressing tendon is wire, strand or effective prestressing forces available in a single
bar. The discussion in this Section is based on wire tendon range from two wires at 14.1 kips to
these categories and is intended to provide a 208 wires at 1466 kips. Tendons with more than
general view of the various available systems. 60 wires are primarily used in nuclear contain-
Design and detailing data for most of the ment vessels or as rock anchors.
commercially available systems is presented in fig. 2.7 shows a button-head anchorage for a
Section 2.2. large tendon for a rock anchor application. The
Post-Tensioned construction is classified as threaded hole in the center of the anchorhead is
bonded or unbondeddepending on whether used.for a threaded pull-rod attachment to the
the tendon ducts are filled with grout after stressing jack. The 0.375 inch diameter button-
stressing (bonded), or whether the tendons are heads, which provide anchorage for the indi-
greased and plastic covered (unbonded). Use of vidual wires, are formed by a cold-upsetting
unbonded construction eliminates the time and process. Tendons of this type are usually cut to
cost involved in grouting which becomes an the exact length and button-headed in the shop.
important economic factor in applications such However, equipment is available for field btton-
as floor slabs of apartment buildings which heading for those applications where it is not
usually contain a large number of small tendons. practicable to prefabricate the tendons to an
Bonded tendons have structural advantages exact length.
which are more important for beams and primary
structural members. Such members usually
utilize a small number of relativelly large ten-
dons, hence the grouting costs are less sig-
nificant. For unbonded construction, single
seven wire strand tendons are normally used.
Larger capacity multiple strand, wire or bar
tendons are usually grouted. The tendon anchor-
ages shown in this Section are representative of
the major variations in types of anchorage for
wire, strand, and bar tendons supplied by the
various fabricators.
Wherever the term maximum effective prestres-
sing force is used in this section, the force was
calculated as:
0.6 tendon area x minimum guaranteed ultimate
tensile strength.
This force is used in this discussion only to
provide an indication of the forces available in a Fig. 2.1 - Button-head anchorage.
single tendon. In some cases, it may not be
possible to achieve this force throughout the
tendon length in an actual structure due to
friction losses and the magnitude of long-term
prestress losses.
- 50 -
Fig. 2.2 - Conical wedge anchorage for a single-strand unbonded tendon
-551-
Fig. 2.4 - Threadbar system anchorage and coupler. ,
- 52 -
2.2.1 AMERICAN CABLE COMPANY, INC.
American Cable Co., Inc. manufactures and sells a complete line of monostrand hardware for
unbonded tendons to the building industry. All hardware has been tested and meets or exceeds
allrequirements of the Post-Tensioning Institute Guide Specifications for Post-Tensioning
Materials.
Monostrand hardware and equipment available is as follow:
1. Extruded 3/8, 7/l 6, l/2 and .6 - wire 270K cable
2. Anchors and wedges
3. Chairs and pocketformers
4. Jack jaws and splice chucks
5. Hydraulic pumps and rams sold and serviced or leased.
- 53 -
2.2.1 AMERICAN CABLE
. COMPANY, INC. - continued
- 54 -
2.2.2 AMSYSCO, INC.
AMSYSCO, Inc. is a supplier of post tensioning systems and related services. The modern
manufacturing plant and general offices are housed in the new brick and masonary building shown
above within a 25 minute drive from downtown Chicago. The AMSYSCO material, services and
applications are listed below.
A. To General Contractors:
C. AMSYSCO Applications
- 55
2.2.2 AMSYSCO, INC..
- - - 2 n d P O U R - - - - ---71st POUR----
KET FORMER
- i -
CONT. ITYP.1
TENDON SUPPORT---/
REBARS &CHAIRS
PLASTIC SHEATHING
REGULAR
POCKET FORMER
- 56 -
2.2.2 AMSYSCO, INC.
The AMSYSCO monostrand system utilizes either 0.5 inch dia. or 0.6 inch dia. 7 wire strand
manufactured as per ASTM-A416. The steel is either low steel relaxation or stress relieved
strand. The strand is coated with rust inhibiting grease prior to being encased in a durable
plastic sheathing. Dead end and intermediate anchors are attached to the tendons in the plant.
The tendons are cut to length, coiled, tagged and color coded for easy identification prior to
shipping to the jobsite. Strict quality control is used in the plant. The stressing jacks and
hydraulic pumps are properly calibrated in our plant. Either spring return or hydraulic power
seating type stressing jacks can be supplied.
TECHNICAL DATA
1. Strand
Nominal diameter 0.5 inch 0.6 inch
Modulus of elasticity (E) 28 x IO6 psi 28 x lo6 psi
Ultimate strength 41.3 kips 58.6 kips
Maxm. force at stressing 33 kips 46.9 kips
2. Anchor
Length = 5 inches to 5.1875 inches
Width = 2.25 inches
Depth = I.4375 inches
Cross section area = 11.67 sq. inches
Minimum strength of concrete at stressing = 2100 psi (Recommend 3000 psi)
,
3. Wedges
The two piece wedges are made of high strength steel and are properly heat treated.
4. Grease
The grease is compounded from highly refined petroleum oils and long chain metallic hydro-
carbons. It is designed to provide a rust protective coating that is both flexible and stable from
below 0F (-17.8C) to 300F (148.9C).
5. Plastic sheathing
The 40 to 42ml. thick plastic sheathing formed over the strand is durable and withstands
handling during transportation and construction.
7. Hydraulic pump
The hydraulic pump (OTC) is equipped with 10,000 psi pump, universal motor (1 l/8 h.p.,
12,000 r.p.m., 115 volt, 60/50 cycle A. C. single phase, draws 27 amps at full load).
- 57 -
2.2.2 AMSYSCO, INC. - continued
AMSYSCO
Recent Projects
North Loop transp. Center 18 story office Building Skidmore, Owings & Merrill
Chicago over 13 story parking Chicago
1,250,000 sq. ft.
Hermitage Apartment Building 29 floors over parking Beer Gorski & Graff
Chicago, Illinois 400,000 sq. ft. Chicago, Illinois
- 58 -
2.2.3 CCL DIVISION
NICHOLSON CONSTRUCTION COMPANY
NCC/CCL MULTISTRAND
POST-TENSIONING SYSTEMS
- 59 -
2.2.3 CCL DIVISION
NICHOLSON CONSTRUCTION COMPANY - continued
Standard Anchorages
1.0 This anchorage is used at the stressing end
of a tendon and can be used as a passive
anchorage, should it be exposed, to allow the CAST TUBE
insertion of wedges.
1.1 NCWCCL Standard Anchorages are sized
to accept tendons of 4,7,12,19 and 27 strands of
0.5 inch or 0.6 inch diameter. Designs for other
sizes are available, call our engineering depart-
ment for further details. The complete standard
anchorage assembly consists of a cast tube unit
and an anchor plate with individual tapered _ - SPIRALLY WOUND
holes in which the strands are anchored by _I 1-1
hardened steel wedges, The cast tube unit serves
two purposes. First, it acts as a bearing plate,
transferring the prestress force from the anchor
plate to concrete and second, it acts as a due to normal concreting vibrations. Special
transition piece which gides strands from the anchorages have been designed for this case.
anchor plate into the tendon duct. 1.4 Provision is made in the tube unit in the form
1.2 Intermediate numbers of strands can be of a tapped hole for grout injection when stres-
accommodated if desired, by omitting wedges sing is completed. This grout entry point should
from the anchor plate in a uniform pattern. For be situated at the top when the tube units are
special conditions when standard anchorage fixed to the formwork.
units cannot be incorporated, consult our en- 1.5 Four standard metric tapped holes are drilled
gineering department. in the face of the tube unit in order to facilitate
1.3 This anchorage should not be used as a fixing to the formwork, location of the jack
buried dead end as the wedges can be dislodged bearing ring and the fitting of grout caps.
- 60 -
2.2.3 CCL DIVISION
NICHOLSON CONSTRUCTlON COMPANY - continued
--67 -
2.2.3 CCL DIVISION
NICHOLSON CONSTRUCTION COMPANY - continued
- 62 -
2.2.3 CCL DIVISION
NICHOLSON CONSTRUCTION COMPANY - continued
MIN M TRANSFER
GUARANiEEfl TE&fY FORCE AT
ILT $ffX!GTff 0.7 fpu As
0.8 fpu As
IKipsl IUsl WPS)
N/CCL 4.5 4 165.2 132.2 115.6
7.5 289.1 231.3 202.4
0.5 12.5 1: 495.6 396.5 346.9
19.5 19 784.7 627.8 549.3
27.5 1115.1 892.1 780.6
55.5 z 2271.5 1817.2 1590.1
N/CCL 4.6 4 234.4 187.5 164.1
7.6 7 410.2 328.2 287.1
12.6 12 703.2 562.6 492.2
0.6 19.6 19 1113.4 890.7 779.4
27.6 1582.2 1265.8 1107.5
37.6 5: 2168.2 1734.6 1517.7
47.6 47 2754.2 2203.4 1927.9
*ASTM A416 Grade 270 Table 5.1
All data is subject to revision as new developments are made.
A B C 0 As/Z
STRAND TENDON inches inches inches inches in2
DIAMETER TYPE Imml Imml IW lmml (mm1
35/16 (85) 31/2 (90) 4 3/4 (120) 1 718 (48 0.845 (545)
4 l/8 (105) 5 l/4 (133) 6 l/8 (155) 2 l/4 (57 1.479 (954)
5 11/16 (145) 6 11/16 (170) 8 l/16 (205) 3 3/16 (81 2.539 (1636)
7 l/16 (180) 9 5/8 (245) 9 7/8 (250) 3 318 (86 4015 (2590)
6 11/16 (220) 1013/16(275) 11 13/16(300) 43/16(106, 5.720 (3690)
4 15/16 (125) 6 5/16 (160) 7 l/2 (190) 2 314 (70) 2.108 (1360)
7 l/l6 (180) 10 (255) 9 706 (240) 35116 (85) 3.612 (2330)
8 11/16 (220) 1013/16 (275) 4 3/16 106) 5.720 (3690)
27.6 10 5/8 (270) 18 5/16 (465) 4 518 118) 8.127 (5243)
'37.6
'476
Table 5.2
*Designs for these and other sizes are available. For dimensions and details, contact
our office. All data is subject to revision as new developments are made.
NOTE: Bearing plates can be used in place of cast tube unit if desired.
- 63
2.2-3 CCL DIVISION
NICHOLSON CONSTRUCTION COMPANY -continued
REPRESENTATIVE NCWCCL
PROJECTS
Barker Dam Stabilization
Battery Park City Financial Center
Mid-Orange Correctional Facility
Wall No. 14, Georgia DOT.
TVA Wilson Dam
i-85/1-285 Interchange, Georgia DOT
l-85/1-285 Interchange, Georgia DOT. In place creep test of four strand tendon Ohio DOT, Clnclnnattl
Charleroi/Monessen Bridge
Stage I Light Rail Transit, Pittsburgh
- 64 -
2.2.4 CEC SYSTEMS, INC.
Post-TensioningSpecialists
CEC Systems specializes in post-tensioning.
Our exclusive focus is the application of post-
tensioning systems in all types of commercial
and residential construction.
Since the company was founded in 1977, CEC
has handled an average of 65 major projects
each year all over the western United States.
CECs post-tensioning experience includes
residential slabs on grade, foundation mats,
industrial floors, parking structures, rock and
soil anchors, tie-backs, and low- and medium-
rise commercial buildings-from the simplest
to the most complex.
CECs Systems Approach
The CEC team offers total post-tensioning
service, from first concept to final installation.
Our extensive design capabilities allow us to Walnut Creek Center No. 1, a CEC project located in
Walnut Creek, California. Low-rise office and
start with preliminary specifications and underground-parking structure using a two-way grid with
engineer the entire post-tensioning system. post-tensioned ductile frame.
Tendons, anchors, and other gear are fabri-
cated in our own yard, and the system is
installed at the construction site. CEC Systems
can handle every kind of post-tensioning task
from beginning to end.
We combineour engineering capabilities with a
thorough understanding of the economics of
construction. We estimate costs accurately and
quickly, and we are expert at developing ways to
employ post-tensioning to avoid cost overruns
and increase profitability.
CECs Services and Capabilities
l Monostrand post-tensioning systems
* Multistrand post-tensioning systems
l Tie-backs and soil anchors
l Stressing equipment
l On-site installation
l Design and engineering of post-
tensioning systems
* Cost estimating and redesign to make
budget Airport Plaza, a CEC project in Concord, California. A
medium-rise office building using post-tensioned beams
l Design and fabrication of specialized post- precast and erected on site. Post-tensioning was
tensioning equipment employed in order to control long-span deflection.
- 65 -
2.2.4 CEC SYSTEMS, INC. - continued
w 4x44 DOWELS at
1sOC TOP ( BOTTOM
END ONLY
Typical intermediate stressing joint.
2.2.4 CEC SYSTEMS, INC. - continued
The CEC-5 anchorage, front (right) and back (left) views, The CEC-B anchorage, front (left) and back irinh+\ VieWc
\. *J. .., .._..(
Standard pocket formers for the CEC monostrand system. 45 pdcket former.
- 67 -
2.2.4 CEC SYSTEMS, INC. - continued
Front and side views of the anchorage used in the CEC Positions of multistrand tendons at high (left) and low
multistrand system. (right) points. Z dimension corresponds to the data in
the accompanying table.
3 cc-11 l/2
G-60 4 13/4
c c - 1 2 I l/2
5 518
G-100 6 cc - 13 2 l/2
7 l/2
8 2,, _ 318
9 cc-14
318
G-200 10 l/2
11 cc-15 21/2 318
12 3/8
13 518
14 CC - 16 3 518
l/2
pig-T
G-300 5y2
518
- 68 -
2.2.4 CEC SYSTEMS, INC. - continued
PERMANENT TIEBACKS
RESISTING UNBALANCED
LATERAL PRESSURES
CEC rock and soil anchor unassembled; the bearing plate CEC rock and soil anchor assembled.
is on the left, the wedge block on the right.
I
- 69 -
2.2.4 CEC SYSTEIVIS, INC. - continued
- 70 -
rllx1 2.25 CONTINENTAL CONCRETE STRUCTURES, INC.
- 71 -
2.2.5 CONTINENTAL CONCRETE STRUCTURES, INC. - continued
w 4
.\
Anchor Plate Dimensions
2.5 x 5.0 inches
---
. p@@iiy-es;l
- -
73
2.2.5 CONTINENTAL CONCRETE STRUCTURES, INC. - continued
Hydraulic Pump
Jack Calibration
6lRESSING JACK CALIBRATION CURVE
6.0 1 I I
MULTI-STRAND TENDONS
Anchorage Details
0 0
E
I-
Dimensions:
1 I 1 1 I 1
I Tendon Sire:
nsions : I .--I
I A in 2.50 2.75
Continental
I Concrete
~ Structures
- 75 -
2.2.5 CONTINENTAL CONCRETE STRUCTURES, INC. - continued
Jack Clearance
+
- 76-
2.2.6 CONTINENTAL STRUCTURES, INC.
INTRODUCTION PRODUCTS
Continental Structures is a post-tensioning sub- Mono-Strand System consisting of single unbond-
contracting and engineering organization capable ed.1/2 diameter, 270 ksi strand tendons, greased
of manufacturing all types of post-tensioning and plastic sheathed. This system is particularly
systems for virtually every type of post-tensioned suited for office buildings, parking structures,
concrete structure, including commercial and hotels, and other moderately loaded structures.
residential buildings, parking structures, bridges, Multi-Strand System consisting of multiple bonded
tanks and nuclear structures. There is within the l/2 diameter 270 ksi strand tendons encased in
organization a combined experience total of 80 metal duct and placed by the pull-thru method.
years from which engineers and contractors can This system is particularly suited for bridges,
obtain technical assistance. tanks, nuclear structures, transfer girders, and
other heavily loaded structures.
SERVICES
Continental Structures provides post-tensioning
tendons f.o.b jobsite, or furnished and installed,
depending on location and available placers. Design
calculations and assistance to structural engineers
can be provided by an engineering staff experienc-
ed in post-tension design. Reinforcing steel can be
furnished and installed when it occurs in con-
junction with post-tensioning. This work is usually
done by a local rebar fabricator. Continental
Structures will also coordinate alternate bids or
design/construct bids on entire structural frames,
in conjunction with local concrete contractors.
RECENT PROJECTS
Continental Park Plaza 7 Story Office & NAM Engineering Morley Const. Co.
El Segundo, Calif. 8 Level Parking Redondo Beach, Calif Los Angeles, Calif.
Marriott Hotel & Parking 17 Story Hotel & Meyer Associates Morley Const. Co.
Torrance, Calif. 3 Level Parking Rockville, Maryland Los Angeles, Calif.
One Columbus Plaza 12 Story Office Read, Jones, TGK McCarthy Const.
Phoenix, Arizona Building Christoffersen Phoenix, Arizona
Century Square 12 Story Tower Arch. & Engr. Collab. Ray Wilson Co.
Pasadena, Calif. 5 Level parking Los Angeles, Calif. Los Angeles, Calif.
California Plaza 6 Story Office Martin & Huang Inter.. HCB Contractors
Los Angeles, Calif. Building Los Angeles, Calif. Los Angeles, Calif
- 77 -
2.2.6 CONTINENTAL STRUCTURES, I NC. - continued
Mono-System
2nd POUR
REMOVABLE SPINDLE, *
HEX. NUT 8 POCKET
FORMER ASSEMBLY 7 -I-=-
I
FORM SPLIT TO
FACILITATE TENDON
2-#4 CONTINUOUS INSTALLATION
M I N . % D I A .
HOLE IN FORM
* CS- 1 ANCHOR (TYPICAL)
DRILL 1 DIA.
HOLE IN FORM
Multi-System
00
0000
0000 DUCT
00
EN
- 78 -
2.2.7 DYWIDAG SYSTEMS INTERNATIONAL
DYWIDAG SYSTEMS INTERNATIONAL, USA,
INC. and DYWIDAG SYSTEMS INTERNATIONAL,
CANADA, LTD. serve the construction industry in
the United States and Canada, Based on the
extensive experience and the latest research and
development of their century old parent company,
Dyckerhoff & Widmann, AG, the firms offer a wide
range of services. These include an in-house
engineering staff, technical expertise, special
construction equipment as well as post-tensioning
systems and a reinforcing bar and splice system.
Installation and design and build services are also
available.
Thefirmsspecialize in high technologyengineer-
ing oriented construction such as prestressed
concrete segmental bridges, including furnishing
of special formwork and form supporting equip-
ment. The DSI firms are leaders in the develop-
ment of rock and soil anchors, uplift anchors and
rock bolts for the mining, tunneling, and heavy
construction industries.
The DYWIDAG Threadbar System and the
DYWIDAG Strand System allow the optimum
combination of post-tensioning Systems and the
most economic solution to a given post-tensioning
problem. The DYWIDAG grade 60 Reinforcing
Threadbar offers an efficient and versatile re-
inforcing bar splice system capable of developing
up to the full strength of the bar in tension and/or FAA Air Traffic Control Towers at Dallas/
compression. Fort Worth, TX and 15 other USA alrports.
Form travelers, threadbar and multistrand post-tensioning systems, Red River Bridge, Boyce, LA.
2.2.7 DYWIDAG SYSTEMS INTERNATIONAL - continued
The components of Dywidag Threadbar System the threadbar deformations develop an effective
are manufactured in the United Statesexclusive- bond with cement or resin grout. The con-
ly by Dywidag Systems International. Used tinuous thread simplifies stressing. Lift off read-
world-wide since 1965, the threadbar system ings may be taken at any time, and the prestress
provides a simple, rugged method of efficiently force increased or decreased as required.
applying prestress force to a wide variety of
structural systems including post-tensioned The Dywidag Threadbar System is primarily
concrete, rock and soil anchor systems. used for grouted construction. All components
of the system are designed to be fully integrated
Available in %I, l, l%, and 1% nominal for quick and simple field assembly. Sheathing,
diameter, Dywidag Threadbars are hot rolled sheathing transitions, grout sleeves, and grout
and proof stressed alloy steel conforming to tubes all feature thread type connections.
ASTM A 722.
Placing Dywidag tendons is simplified through
The Dywidag Threadbar prestressing steel has a the use of re-usable plastic pocket formers.
continuous rolled-in pattern of threadlike de- Used at each stressing end, the truncated, cone
formations along its entire length. More durable shaped pocket former can extend through or
than machined threads, the deformations allow butt up against the form bulkhead.
anchorages and couplers to thread onto the
threadbar at any point. Available in 60 mill lengths, threabbars may be
cut to specified lengths before shipment to the
The strength of the Dywidag Threadbar anchor- job site. Or where circumstances warrant, the
ages and couplers exceeds the requirements of threadbars may be shipped to the job site in mill
ACI 318. Test reports are available for the main lengths for field cutting with a portable friction
components of the system. or band saw. Threadbars may be coupled for
ease of handling or to extend a previously
Conforming to the requirements of ASTM A 615, stressed bar.
Bell Anchorage
- 80 -
2.2.7 DYWIDAG SYSTEMS INTERNATIONAL - continued
STEELSTRESSLEVELS
Dywidag Threadbars may be stressed to the The final effective (working) prestress level de-
allowable limits of ACI 318. The maximum jack- pends on the specific application. In the absence
ing stress (temporary) may not exceed 0.80fpu, of a detailed analysis of the structural system,
and the transfer (lockoff) may not exceed 0.70f,,, 0.60f,, may be used as an approximation of the
based on a yield strength of 0.85f,,. effective (working) prestress level.
ACI 318 does not stipulate the magnitude of
prestress losses or the maximum final effective
Actual loss calculations requirestructural design
(working) prestress level.
information not normallv< present
. on contract
Prestress losses due to shrinkage, elastic short- documents.
ening and creep of concrete as well as steel
relaxation and friction must be considered.
Threadbar Coupling
-881-
2.2.7 DYWIDAG SYSTEMS INTERNATIONAL - continued
DYWIDAG THREADBAR
BELL ANCHORAGE
DYWIDAG THREADBAR
PLATE ANCHORAGE
DYWIDAG THREADBAR
COUPLER
Plug
Pocket Former (removable)
, Grout Tube
DYWIDAG THREADBAR
TENDON ASSEMBLY
- 82 -
2.2.7 DYWIDAG SYSTEMS INTERNATIONAL - continued
.
DYWIDAG THREADBAR POST-TENSIONING SYSTEM DETAILS
Anchorage Details
Threadbar Diameter (inches) 3% 1 1 l/4 1%
Coupler Details
Threadbar Diameter (inches) 9% 1 1% 1%
Diameter (inches) 4 1% I 2 I 2% I 2%
*71/i long coupler available on special order.
Sheathing Details
Threadbar Diameter (inches) w 1 1% 1%
GroAleeve
\ Sheathing
Bell Anchorage
Coupler
FIXED END
- 83 -
2.2.7 DYWIDAG SYSTEMS INTERNATIONAL - continued
STRESSING
Dywidag Threadbars are stressed using com-
pact, lightweight electric-powered hydraulic
jacks. Easily handled by one man, the jack fits
over a pull rod designed to thread over the
threadbar protruding from the anchor nut. The
jack nose contains a socket wrench and ratchet
device which allows the nut to be tightened as
the threadbar elongates.
The magnitude of the prestress force applied is
monitored by reading the hydraulic gauge pres-
r Hydraulic pump sure and by measuring the threadbar elongation.
The elongation can be measured directly by
noting the change in threadbar extension. Also,
a counter mounted on the jack records the
revolutions of the anchor nut which is a direct
measure of the threadbar elongation.
,
STRESSING DATA
GROUTING
Grouting completes the installation process for
post-tensioned concrete construction. The grout
is important in protecting the steel from cor-
rosion and contributes significantly to the ulti-
mate strength of the structure.
A portable grout mixer is used to flush out the
tendon sheathing to remove debris. Then cement
and water grout are pumped into the grout tube
at one end of the tendon using a grout tube at the
other end as a vent. An admixture is used to
control expansion and pumpability.
- 84 -
2.2.7 DYWIDAG SYSTEMS INTERNATIONAL - continued
The Dywidag Threadbar System is used ex- The anchor plate need not be perpendicular to
tensively in rock and soil anchor construction the Dywidag Threadbar. The curved surface of
because of its versatility, strength, performance the anchor nut accommodates up to 5 misalign-
characteristics and off-the-shelf availability of ment of the threadbar with the bearing plate up to
most components. 25 degrees can be corrected by using a set of
wedge washers with the anchor nut. Threadbars
Dywidag Threadbars may be used individually may be shipped to the job site in mill lengths for
or in multiples depending upon the magnitude of field cutting with a portable friction or band saw.
force requirements or upon drilling consider- Threadbars may be coupled for ease of handling
ations. or to extend a previously stressed bar.
- 85 -
22.7 DYWIDAG SYSTEMS INTERNATIONAL - continued
Anchor Plate
DYWlDAG THREADBAR
ANCHOR WITHOUT
CORROSION ---_
PROTECTION
Dywidag Threadbar
k----- --
DYWIDAG THREADBAR ---- ,1
ANCHOR WITH SITMFLE
- - r---r
-- -
CORROSION
PROTECTION - - - - - -_
---A_
- -
Dywidag Threadbar /
Sheathing
Anchor Nut
- - - - - StreSSing L e n g t h -t
Plastic Nut \\Y
DYWIDAG
THREADBAR
ANCHOR WITH
DOUBLE Gasket
CORROSION
PROTECTION Mastic
Corrosion Gasket
Inhibitor
Inhibitor
- 86 -
2.2.7 DYWIDAG SYSTEMS INTERNATIONAL - continued
Grout
Grout
I %
l.lL3 I 1.625
1
4 j 3.125
3.125
Grout
End Cap
-87-
2.2.7 DYWIDAG SYSTEMS INTERNATIONAL - continued
Theadbars, bonded to the rock or concrete by a Dywidag Resin Anchors are used where expan-
fast curing polyester resin grout, are used exten- sion shells are inappropriate. The resin anchor-
sively for slope stabilization, tie backs, tie downs, age length is easily adjusted to fit the varying
and for roof bolts. The resin grout develops a rock conditions. Dywidag Resin Anchors may be
bond superior to that developed by cement installed in bore holes located at any angle
grout, Fast gelling resin allows transfer of load to above or below horizontal.
the rock formation within minutes after installing
the anchor.
Resin anchored threadbars are installed in all
types of rock or concrete. Track drills, tire
mounted drills, jacklegs or stopers may be used
to both drill the holeand install the Dywidag bolt.
Polyester resin is packaged in cartridge form
and is available in various diameters and gel
times. The cartridge consists of a heat sealed
tube of polyester film containing both the resin
and the catalyst. The resin and catalyst are
separated by a barrier which prevents chemical Threadbar With Resin Point Anchorage
interaction. The resin cartridges are placed in
the bore hole before the threadbar is inserted.
The resin gels after the components are mixed
during the installation of the Dywidag Threadbar.
Threadbars with resin point anchorage are used
to apply a compressive force across layered rock
strata. Threadbars may be installed using fast
setting resin as the point anchorage in con-
junction with slow setting resin as a corrosion
protection for the free stressing length. Thread-
bar tension is applied after the fast setting resin
has cured but before the slow setting resin Fully Resin Anchored and Grouted Threadbar
cures.
- 88 -
2.2.7 DYWIDAG SYSTEMS INTERNATIONAL - continued
1 Minute Resin
II I II I I I I
lo 20 30 40 50 60 10 20 30 40 50 60
Cure Time (Minutes) @ 72oF Ambient Temperature Anchorage Length (Inches)
*Ratio of resin column length after insertion of Dywidag Threadbar to resin column length before
inserting Dywidag Threadbar. Resin yield chart information provided by Celtite, Inc.
Yields are calculated; no waste or allowance for over drilling is included. Site trials should be
conducted to determine actual resin requirements.
Example: When using 1 Dywidag Threadbar in 1% diameter hole with 1% diameter resin
cartridge, resin yield multiplier is 1.25*. A 12 resin column yields 15 of resin after the insertion
of the Dywidag Threadbar.
- 89 -
2.2.7 DYWIDAG SYSTEMS INTERNATIONAL - continued
The Dywidag Multistrand System is available in strands into preplaced ducts using a hydraulic
the United States from Dywidag Systems In- pusher.
ternational. Dywidag stressing equipment is specifically de-
The Dywidag Multistrand System uses 0.6 signed for the standard Dywidag hardware. For
diameter 7 wire 270 K strand conforming to efficiency and reliability, the Dywidag jacks are
ASTM A 416. Tendons are fabricated with either designed to power seat all wedges simultan-
stress relieved or low relaxation strand de- eously.
pending on project specifications. The Dywidag Multistrand anchors exceed the
Standard Dywidag Multistrand anchors are de- strength requirements of ACI 318 and AASHTO
signed for 3, 4, 5, 9, 12, 15, and 19 strands. specifications. Test data are available for the
Individual strands may be omitted from the main components.
strand patterns to obtain tendons of a smaller Grouting completes the installation process for
capacity, yet allow use of standard anchorage Dywidag Multistrand tendons. The grout pro-
components, and standard Dywidag stressing tects the prestressing steel from corrosion and
equipment. contributes significantly to the ultimate strength
Tendons with up to 48-0.6 strands or 0.5 strand of the structure.
tendons of various sizes can be supplied for Dywidag Multistrand tendons are also used as
special applications where lead time permits. high capacity earth or rock anchors. For this
Dywidag Multistrand tendons may be placed in application special consideration must be given
ducts prior to or after placing concrete by to the corrosion protection of all components of
pulling or pushing techniques. Prefabricated the earth or rock anchor. Information con-
tendons may be pulled into preplaced ducts cerning the Dywidag double corrosion protec-
using a hydraulic winch. Tendons may also be tion system for multistrand tendons is available
assembled by repeatedly pushing individual upon request.
- 90 -
2.2.7 DYWIDAG SYSTEMS INTERNATIONAL - continued
Dywidag Multistrand tendons may be stressed to the allowable limits of ACI 318 and AASHTO
specifications. Accordingly, the jacking (temporary) stress may not exceed 0.80 f,, and the transfer (lock
off) stress may not exceed 0.70 f,, The final effective (working) prestress level depends on the specific
application, properties of the materials utilized and the characteristics of the structural member as well as
the construction procedures.
*Other sizes of bearing or wedge plates are available where lead time permits. Wedge plates may be square or round.
A-+-
I
0 9 0 E
o- 00 0 o-
o- C c D
1,
0 +0 E
0 0 f
K!l
4 B h
q u
E I
I I
- 92 -
2.2.7 DYWIDAG SYSTEMS INTERNATIONAL - continued
The DYWIDAG Monostrand System uses 0.6 diameter seven wire 270 K strand.
conforming to ASTM A 416. In general, a grouted system with corrugated metal
ducts, it is ideally suited for all flat slabs, whether suspended or slabs on ground. The
system features easy grout tube connectors. The bearing plate may be either nailed to
the form or fastened with a recoverable threaded pipe.
The DYWIDAG Monostrand System can also be used in unbonded applications with
greased and smooth P.E. sheathed strand tendons.
- 96 -
2.2.8 GENSTAR STRUCTURES LIMITED
INTRODUCTION
Services Provided
- 9 7 -
2.2.8 GENSTAR STRUCTURES LIMITED - continued
MONO-STRAND
Post-tensioning of concrete
slabs offers several distinct
advantages:thinnerslabslead-
ing to lower structural dead
weightandlowerfloortofloor
heights; longer spans which
provideflexibility in partition-
ing; moreconvenient parking
due tofewercolumns; lower
constructioncostsduetosav-
ingsin material, laborand time.
2.2.8 GENSTAR STRUCTURES LIMITED - continued
MONO-STRAND ANCHORAGE
TITAN SYSTEM
DIMENSIONS I
- 99 -
MONO-STRAND
INSTALLATION DETAILS
REUSABLE POCKET FORMERS.
(RECESS TO BE DRYPACKED)
ANCHOR
PLASTIC SHEATH TIGHT TO
BACK OF ANCHOR
ANCHOR ZONE AEINFG
BARS TOP LL BOT
ANCHOR ZONE
REINF TOP 6 BOT
38 x 90 CONT KEY, CONSTRUCTION JOINT
- -
I-' --.--JI 10MxlOC0LG@450%T&B \ TO FORMWORK
1 BULKHEAD
STAPLE CHAIRS
~~~s~~E?~lNG~~~kd;TION
1
REPLACE BEFORE POURING L
NEXT SECTION
The simplicity of the Genstar Structures System has been designed to provide optimum
flexibility to the structural engineer and to the general contractor.
2.2.8 GENSTAR STRUCTURES LIMITED - continued
Genstar Structures supplies and installs bonded The method is to install a semi-rigid steel conduit in
post-tensioning for any application from a single the structure along with the anchor guides. The
strand tendon up to a 27 strand tendon and in special tendons are then winched through the conduit. The
circumstances up to a 37 strand tendon. next step is the pouring of the concrete and after it
has obtained the required strength the tendons are
The system employed is the K-System. This is the stressed using hydraulic jacks. After stressing the
most recent system developed by Freyssinet Interna- conduit is pumped full of a non-shrink grout.
tional and is one that has been used very success-
fully in many different construction applications in
various parts of the world.
- r strarid grips
block
PRINCIPAL DIMENSIONS
- 101 -
2.2.8 GENSTAR STRUCTURES LIMITED - continued
MULTI-STRAND
- 702-
2.2.9 LANG TENDONS, INC.
Innovative Manufacturer of
Extrusion Coated Strand
Lang Tendons Incorporated is a manfacturer/distributor
of extrusion coated strand systems for construction. We
concentrate on specialized applications requiring high
quality, corrosion protected tendons and specially adapted
hardware. Our approach is to work with both engineers
and contractors in order to provide products that satisfy
the project specifications and the need for productivity.
Lang Tendons Incorporated, formerly known as PIC
Incorporated, was founded in 1969 to serve prestressing
needs. In 1970 the companys founder invented extru-
sion coated strand. Over the years the company has
developed systems which capitalize on the characteristics
of extrusion coated strand, and is now a licensee of the Permanent anchors for bulkhead, Port of Panama City, FL
founders patent. hardware has been engineered and developed for ease and
consistency of stressing.
Specialized PDLYSTRAND@ Systems
Systems offered by Lang Tendons Incorporated include Benefits of Extrusion Coated Strand
ground anchors, unbonded post tensioning for cast in
All of our strand products are fabricated from extrusion
place and precast concrete structures, hoops for circular
coated 7-wire prestressing strand meeting ASTM A-41 6.
vessels, barrier cables, tension roofs, tendons for concrete Our process covers the strand with a pressure die-formed
slabs or pavements.
encasement of corrosion inhibitor and then encapsulates
the fully coated strand with a molten polypropylene sheath.
Recognized Corrosion Protected As the extruded sheath cools tightly around the encapsu-
Rock and Soil Anchor Systems lated strand, all voids between the sheath and steel are
Our rock and soil anchor system is specified by engineers eliminated and any corrosive elements permanently
to provide required long-term corrosion protection. State excluded. With the chemically inert continuous sheath
highway officials have selected our system for permanent in place, corrosion of the steel cannot take place.
use on Interstate highway projects.
We custom fabricate 0.6 58K POLYSTRANDS into Polypropylene Sheathing
anchors of whatever length, capacity and level of corrosion For permanent applications, Lang Tendons Incorporated
protection the ground environment warrants. Our stressing uses polypropylene for its extruded plastic sheathing
Ocean Club Condominiums, Atlantic City NJ because it has excellent resistance to chemicals and abra-
sion. Furthermore, it has negligible penetration by water
and is resistant to environmental stress cracking.
- 103-
2.2.9 LANG TENDONS, INC.
Architectural Panels
Architectural panels, economically post-tensioned with
looped tendon layouts, remain crack frae during erection
and service and are not subject to spalling or staining due
to corrosion. Panels strengthened by post-tensioning have
diverse application, such as building cladding or spandrels, Roof tendons, Lindsay Park Centre, Calgary, Canada
tank walls. bridge decks and roadside sound barriers.
Tension Roofs and Cable Stayed Bridges
Due to its corrosion protected performance, low cost, and
quick delivery characteristics, POLYSTRAND is an excel-
lent tendon for aerial applications, such as cable domes,
fabric tension roofs, and cable stayed bridges. Develop-
ment of specialized hardware enhances this specialized
use of extrusion coated strand.
Concrete Tanks
Concrete tanks, either cast in place or of precast elements,
are made water tight and permanent (even for highly corro-
sive wastes) by post-tensioning with POLYSTRAND. The
PIC developed PRETITE Tank System, using panels post-
tensioned together, provides several million gallon contain-
ments at very low costs per gallon.
- 104-
2.2.9 LANG TENDONS, INC.
Specification of Strand
Strength Properties (ref. ASTM A-416)
The 7-wire grade 270 steer strand shall have strength as follows:
Strand Diameter 0.5 inch 0.6 inch -
Guaranteed Ultimate 41.3 kips 56.6 kips
Strength
Maximum Temporary FOrCe
(80% of Ultimate) 33.0 kips 46.9 kips
- 106-
2.2.10
c
C = LINDEN POST-TENSIONING
A Ceco Industries Company
LINDEN POST-TENSIONING
CORPORATION
Linden Post-Tensioning Corporation is a designer located to service the eastern, southeastern and
and a fabricator of post-tensioning systems. The midwestern regions of the United States.
company performs preliminary designs and assists
Linden Post-Tensioning is a subsidiary of Ceco
engineers of record with final designs for reinforced
Industries. Through its subsidiaries, Ceco is the
concrete structures. Linden assists the design/build
nations leader in concrete construction services
developer and/or the contractor and is able to bid
and is a manufacturer of building products for the
pre-designed structures competitively. Linden,
construction industry.
headquartered in Atlanta, Georgia, is strategically
SYSTEM
Tendons and Anchors
Monostrand tendons use % diameter seven-wire strand
in single or multiple groups. The strand is stress relieved* Maximum Effective Force 0.60 f, 24.8 Kips*
and conforms to ASTM A-416. The Monostrand System
*NOTE: Low relaxation strand tnformatfon avallable upon request.
features are:
n Rectangular anchor plates that provide flexibility to meet
the restrictions of thin slabs or narrow beams.
II Fixed end anchorages that are attached and pre-set at the
factory to reduce field labor and prevent strand slippage at
the fixed end. #
II Tension that can be applied separately to successive
sections of the total length by stressing at any intermediate
point, and then continuing the same strand, eliminating the
need for coupling.
H Reusable pocket formers that come with anchor. The entire
assembly attaches to the formwork, and when removed
after concreting, leaves a small, clean stressing pocket that
is easily patched,
II Stressing equipment that is small and lightweight, easily
handled by one man. Operation is semi-automatic and fast.
The advantages of the Monostrand Post-Tensioning System
place the flexibility of prestressing within the scope of any
project. With this flexibility, long spans, cantilevers and heavy
loading are no longer a problem.
INTERMEDIATE CASTING
WAlttO TO EOGE OF FORM NAILED TO FORM
REMOVABLE POCKET
FORMER (NAIL-ON,
STRESSING END INTERMEDIATE STRESSING FIXED END
FORMING DETAILS FOR NAIL-ON POCKET FORMER SYSTEM
- 107 -
2.2.10 LINDEN POST-TENSIONING - continued
THE MULTlSTRAND
SYSTEM
The Multistrand System provides post-tensioning for a wide
range of force requirements from the 297 KIP twelve strand
system to the 694 KIP twenty-eight strand system in single
strand increments. This system is commonly used with
grouted tendons. The many applications of the Multistrand
System include:
l Cast-in-place and precast, continuous long span bridges.
l Beams or transfer girders in commercial structures where
long spans and heavy loadings are present.
l Tension rings used to support domes or arches in all types
of construction. ANCHORAGE ASSEMBLY
ELEVATION
l Tanks or containment structures.
e
C = LINDEN POST-TENSIONING CORPORATION
A Ceco Industries Company
- 108-
2.2.11 NATIONAL POST-TENSIONING SERVICES, INC. &
POST-TENSION OF TEXAS, INC.
MANUFACTURING FACILITIES
HOUSTON, TEXAS
- 109-
2.2.11 NATIONAL POST-TENSIONING SERVICES, INC. &
POST-TENSION OF TEXAS, INC. - continued
NATIONAL POST-TENSIONING SERVICES, INC. and POST-TENSION OF TEXAS, INC. offer the
following services:
n Feasibility studies
n Preliminary design lay-out including preparation of placement drawings
n Technical design and specifications assistance
n Design through independent registered professional engineers
n Stressing calculations
n Three day delivery
n Trained field personnel for installation of cables
n Trained field personnel for stressing of cables
n Technical assistance at job site
n Guaranteed cost estimates
UNBONDED TENDONS
We produce our tendons under a quality conscious program which incorporates the highest quality
materials available, applied in workmanship and quality to satisfy the most rigorous requirements.
Our system utilizes high strength 270Kstrand meeting all ASTM A-416 latest revised specifications.
We offer both stress relieved 270K strand and low relaxation 270K strand. The latter, through its heat
treating process, offers a greater final force through reduced post-stressing relaxation.
We completely encase the strand with a lithium base grease to prevent corrosion and to reduce
friction at time of stressing. The greased strand is coated with an extruded jacket of high density
polyethelene which provides a durable protective sheathing to reduce fricftion and prevent bonding
of the strand with concrete.
Recent friction tests have shown our product to have characteristics which would allow longer than
normally accepted single end stresses. This provides an excellent design alternative to the generally
accepted maximum of 100 feet for a single end stress.
The properties listed below are nominal or minimum ASTM A-416 specifications. Actual production
will vary, with actual values normally greater than those listed. Certified mill tests are available for all
material furnished by us.
llO-
2.2.11 NATIONAL POST-TENSIONING SERVICES, INC. 81
POST-TENSION OF TEXAS, INC. - continued
Cur PTI-5 Anchorage System is the result of our continued effort to produce the most reliable and
adaptable anchorage possible. The PTI-5 Anchorage System utilizes a high grade ductile iron cast
anchor and 4 degree wedges. The PTI-5 anchor is interchangeable with our l/2, 7/16 and 3/8
wedges.
The PTI-5 Anchorage System is in strict accordance with specifications of the Post-Tensioning
Institutes Post Tensioning Manual; Tentative Recommendations for Concrete Members Pre-
stressed With Unbonded Tendons - ACI Journal, February, 1969; ACI Standards 318-71; Federal
Housing Administration Minimum Property Standards; and, has exceeded the testing criteria of
static, dynamic, and cyclic loading conditions tests as per the following certified results:
- ill-
2.2.11 NATIONAL POST-TENSIONING SERVICES, INC. &
POST-TENSION OF TEXAS, INC. - continued
PL
E L O N G A T I O N ( i n c h e s ) = AE w i t h
Actual physical properties of strand vary from production to production. These must be obtained
from Certified Mill Test reports furnished by the producer. Acceptable deviations in computed and
actual elongation are in excess of + 8%.
Stressing may be safely completed when concrete attains 1800 PSI strength.
- 112-
2.2.11 NATIONAL POST-TENSIONING SERVICES, INC. &
POST-TENSION OF TEXAS, INC. - continued
STRESSING CHART
Ram Area - 4.47 sq. in.
Stressing Load
16.1 KIPS .00680 in/in
3 8 70% 3602
TABLE OF CLEARANCE Design Load
Gross Weiclht - 56 Ibs. 13.8 KIPS
60% 3087
L Maximum Length I-8-3/81
Temporary Load 24.8 KIPS
W MaxImum Width 8010 5548
Stressing Load 21.7 KIPS .00680 in/in
7 /I 6 70% 4854
Design Load 18.6 KIPS
60% 4161
Temporary Load
Hydraulic Hose Coupling 80% 7382 3 3 . 0 KIPS
X 2-l 14
[Helqhtl I
1 12 Stressing Load 28.9 KIPS .00680 in/in
Conic;al Pocket 70% 6 4 6 5
Y Former Length 1.6 Design Load
(Reference Dimension1 24.8
60% 5548
2.2.11 NATIONAL POST-TENSIONING SERVICES, INC. &
POST-TENSION OF TEXAS, INC. - continued
PTI-5 LIVE
END ANCHOR -
/
ALUMINUM CLAMP
270K STRAND-
- 114-
:i
2.2.12 PATTRIDGE POST-TENSION, INC.
A SUBSIDIARY OF PPT, INC.
- 115-
2.2.12 PATTRIDGE POST-TENSION, INC. - continued
MATERIALS
Pattridge Post-Tension, Inc., is a supplier strand manufactured in accordance with ASTM
primarily of the unbonded mono-strand system, A416, in 3/8, l/2, and 0.6 diameters. The
which allows for easier erection and greater strand is coated with a rust-inhibiting lithium-
construction speed. Materials can be provided in based grease, over which is a durable protective
bulk, or fabricated for specific projects. The plastic sheath.
prestressing steel used is 270 ksi seven-wire
ANCHORAGE ASSEMBLY
FABRICATION
Individual tendons are fabricated by specific fixed-end anchorages are pressed on and
length for each project. Identification is made by intermediate anchors are installed on the strand
color coding to correspond with the strands in our plant. Each group of tendons is bundled
placement as shown on the shop drawings, as together and labeled according to its location in
well as by being individually tagged. Dead or the project, and then shipped to the jobsite.
116-
2.2.12 PATTRIDGE POST-TENSION, INC. - continued
INSTALLATION
In some geographic areas, Pattridge Post- ment and tensioning of post-tensioning ma-
Tension, Inc., provides a materials and instal- terials. Or a customized package of technical
lation package. In other areas we can assist in assistance for training and/or inspection can be
locating companies experienced in the place- offered to meet the needs of the contractor.
PLAN
STROKE
INCHES C D
10 19.5 8.75 10 3
tD
___-_A-_. -A._..._
+ c-:-
MINIMUM JACK CLEARANCE
SIDE
2.2.12 PATTRIDGE POST-TENSION, INC. - continued
Northbridge Centre
West Palm Beach, Florida
21-Story Office Building
Unbonded post-tensioned slabs
with bonded transfer wall at
lower levels to carry 17 floors
extending over the lower
structure.
- 118-
2.2.13 THE PRESCON CORPORATION
mimm
THE PRESCON
CORPORATION, a division
of the Campenon Bernard
Group and member of the
Freyssinet International
Group, specializes in the
application of prestressed
technology, furnishing
engineering services,
specialized construction
systems, and post-
tensioning systems for
major construction
projects.
Prestons experience and
service to the construction
industry in the United
States goes back to 1950.
Prestons internationally
recognized parent firm of
Campenon Bernard was
founded 32 years earlier in
1918 and its association
with the late Eugene
Freyssinet, inventor of
prestressed concrete, in
1933. The group has been
in the forefront of progress
within the construction
industry.
Today, alone or in
collaboration with local
and international partners,
the group is capable of
providing a full range of
diversified engineering and
construction services
ranging from technical
assistance to full
responsibility for the
execution of major
projects.
- 119-
2.2.13 THE PRESCON CORPORATION - continued
- 720--
2.2.13 THE PRESCON CORPORATION - continued
- 121-
2.2.13 THE PRESCON*CORPORATION - continued
-i22-
2.2.13 THE PRESCON CORPORATION - continued
TURKEY POINT IV
TROJAN
SOUTH TEXAS II
TAIWAN
MAANSHAN I TAIWAN POWER CORP
MAANSHAN II TAIWAN POWER CORP 37K6
2.2.13 THE PRESCON.CORPORATlON - continued
- 124-
2.2.13 THE PRESCON CORPORATION - continued
@ Lifting complete roofs and roof sections into position after 2. Lifting of the cantilever spans (300t) by
1,30 m Llbos Bridge, France
assembly at ground level. 3 Llftmg of floors for the Maves Radl Tower,
l Erection of chimney units either lifting from above or below. France
l Installation of heavy plant inside buildings where heavy crane
access is not available.
l Installation of nuclear reactor components.
- 125-
2.2.13 THE PRESCON CORPORATION - continued
Frey&i Flat Jacks find wide THE FREYSSI FLAT JACK was
application in the civil. and originally invented by Eugene
structural construction in- Freyssinet and used in the con-
dustry wherever application struction of some of his early
or control of large forces are bridges. In its simplest form, it
required or where structural is a thin pressure capsule cap-
or foundation strains have to able of exerting, hydraulically,
be induced. Essentially sim- extremely large forces through
ple and compact, they are as a restricted movement; the
often used in situations for stroke can be extended by
which their use was not fore- stacking jacks in series.
seen, such as remedial
measures or structural ad-
ditions, as they are used in
new constructions in which
they form a part of the struc-
tural concept. The Freyssi
Flat Jacks have been used
on a world wide basis, to
solve an astonishing variety
of structural and civil engin-
eering problems:
l Control of Thrust Forces
l Prestressing Between
Abutments
l Adjustment of Support
Reactions
l Structural Pre-Loading
l Structural Lifting
l Underpinning
l Measurement of Forces
Flat Jacks can be operated
with oil for temporary use or
where Flat Jacks, after util-
ization, are to remain per-
manently in the structure
they are filled with a hard-
setting grout or epoxy resin.
1 Use of flat jacks for rawng budge deck
Our experienced staff is
fully qualified to advise on NOTES:
all possible applications of (I) The minimum access gap required to place flat jack and steel thrust
plates between the surfaces to be jacked.
Flat Jacks, to assist in pre- (II) All flat jacks are 1 l/4 inches thick and have a maximum stroke of 1
paring practical preliminary inch.
schemes and to supervise (111) The normal range of jacks is circular as indicated in the table.
site installations and oper- However, both oblong and rectangular jacks may be custom built for
ations. special applications using ends or corners of standard radii.
(IV) If you have a problem which might possibly be solved by the use of
the jacks, or require further information, please contact our offices for
assistance.
- 126-
2.2.13 THE PRESCON CORPORATION - continued
- 127-
2.2.13 THE PRESCON.CORPORATION - continued
- 128-
2.2.13 THE PRESCON CORPORATION - continued
The Preston K System is the latest development by Freyssinet International. The K Systems
provide cable forces ranging from 100 tons to 1100 tons breaking load.
To achieve the maximum static and dynamic security in the tendon, each hole is drilled at its correct
angle in relation to the tendon pattern and all unwanted deviations in the strand path are avoided.
PRESCON KP SYSTEM
The Preston KP System
is an economical single
bearing plate anchorage, to forms grease bolf for
designed in accordance removal otter pouring
with AASHTO specifica- concrete. hj nut remains in
concrete for fastening grouf
tion stipulating bearing cap to plate Ctyp 4places I
stresses at service load to
be no greater than 3000
psi. str NO.
Tvpe Dia str. A B C D E F T RAM
PRESCON KD SYSTEM
The Preston KD System
is a double bearing plate
anchorage designed in
accordance with the same
AASHTO specification
noted in the KP System,
but the overall size of the
anchorage is reduced in
order to facilitate place-
ment in restrictive geo-
metric structural shapes.
str No.
Tvpe Dia str. A B C D E F RAM
- 129-
2.2.13 THE PRESCON .CORPORATION - continued
PRESCON KE SYSTEM
The Preston KE System
is an economical cast
ductile iron trumplate de-
signed in accordance with
FIP, and ACI standards. It
is most commonly used in 0
time of stressing.
PRESCON DUCT
Two different types of duct are available, smooth and
deformed. Smooth duct is so called because it has no
deformations between the spirally formed continuous
seam. Deformed duct features a series of spiral con-
figurations between the spiral formed continuous seam.
Smooth duct sections are joined together with short
sections of similarly formed duct in the next larger size.
These sleeves are centered on the joint between duct
sections and taped to the duct at the sleeve terminals for
post-tensioned applications.
Deformed duct sections are also joined together with X SECT. X SECT.
short sections of similarly formed duct in the next larger Smooth Profile Corrugated Profile
size, except that the sleeve is screwed on the abutting
ducts and the terminals taped. Again this type joint is
applicable to post-tensioning applications.
Total manufacturing capability covers gages 28 through 20 and duct diameters to 30. Detailed
information for unlisted sizes available on request.
- 730-
2.2.13 THE PRESCON CORPORATION - continued
PRESCON KC SYSTEM
The Preston KC System is
an economical range of cou-
plers, designed for simple
assembly on site. The first-
stage tendon is stressed and
anchored in the normal way
using standard equipment
and the dead-end of the
second tendon is assembled
around it, using swaged grips
on each strand to afford
maximum security.
The coupler assembly is en-
closed with a conical cover
which has a grout access
point for second stage
grouting.
PRESCON SW SYSTEM
The Preston SW System
utilizes a plate and swaged
grip, which enables the de-
sign force to be trans-mitted
to the dead end plates. This
anchorage system is used
when the design force is re-
Flexible or rigid
quired at the end of the struc-
tural member, and access-
ibility to this end is restrict-
Swage Grips
7
conduit (as reqd)
JACKS
- 132-
2.2.14 STEEL SERVICE COMPANY, INC.
- 133-
2.2.14 STEEL SERVIC,E COMPANY, INC. - continued
Offices
Knoxville, TN 615/546-5472
Nashville, Tn 615/832-6442
Louisville, KY 5021245-0256
St. Albans, WV 3041722-4291
Collierville, TN 901/853-8250
Johnson City, TN 615/928-0141
Indianapolis, IN 317/842-0071
Worthington, OH 6141431-1387
St. Louis, MO 314/993-0333
2.2.15 STRESSCON, INC.
INTRODUCTION PRODUCTS
The dramatic increase in the use of post- Stresscon specializes in the fabrication of l/2
tensioned concrete in recent years requires that inch diameter 270 k unbonded strand tendons.
engineers and contractors have access to the The tendons are fabricated with a corrosion
best information available regarding the design inhibiting grease and a durable plastic sheath.
and construction of post-tensioned concrete
structures. Stresscon was founded on the CONSTRUCTION SERVICES
concept of providing this information in a timely Once the decision to use post-tensioned con-
and accurate manner, a factor that controls crete has been made, we fabricate and ship to
company policy and is reflected in on-the-job the jobsite l/2 greased and plastic sheathed
performance. post-tensioning tendons, cut to length and color
coded. All tendons are supplied in accordance
ENGINEERING SERVICES with plans and specifications and approved
shop drawings. Complete sets of stressing equip-
Stresscon is committed to assist engineers and ment, including on-the-job training whenever
contractors in making decisions regarding the necessary, are provided, Also, in the case of a
use of post-tensioning. For this reason, we complete design-build concept, we provide all
maintain close business relationships with lead- engineering, reinforcing steel, and post-tension-
ing specialists in the design and construction of ing steel furnished and installed. This work is
post-tensioned concrete structures. Services sub-contracted to local rebar fabricators and
include feasibility studies, layout assistance, placers, assuring close control of all work at the
cost estimates, and final design. jobsite. Recent projectsare illustrated and listed
below and on the following page.
- i35-
2.2.15 STRESSCON, I,NC. - continued
PROJECTS
- 136-
2.2.16 STRESSTEK DIVISION, CONMAR CORPORATION
STRESSTEK POST-TENSIONING
The Stress&k post-tensioning system offers a results in great versatility for prestressing
range of tendon sizes from single strand applications.
tendons through 37 strand tendons in both
one-half inch and .6 inch diameter 270k Stresstek tendons are available in both the
strand. Tendon sizes can vary by increments grouted (bonded) design and greased
of one strand. Compact section strand can (unbonded) design in all sizes.
also be used, giving the 37.6 tendon an
ultimate strength in excess of 1,250 tons. In Reliability of Stresstek tendons and
addition to these features of flexibility with equipment has been a consideration leading
respect to range of forces, a variety of to its use in many major projects in the United
anchorages and equipment options are States and abroad. Some of these projects,
available in the Stresstek System which along with basic data describing the Stresstek
System are presented in the following pages.
A navigation unit for a new floating bridge across the Hood dock, floated out and joined with other elements to form an
Canal demonstrates an interesting application of the Stresstek important link in Washingtons highway system. Closed length
post-tensioning system. Buoyant post-tensioned concrete (shown) is 900 feet. When open to highway traffic the length is
pontoons as long as 312 feet were constructed in a graving 1,200 feet.
2.2.16 STRESSTEK DIVISION, CONMAR CORPORATION - continued
Gripper Jaws
1 Grommet
- 138-
2.2.16 STRESSTEK DIVISION, CONMAR CORPORATION - continued
Seattles Kingdome boasts the largest concrete dome in the stadium is prestressed by a wide range of Stresstek multistrand
world. This unique structure has a 660 foot clear span. The tendons. .
- 139-
2.2.16 STRESSTEK Dl)/ISION, CONMAR CORPORATION - continued
TENDON SELECTION
Structural analysis will establish the The following tables are convenient for
necessary final post-tensioning force (Pf) choosing Stresstek multistrand tendons for
required for the element under design. This specified force requirements. The table shows
force is the minimum nominal force which the maximum number of strands and other
remains through the life of the structure after data for a given anchorage size. Any lesser
the effects of shrinkage, creep, elastic number of strands than the maximum may be
shortening, relaxation, friction, etc. have used.
taken place.
Anchorage Maximum
Designation Number of
-6 270~ %- mm- Sq. in. Kg/meter Lb/foot KN Kips KN Kips Mm Inches
Strands
S4.6 4 560 0.868
S7.6 7 980 1.519
S13.6 13 1,821 2.821
S19.6 19 2,661 4.123
S31.6 31 4,342 6.727
S37.6 37 5,182 8.029
2.2.16 STRESSTEK DIIfISION, CONMAR CORPORATION - continued
TENDON DATA
ANCHORAGES WITH FABRICATED BEARING PLATE/TRUMPET
Nomenclature
Anchorhead
Diameter c 11.0 4.35 11.0 4.35 15.2 6.0 17.3 6.85 22.5 8.87 27.9 10.75
Anchorhead
Thickness D 4.4 1.75 4.4 1.75 6.6 2.6 7.6 3.0 8.6 3.4 10.2 3.68
Trumpet Length E 20.3 8.0 30.5 12.0 40.6 16.0 50.8 20.0 61.0 24.0 61.0 24.0
Bearing Plate A 19.1 7.5 24.8 9.75 34.3 13.5 40.6 16.0 53.3 21.0 58.4 23.0
Bearing Plate
Thickness B 2.5 1.0 3.5 1.37 5.1 2.0 6.4 2.5 7.6 3.0 8.9 3.5
Anchorhead
Thickness D 4.4 1.75 6.4 2.5 7.6 3.0 8.6 3.4 11.3 4.44 12.1 4.75
Trumpet Length E 30.0 12.0 30.0 12.0 50.8 20.0 58.4 23.0 71.1 28.0 91.4 36.0
- 142-
-&EPl-
NJ ssauyqql peay~oymj
06 1 6ZZ
,I 1
n - - w
4
I
a 0;nl.Q
13dLJnk41/31Vld E)NlklV38 lSV3 HllM S3WklOH3NV
VNCI NOCINU
parwguo3 - NOllVkiOdkJ03 WUUN03 NOISIAICI MLSS3US 91-Z-Z
2.2.16 STRESSTEK DJVISION, CONMAR CORPORATION - continued
( 1 ) Lengths shown are for rams with 12 inch strokes, except for 100 ton jack which has an 8 inch stroke.
2.2.16 STRESSTEK DIVISION, CONMAR CORPORATION - continued
The Hong Kong Club employs Stresstek tendons to provide Stresstek prestressing methods contribute to the success of
long clear spans for this landmark in the Colony. some unusual construction as illustrated here on a floating
concrete breakwater at Auk Bay, Alaska. Tendons were
threaded through ductsembedded in precast segments, joining
40 foot units to form 240 elements of a breakwater 1,200 feet in
length.
Stresstek System services and reliable equipment helped RTJV (Stevin, Capiletti and LT
Contracting) produce 350 precast, post-tensioned girders on schedule forthe Dade County
Rapid Transit in Miami, Florida.
- 145-
2.2.16 STRESSTEK DIVISION, CONMAR CORPORATION - continued
(81 8 11 c e n t e r s
maxlmum)
r
Wedge - Corrugated Polyethylene
Tubmg
Grout Tube
Drilled Hole
SECTION A - A SECTION B - B
ANCHORAGE ASSEMBLY
-146-
2.2.16 STRESSTEK DIVISION, CONMAR CORPORATION - continued
Stresstek
Multlstrand
/ Failure Plane
i f
:
E
Q
\
Spreader
W o o d Lagging
----.
2nd Tier Hole
----I
TO Be Excavated
- x
- 147 -
2.2.16 STRESSTEK DIYISION, CONMAR CORPORATION - continued
- 748 -
2.2.17 VSL CORPORATION
Corporation
@
Introduction
VSL Corporation is a diversified firm engaged in
construction and transportation projects which
require special know-how and innovative
engineering, manufacturing and construction
capabilities. Since its inception in 1966, the
company has strived to offer a broad and
technically superior line of systems and services
for all phases of a project. Today, the company is
well recognized as one of North Americas leading
specialty contractors, with offices and plants
located throughout the United States.
- 149-
2.2.17 VSL CORPORATION - continued
- 150-
2.2.17 VSL CORPORATION - continued
Anchorage Components
VSL E Stressing Anchorage
This anchorage is composed of an anchor head,
wedges, and a bearing plate with trumpet. The
bearing plate is positioned in the structure
concurrently with the formwork, whereas the
anchor head is not placed until the time of
stressing the tendons.
Anchorage
Type VSL 5-3 5-7 5-12 5-19 5-31 5-55 6-12 6-19
Ultimate
Capacity 124 289 496 785 1280 2272 703 1114
(kb)
A 5.50 8.25 10.75 13.50 17.50 24.00 12.25 15.75
B 5.50 8.25 10.75 13.50 17.50 24.00 12.25 15.75
C 0.75 1.25 1.50 1.75 2.25 3.00 1.75 2.25
DO 1.88 2.88 4.13 5.25 6.75 9.00 4.63 6.00
ED 3.38 4.50 6.00 7.00 9.00 12.50 7.00 8.75
F 2.40 2.40 2.40 2.95 3.95 6.00 3.15 3.95
G 3.40 3.40 3.40 4.00 5.00 7.00 4.15 5.00
He 2.12 2.12 2.81 3.56 4.50 6.00 3.56 4.31
J 4.00 8.00 12.00 23.00 34.00 42.00 18.00 28.00
Dimensions in inches.
Anchorage
Type VSL 5-3 5-7 5-12 5-19 5-31 6-12 6-19
Ultimate
C a p a c i t y (kips) 124 289 496 785 1280 703 1114
A 5.32 6.89 8.86 11.00 13.98 10.43 13.00
B 5.32 6.89 8.86 11.00 13.98 10.43 13.00
C 1.96 2.17 2.17 2.17 2.56 2.36 2.56
De 3.94 5.12 6.69 8.27 10.43 7.87 9.84
EB 3.38 4.50 6.00 7.00 9.00 7.00 8.75
F 2.40 2.40 2.40 2.95 3.95 3.15 3.95
G 3.40 3.40 3.40 4.00 5.00 4.15 5.00
He 1.94 3.15 3.78 4.53 5.67 4.53 4.72
J 4.92 5.32 7.09 10.24 13.39 9.95 11.42
Dimensions in inches.
- 757 -
2.2.17 VSI. CORPORATION - continued
Anchorage
Type VSL so5-4 SO6-4
A 3.50 3.50
B 11 .oo 11.00
C 2.87 2.87
D 6.25 . 6.25
E 5.00 5.00
F 5.62 5.62
G 13.00 13.00
H 3.00 3.00
I 1.00 1 .oo
J 24.00 24.00
K 4.00 4.00
L 2.50 2.50
Dimensions in inches.
Anchorage
Tvw VSL 5-3 5-7 5-12 5-19 5-31 6-12 6-19
A 2.50 2.50 2.50 3.50 4.50 3.50 4.50
B 3.00 3.00 4.00 6.25 9.50 6.25 9.50
C 48.00 48.00 48.00 50.00 51 .oo 50.00 51 .oo
Dimensions in inches.
- 752-
2.2.17 VSL CORPORATION - continued
Anchorage
Type VSL 5-4 5-6 5-12 6-12
A 6.30 7.88 11.00 11.85
B 3.50 5.25 5.50 6.30
C 2.75 3.55 5.50 6.30
D 7.00 8.50 12.50 13.75
E 2.12 2.12 2.75 3.50
F 30.00 42.00 60.00 68.00
Dimensions in inches
Anchorage
Type VSL 5-4 5-7 5-12 5-19 5-31 6-12 6-19
A 6.00 6.75 12.25 12.25 18.50 15.30 15.50
B 6.75 7.50 10.63 15.50 17.00 13.00 18.50
Al *
2.75 2.75 7.50 7.50 8.63 9.00 9.00
B tt 12.25 14.50 13.75 18.50 26.50 17.00 22.50
C 36.00 48.00 48.00 48.00 48.00 48.00 52.00
1. Dimensions and arrangements shown are the most Dimensions in inches.
common but can be altered where desired. *Denotes square pattern.
2. Spirals are generally used in light weight concrete **Denotes rectangular pattern.
(110 Ibsku ft) and for tendons of 12 strands and larger,
and are usually composed of 5 turns of % inch bar.
- 153-
2.2.17 VSL CORPORATION - continued
VSL K Coupler
This coupler enables a new tendon to be con-
nected to an already placed and stressed ten-
don. It is used mainly in bridge construction, A
where the work advances by successive stages.
Each strand is individually coupled to the coup-
ling head by means of a compression fitting. Anchorage
c
Anchorage
We VSL5-3 5-7 5-12 5-19 5-31 6-12 6-19
A 5.13 6.75 7.88 9.50 13.75 9.50 10.63
B 2.50 2.50 3.00 3.75 5.00 4.00 4.75
C 17.00 21.25 22.50 26.75 37.75 27.25 30.50
D 2.75 3.25 3.50 4.50 5.50 4.50 5.00
E 9.00 12.75 13.50 16.75 26.75 17.50 20.00
F 5.25 5.25 5.50 5.50 5.50 5.25 5.50
Dimensions in inches.
B B E E F F
Jack Type A Minimum Normal C D Minimum Normal Minimum Normal
E5-3 14 5 5 7 13 26 51 40 75
E5-7 16 5 5 9 16 27 52 40 75
E5-12 18 5 5 10 18 27 52 40 75
E5-19 E6-12 22 6 7 10 18 30 55 45 80
E5-31 E6-19 27 6 7 11 20 32 57 45 80
E5-55 36 9 10 18 30 60 70 90 100
Dimensions in inches.
The minimum values for E and F should only be used in
special cases as they require short-stroke jacks which may
not always be available.
- 154-
2.2.17 VSL CORPORATION - continued
0.5 dia. 270 ksi strands *This figure may vary shghtly for different manufacturers
Unit No. of Steel area Weight Sheath diameter (inches) Max. temp. Initial force
VSL strands Flexible metal Rigid thin wall force OS8 fs 0.7 fs
I.D. O.D. kips kips
sq. in. IbJft.
E5-3 2 0.306 1.050 1.25 2.12" 66.1 57.8
3 0.459 1.575 1.50 2.12" 99.1 86.7
E5-4 4 0.612 2.100 1.63 2.12" 132.2 115.6
E5-7 5 0.765 2.625 1.75 2.12 165.2 144.5
6 0.918 3.150 1.88 2.12 198.2 173.5
7 1.071 3.675 2.00 2.12 231.3 202.4
E5-12 8 1.224 4.200 2.00 2.25 264.3 231.3
9 1.377 4.725 2.13 2.44 297.4 260.2
10 1.530 5.250 2.25 2.44 330.4 289.1
* 11 1.683 5.775 2.38 2.81 363.4 316.0
12 1.836 6.300 2.50 2.81 396.5 346.9
E5-19 13 1.989 6.825 2.63 3.00 429.5 375.8
14 2.142 7.350 2.63 3.00 462.6 404.7
15 2.295 7.875 2.75 3.19 495.6 433.6
16 2.448 8.400 2.88 3.19 528.6 462.6
17 2.601 8.925 3.00 3.56 561.7 491.5
18 2.754 9.450 3.00 3.56 594.7 520.4
19 2.907 9.975 3.13 3.56 627.8 549.3
E5-22 20 3.060 10.500 3.25 3.75 660.8 578.2
21 3.213 11.025 3.25 3.75 693.8 607.1
22 3.366 11.550 3.38 3.75 726.9 636.0
E5-31 23 3.519 12.075 3.50 3.94 759.9 664.9
24 3.672 12.600 3.50 3.94 793.0 693.8
25 3.825 13.125 3.63 3.94 826.0 722.7
26 3.978 13.650 3.63 3.94 859.0 751.7
27 4.131 14.175 3.75 4.31 892.1 780.6
28 4.284 14.700 3.88 4.31 925.1 809.5
29 4.437 15.225 3.88 4.31 958.2 838.4
30 4.590 15.750 4.00 4.50 991.2 867.3
31 4.743 16.275 4.00 4.50 1024.2 896.2
E5-55 55 8.415 28.875 5.50 6.00 1817.6 1590.4
Dimensions in inches.
"Smaller diameter sheath available upon request.
- 155-
2.2.17 VSL CORPORqTlON - continued
Unit No. of Steel area Weight Sheath diameter (inches) Max. temp. Initial force
VSL strands forc,eii;8 fs 0.7 fs
Flexible metal Rigid thin wall
I.D. O.D. kips
sq. in. Ib./ft.
E6-12 - 8 1.736 5.902 2.81 3.00 375.0 328.2
9 1.953 6.640 2.81 3.00 421.9 369.2
10 2.170 7.378 3.00 3.56 468.8 . 410.2
11 2.387 8.116 3.00 3.56 515.6 451.2
12 2.604 8.854 3.00 3.56 562.6 492.2
E6-19 13 2.821 9.591 3.25 3.75 609.4 533.3
14 3.038 10.330 3.25 3.75 656.3 574.3
15 3.255 11.067 3.25 3.75 703.2 615.3
16 3.472 11.805 3.50 3.94 750.1 656.3
17 3.689 12.543 3.50 3.94 797.0 697.3
18 3.906 13.280 3.63 3.94 843.8 738.4
19 4.123 14.018 3.75 4.31 890.7 779.4
Dimensions in inches.
* 'Smaller diameter sheath available upon request.
Grouting
The purpose of grouting a cable is to provide an For detailed grouting recommendations, refer to
efficient bond between the prestressing steel PTI Manual, Recommended Practice for
and the concrete member, as well as to protect Grouting of Post-Tensioned Prestressed
the steel from corrosion. To accomplish this, Concrete.
the grout should possess the following
properties: To a large extent, the successful grouting of
prestressing tendons depends on the equip-
n Good fluidity ment. In order to achieve a proper grout, the use
n No thickening during injection of the best mixing and pumping equipment is es-
n Minimum bleeding and segregation sential. VSL Grouting Equipment possesses the
l No reduction of volume; i.e., no shrinkage necessary features to provide a proper grout.
n Frost resistance
n Adequate strength
- 156-
2.2.17 VSL CORPORATION - continued .
The VSL Monostrand System has been corresponding number of VSL Monostrand
specifically designed to reduce the field labor System tendons may be used. Separate
requirements of installation and stressing. The monostrand tendons are placed in flat patterns
system can be used economically for slabs, at the high and low points of the tendon profile,
beams, transverse girders, foundations and a providing maximum eccentricity and therefore
variety of other applications. the most effective use of the post-tensioning
steel.
This system utilizes the same proven principle
of anchoring employed by the VSL Multistrand The following anchorages are used with the VSL
System. This system uses either 0.5 or 0.6 inch, Monostrand System:
7-wire strand with guaranteed ultimate strengths n Stressing, intermediate and fixed anchorages
of 41,300 and 58,600 Ibs. respectively. Other VSL T and SN
sizes and types of strand are available upon
n Early stressing anchorage VSL SNW
request.
The VSL Monostrand System has been exposed
The variety of systems offers the designer a extensively to both static and dynamic tests,
selection of available post-tensioning forces, satisfying all nationally recognized building
and VSLs Engineering Staff is available to pro- codes and specifications for post-tensioning
vide assistance in selecting the right system for material.
the specific project. For the post-tensioning of
beams, either the VSL Multistrand System or a
Grommet
Grommet \ -7
- 157 -
2.2.17 VSL CORPORATION - continued
Anchorage Components
VSL SN Stressing Anchorage
The VSL SN Anchorage consists of a casting
and a pair of VSL Wedges. Since the stressing
anchorage is attached to the form prior to the
installation of strand, greater flexibility is B -
achieved as the tendons can be easily threaded r!!!!
through congested, heavily reinforced beams or c
under electrical ducts in the flat slabs. This an-
chorage is used for both intermediate and fixed-
end applications. The SNW is used in situations
where its larger size is required for early stress-
ing or lower than normal concrete strengths. Grommet-G
- 158-
2.2.17 VSL CORPORATION - continued
Stressing Equipment
VSL Stressing Rams
The VSL Twin Rams are small, lightweight,
and easily handled by one person. They are
designed for use on all anchorages, thereby
eliminating the need for two sets of equipment
on a job where intermediate or customized
beam anchorages are employed. Jacks can
be used to stress tendons located as close as
1.5 inches to the side of a form or stressing
blockout. With the use of easily interchangeable
nose pieces, the rams can reach between col-
umn bars spaced as close as 2 inches to stress
recessed tendons. The VSL Twin Ram stressing
operation requires less than 1 minute to set up
and stress a tendon.
Approx.
Ram Stroke Weight
C
Type
ML53 6.25 4.13 17.00 3.00 30
ML56 6.25 4.13 20.00 6.00 36
ML58 6.25 4.13 22.00 8.00 40
MA54 7.75 4.00 22.50 4.00 50
MA56 7.75 4.00 24.50 6.00 56
MA58 7.75 4.00 26.50 8.00 62
ML63 9.75 3.50 16.00 3.00 35
ML66 9.75 3.50 19.00 6.00 42
ML68 9.75 3.50 21 .oo 8.50 49
Prestressing Steel
Prestressing steel employed by the VSL
Monostrand System is either 0.5 or 0.6 inch
7-wire strand manufactured in accordance with
ASTM A416 and has a guaranteed ultimate
tensile strength of 270 ksi. Other sizes and
types of strand are available upon request. The
prestressing steel is coated with a lubricating
corrosion inhibitor prior to being extruded in a
tough protective plastic sheath.
Technical Data
Nominal diameter: 0.5 in. 0.6 in.
Cross sectional area: 0.153 sq. in. 0.217 sq. in.
Modulus of elasticity: 28,000 ksi 28,000 ksi
Ultimate strength: 41.3 kips 58.6 kips
Max. temporary
force at jacking: 33.0 kips 46.9 kips
Max. anchoring force: 28.9 kips 41.0 kips
- 159--
2.2.17 VSL CORPORA.TION - continued
Anchorage
Tension member
Anchored element
Anchor Data
The following points are suggested for con- The 0.5 7-wire strand for prestressing applica-
sideration when selecting a prestressing unit: tion has an ultimate strength (fsn) of 270,000 psi
and is produced and tested in accordance with
n Working force the requirements of ASTM A-416. Physical
n Loss of prestress properties of 0.5 strand are as follows:
n Allowable stresses in prestressing steel
n Drill hole diameter Guaranteed ultimate strength 41,300 lb.
n Bond length Yield strength(at 1% extension) 35,100 lb.
Approx. modulus of elasticity 28,000,OOO psi
Min. elongation at rupture 3.5% in 24inches
- 160-
2.2.17 VSL CORPORATION - continued
- 161 -
2.2.17 VSL CORPORATION - continued
- 162-
2.2.17 VSL CORPORATION - continued
Anchorage Components
VSL E Stressing Anchorage
The E Anchorage consists of an anchor head, Corrosion protection of the anchor head is
wedges and bearing plate. If the anchorage obtained by filling the protective cap with ce-
must be accessible for surveillance purposes, it ment mortar or with a corrosion resisting
may be covered with a removable protective cap. grease.
All strands of the anchor are stressed
simultaneously but are locked off individually
by wedges in the conical holes of the anchor
head. Throughout the range of VSL Anchorages,
which incorporate from 1 to 55 strands, the prin-
ciple of anchoring the strand is the same from _
the smallest to the largest unit. I
-.
The VSL Stressing Anchorages are designed to
I@
meet all the special requirements which may be
required of an anchor. These requirements must
be known in advance to enable the anchor to be A
properly selected. This is particularly true when
the anchor:
w Is a surveillance anchor, or
H Must be restressed at a later time or
n Must be detensioned and restressed.
Anchorage
Type VSL ER5-3 ER5-6 ER5-9 ER5-16 ER5-28 ER5-52
A 5.38 7.50 9.38 12.50 16.38 22.25
B 5.38 7.50 9.38 12.50 16.38 22.25
C 0.75 1.25 1.25 1.75 2.00 3.00
D 2.25 2.88 4.13 5.25 6.75 9.00
E 3.38 4.50 6.00 7.00 9.00 12.50
F 2.40 2.40 2.40 2.95 3.95 6.00
G 3.40 3.40 3.40 4.00 5.00 7.00
L 4.00 8.00 12.00 23.00 34.00 42.00
M 2.00 2.50 2.75 3.50 4.50 6.00
N 1.50 2.00 2.25 3.00 4.00 5.50
0 4.38 5.50 7.00 8.00 10.00 14.00
P 5.00 5.00 5.00 6.00 7.00 9.00
Note: The last digit in the anchorage designation indicates the maximum
number of 0.5 in. diameter strands that can be accommodated in
the anchorage.
-163-
2.2.17 VSL CORPORATION - continued
Template Anchorage
Anchorage
Type VSL ER5-3 ER5-6 ER5-9 ER5-16 ER5-28 ER5-52
A 5.38 7.50 9.38 12.50 16.38 22.25
B 5.38 7.50 9.38 12.50 16.38 22.25
C 1.00 .1.25 1.50 2.00 2.50 3.50
1 0.38 13.50 17.38 23.25
E 6.38 8.50 10.38 13.50 17.38 23.25
F 0.38 0.38 0.38 0.38 0.38 0.38
G 3.38 4.50 6.00 7.00 9.00 12.50
H 2.40 2.1 10 2.40 2.95 3.95 6.00
J 3.40 3.40 3.40 4.00 5.00 7.00.
34.00 36.00 44.00
0 3.38 3.88 4.38 6.38 8.00 10.50
P 3.00 3.50 4.00 6.00 7.50 10.00
Q 4.38 5.50 7.00 8.00 10.00 14.00
R 5.00 5.00 5.00 6.00 7.00 9.00
Note: The last digit in the anchorage designation indicates the maximum
number of 0.5 in. diameter strands that can be accommodated in
the anchorage.
-164-
2.2,17 VSL CORPORATION - continued
- 765-
2.2.17 VSL CORPORATION - continued
System Components
VSL Strand Bundle
The VSL Strand Bundle consists of cold drawn, 7-wire, Normal construction
- Cable completely fllled with cement
ASTM A-416 post-tensioning steel of 0.6 inch nominal grout from the lower end
diameter and low relaxation quality. For additional cor-
rosion protection, the strand may be galvanized or
greased and individually sheathed in high-density
polyethylene.
Tubing
The VSL Stay Cable System 200 Strand Bundle is
PE or steel tube
encased in a tube of either steel or heavy gauge
polyethylene. The ratio of internal diameter to wall
thickness is approximately 16:l.
PE or steel tube
The System 200 stressing anchorage is provided
with a threaded head and ring nut which allows PE-sheathed and greased
tension adjustment or total destressing if required. strand (monostrand;
- 766-
2.2.17 VSL CORPORATION - continued
Breaking
Unit A B Load
Kips
6-7 6.25 6.30 410
6-12 9.45 7.46 6.30 4.33 3.94 27.56 12.60 703
6-19 11.41 9.06 7.67 4.92 4.33 43.31 15.75 1,113
6-31 1339 11.02 9.84 6.30 5.51 53.15 16.90 1.617
6-37 14.57 11.61 11.02 7.09 6.30 62.99 20.67 2,166
6-61 16.11 14.96 13.96 7.67 7.09 90.55 25.98 3,574
6-91 21.65 17.72 17.72 9.84 6.66 110.23 31.69 47,466
Dimensions in inches. .
- i67-
2.2.17 VSL CORPORATION - continued
.
VSL STAY CABLE SYSTEM 250
The System 250 is a factory produced stay cable which
is coiled on a reel and delivered to the jobsite ready for
installation. The anchor sockets are filled with a mixture
of epoxy, steal balls, and zinc powder. The resulting
anchorage has superior fatigue properties as well as
a compact anchorage socket. The system also takes
advantage of the high breaking strength of ASTM
A-416 low relaxation strand and is sheathed in heavy
gauge polyethylene pipe. Final corrosion protection is
provided by cement grout injection. Cable replacement
capabilities are built into the system.
Breaking
Unit A B C D E Load
Kips
8-19 17.00 12.63 7.88 4.50 3.25 1,113
6-31 20.62 15.66 9.68 5.56 4.06 1,817
8-43 24.25 17.50 10.88 6.63 5.25 2,520
6-55 27.00 19.88 12.38 6.63 5.25 3,223
6-73 32.63 24.00 15.00 7.75 6.12 4,278
8-91 37.50 27.00 16.88 8.63 6.88 5,333
6-103 38.38 28.12 17.56 8.63 7.12 6,036
Dimensions in inches.
- 168-
2.2.18 ADDRESSES OF POST-TENSIONING MEMBERS
OF THE POST-TENSIONING INSTITUTE
- 169-
2.2.18 Continued .
- 770-
2.2.18 Continued
- 171-
2.2.18 Continued .
- 172-
2.3 ASSOCIATE AND AFFILIATE MEMBERS
OF THE POST-TENSIONING INSTITUTE
This section presents addresses of Associate and Affiliate Members of the Post Tensioning
Institute along with descriptions of products and services provided by these companies.
More detailed information on the products and services provided by most of these
companies is presented in Sections 2.3.3 through 2.3.14.
- 173-
2.3 Continued
- 174-
2.3 Continued
- 176-
2.3.3 THE CRISPIN CQMPANY
STRAND
Relaxation loss after
1000 h. at 6SQF
Diameter (2OQC)
STANDARD*
SPEClFlCATlDN over 610mm
!
(24 in) 70% min. 60% min.
mm in mm* sq.in kN lb kg/lOOOm Ib/lOOOfl Break. Load Break.Load
max. max.
-.- 2.5 35
;rade270
1980
I 12,7
152 I iiS
0 6 1 140,OO 0.217 1 260,7 1 58600
WIRE
max. max.
2.5 3.5
To learn more about ACINDAR and for further information concerning the availability of our
products in the United States, please contact THE CRISPIN COMPANY.
ACINDAR
INDUSTRIA ARGENTINA DE ACEROS S.A. *
m-BOND@@ A strand desi ned TV offer corrosion
in combination Mh bon2 transfer characteristics
equal to or exceeding current bare strand capabilities. This strand is
intended for use where prestressed concrete strand has been ex-
cluded until now, because of-corrosion. For exam le, in certain bridge
deck panels and in structural members expose CP to marine or salt
environments.
FLQ-WXID SPECIALS A specially coated strand desi n&d to provide controlled
bond-transfer for such applications as hollow-core sla% construction and railroad
ties. Its specia! coatipg @nd,bond characteristics make it preferable where the
sole, pyrpose of app$atron IS to imprpye bond transfer. As such, it offers only
- 178-
2.3.5 THE GREAT SOUTHWEST MARKETING CO., INC.
ICE30 No.4164
- 179-
2.3.5 THE GREAT SOUTHWEST MARKETING CO., INC. - continued
- 180-
2.3.6 MOBIL OIL CORPORATION
Mobil
2.3.7 PRECISIQN SCREW PRODUCTS COMPANY, INC.
Presision Screw Products Co., supplies the following products and services
to the prestressed concrete industry:
- 782-
2.3.8 SHELL OIL COMPANY
SHELL PT GREASE
Shell PT Grease is the latest in the family of grease products supplied for the post-tensioning
industry. PT Grease is newly formulated and achieves the objective of providing superior
corrosion protection to unbonded tendon pre-stressing steel through the exclusion of
moisture. This is effectively accomplished by a physical shield in the form of a stable grease
structure and additives which selectively coat metal surfaces, exclude air and water and provide
long-term corrosion protection.
Shell PT Grease incorporates the following characteristics which contribute to its successful
performance:
Shell PT Grease
Test Method Typical Properties
Worked Pen. @ 25C 60 strokes ASTM D-217 325
Dropping Pt., C ASTM D-2265 189
5% Salt Water Spray Test, 720 Hours ASTM B-l 17 7, 7
Water Soluble Ions
Chlorides Ion Chromatography 1 ivm
Sulfides Calorimetric <lppm -
Nitrates Ion Chromatography < 1 tvm
Sheathing Compatibility, MDPE
30 days @ +lOO F
Hardness Change -1%
Volume Change +6.26%
Cracking None
Rust Test, Steel
30 days @ 100F
Cable in dry oil No rust
Cable in oil saturated with 2O/o water No rust
For availability of Shell PT Grease you can contact one of the Shell Lubricant Sales Offices listed
in Section 2.3.2
- 183-
2.3.9 SHINKO WIRE COMPANY, LTD.
h;a. 4
l Large Diameter Nineteen Wire Strand
I
Nominal
Nominal Nominal Weight Minimum Minimum Load Minimum
Product Diameter Steel Area with Coating Breaking Load et 1% Exten. Elongation
in 2kq in lb/l 000 h lb lb %
- 184-
2.3.10 SIDERIUS, INC.
Siderius, Inc. F0
i sdy
Group
U.S. Subsidiary of Finsider International
- 185-
2.3.11 SUM ITOMO ELECTRIC INDUSTRIES, LTD.
SumitomoElectricIndustries,Ltd.,
SumidenWireProductsCorporation
and Sumiden Wire Sales...
theperfectCombination.
Through Sumitomo Electric Industries, Ltd. and Sumiden Wire
Products Corporation, American and Japanese engineers have
combined their skills and technologies to produce superior tensioning
materials for prestressed concrete.
Sumitomo Electric Industries, Ltd. and Sumiden Wire Products
Corporation provide the most complete line of dependable tensioning
materials available.
Tensioning Materials
a-
Indented Wire
8W
Two-Ply Wire
@W
Seven-Wire Strand Unbonded Seven-Wire Strand
@m
Nineteen-Wire Strand Unbonded Nineteen-Wire Strand
Tensioning Equipment and Accessories
Tensioning Jack and Pump Pushing Machine
All types of Strand, Wire and
Heading Machine Bar Anchorage
0
Sumiden Wire Products Corporation
Sumiden Wire Sales
- 186-
2.3.12 SUPREME PRODUCTS DIVISION
Supreme Products has been producing and supplying the very finest of Anchorage
Hardware to the Prestressed Concrete Industry for nearly 30 years. Our products are
used in over 50 countries throughout the world.
Supremes efforts to remain an industry leader resulted in the first grips to efficiently
anchor 270 K.S.I. Strand and, more recently, Low Relaxation Strand. Supreme was first,
and to our knowledge is still the only manufacturer to proof test 100% of the anchorage
bodies which are produced in our plants.
Currently Supreme is extending the range of our newly developed line of anchorage
hardware for epoxy coated strand, which has been successfully used on new projects
and repair of existing prestressed structures.
POST-TENSIONING WEDGES Sizes range fron .120 In. (3 MM) to .720 In. (18.3
MM). Both 2 piece and 3 piece, with or without
retaining circlips. Use range includes S.O.G.,
building structures, rock anchors, bridges and
nuclear containment structures.
REUSABLE PRODUCTS Complete size range includes strand and wire chucks
and their parts. 3 piece stressing jaws fit several
post-tensioning systems.
STRESSING JACK GRIPPERS Custom made to fit and size strand - very long term
usage built in through correct heat treatments. l/2
inch and .6 inch usually in stock.
- 187 -
2.3.13 VELZY EN,GINEERING & MACH NE, INC.
~
Manufacturer of Monostrand Post Tensioning Jacking Systems and Labor Saving Accessories.
Wrap & Seal Post Tensioning Cable Processing Lines built to order.
STRESSING JACKS
318 & l/2 270K Strand
Ram Area -- 6.26 sq. in. Operating Pressure at 33K -- 5254 PSI
- 188-
2.3.14 VISCOSITY OIL COMPANY
The following Visconorust Corrosion Preventive products are used by the Post-
Tensioning Industry in unbonded systems.
NUCLEAR
COMMERCIAL
N
- 189-
Chapter 3
Specifications
3.1 GUIDE SPECIFICATIONS FOR POST-TENSIONING MATERIALS
3.1.1 GENERAL
The system and text presented herein requires that each user make the
changes, additions or deletions necessary to adapt these specifications to his
specific job condition and specification format.
3.1.2 Scope
(1) This specification provides the minimum The intent of the specification is to cover post-
requirements for post-tensioning materials tensioning systems applicable to all common
which are a part of this prestressed con- prestressed concrete structures. There are, how-
Crete structure. ever, certain special structures which, either
because of their service requirements orstructu-
ral behavior, might impose requirements on the
post-tensioning system which exceed the min-
imum requirements of these standard specifica-
tions. It is recommended that, in such cases, a
special set of specifications be written.
(2) The provisions of this specification shall Non-structural applications might include top-
also govern for non-structural applications. ping slabs, waterproofing slabs on fill, crack
control, and deflection control. For non-flexural
or membrane type structures primarily under
tensile forces, the provisions, where approp-
riate, are intended to apply.
3.1.3 Definitions
( 1 ) Tendon - The complete assembly consist-
ing of anchorage and prestressing steel
with sheathing when required. The tendon
imparts prestressing forces to the concrete.
(2) Bonded Tendons - Tendons which are
bonded to the concrete through grouting or
other approved means, and therefore are
not free to move relative to the concrete.
- 192-
GUIDE SPECIFICATIONS NOTES TO SPECIFIERS
- 193-
GUlOE SPECIF\;CAT\ONS
(4) Wire, or strand, not specifically itemized in Provisions should be made for new steels which
ASTM A421 or A416, may be used provided would include new sizes, or improved character-
they conform to the minimum requirements istics of relaxation, bond, or mechanical prop-
of thesespecificationsand have no proper- erties. However, use of wire, strand, or bar pre-
ties which make them less satisfactory than stressing steels not covered by ASTM Specifica-
those listed in ASTM A421 or A416. tions should be permitted only when the supplier
provides conclusive test data substantiating that
all characteristics of the material are compar-
able to the properties of steels conforming to the
applicable ASTM Specification. In particular,
the stress corrosion characteristics of steels
produced by quench and temper heat treatment
should be carefully evaluated.
Relaxation properties of new steel should be
determined by adequate testing (minimum 7,000
hours).
(5) Bars not specifically itemized in ASTM The ASTM A722 covers bars with minimum
A722, including bars with a minimum ulti- ultimate tensile strength of 150,000 psi. Bars
mate tensile strength greater than 150,000 with 160,000 psi ultimate tensile strength meeting
psi (1035 MPa), may be used provided they all the requirements of ASTM A722 have been
conform to all other requirements of this used extensively in the United States
specification (including, in particular, those
of Sections 4,5, and 6 therein) and have no
properties which make them less satisfac-
tory than those listed in ASTM A722.
- 194-
GUIDE SPECIFICATIONS NOTES TO SPECIFIERS
- 195-
GUIDE SPECIFICATIONS NOTES TO SPECIFIERS
- 197 -
GUIDE SPECIFICATIONS
At service load -
fcp = 0.6 f;: dm
but not greater than 1.25 f;
At transfer load -
fCp = 0.8 fii J(A;IAJ -0.2
but not greater than 1.25 f,i
where
f CP = permissible compressive concrete
stress
- 198-
GUIDE SPECIFICATIONS NOTES TO SPECIFIERS
(2) Dynamic Tests - Dynamic tests shall be Dynamic tests are conducted to investigate or
performed on representative tendon speci- prove the fatigue behavior of a tendon assembly.
mens. In the first test, the tendon shall Since only unbonded tendons experience
withstand, without failure, 500,000 cycles changes of stresslevels over their entire length,
from 60 percent to 66 percent of its minimum they are the only tendons for which dynamic
specified ultimate strength. In the second tests are required. In bonded tendons, only local
test, the tendon shall withstand, without changes in stress can occur, and it is required
failure, 50 cycles from 40 percent to 80 only to know the fatigue properties of the
percent of its minimum specified ultimate prestressing steel in question. It is recommended
strength. The period of each cycle involves that anchorages be located in zones where
the change from the lower stress level to the stress changes either do not exist, or are small,
upper stress level and back to the lower. for example, at or near the neutral axis in flexural
The specimen used for the second dynamic members.
test need not be the same used for the first
dynamic test. Systems utilizing multiple The test as outlined is not intended to reproduce
strands, wires, or bars may be tested util- an actual case of fatigue load expected of any
izing a test tendon. The test tendon shall specific structural element. Nevertheless, a
duplicate the behavior of the full size tendon standard test, indicating the capability of the
and generally shall not have less than 10 tendon to resist cyclic loading had to be
percent of the capacity of the full size established. The load limits of 60 to 66percentof
tendon. Dynamic tests are not required on ultimate tensile strength are considered repre-
bonded tendons, unless the anchorage is sen ta tive for prestressed concrete flexural mem-
located or used in such manner that re- bers. The 500,000 cycles was established as a
peated load applications can be expected minimum value to represent the effect of fatigue.
on the anchorage.
With the advent of very large post-tensioning
tendons, it was recognized that the availability of
testing machines capable of performing a true
fatigue test of full capacity tendons was very
uncertain. The main feature in a dynamic test is
considered to be the possible effect of the
anchorage in reducing the fatigue strength of the
prestressing steel itself. The design of the different
anchorage components is a separate mechanical
problem, which can be approached in an analytical
- 799-
NOTES TO SPECIFIERS
- 200 -
3.2 SPECIFICATION FOR UNBONDED SINGLE STRAND TENDONS
This specification is in addition to and is The Guide Specification for Post- Tensioning
intended to be used in conjunction with the Materials includes strength requirements for
Guide Specification for Post-Tensioning anchorages and static and dynamic test require-
Materials presented in Section 3.1. These ments for unbonded tendons which are not
specifications shall supercede or govern in any reproduced in this specification. These require-
case of conflicting provisions with the Guide ments are considered applicable to unbonded
Specification for Post-Tensioning Materials. tendons in accordance with the provisions of
this section.
Unbonded single strand tendons fabricated by
methods other than these specifically itemized
in these specifications may be used when the
- 207 -
GUIDE SPECIFICATIONS NOTES TO SPECIFIERS
3.2.1.2 Definitions
(1) Tendon-The complete assembly consist-
ing of anchorage and prestressing steel
with sheathing when required. The tendon
imparts prestressing forces to theconcrete.
(2) Bonded Tendons - Tendons which are
bonded to the concrete through grouting or
other approved means, and therefore are
not free to move relative to the concrete.
(3) Unbonded Tendons - Tendons in which
the prestressing steel is permanently free to
move relative to the concrete to which they
are applying their prestressing forces.
(4) Anchorage - The means by which the
prestressing force is permanently trans-
mitted from the prestressing steel to the
concrete.
(5) Prestressing Steel - That element of a
post-tensioning tendon which is elongated
and anchored to provide the necessary
permanent prestressing force.
(6) Coating - Material used to protect against
corrosion and/or lubricate the prestressing
steel.
(7) Sheathing - Enclosure around the pre- Different requirements are imposed upon shea-
stressing steel to avoid temporary or things for bonded and unbonded tendons. In
permanent bond between the prestressing unbonded tendons, the sheathing does not
steel and the surrounding concrete. tran.smit any bond stresses from the prestres-
sing steel to the concrete and therefore has to
assure the freedom of movement of the pre-
stressing steel and form an adequate cover over
the coated tendon. In bonded tendons, bond
stresses will be transmitted through the shea th-
ing, and it must be of such material and/or con-
figuration to effective/y allow this stress transfer.
- 202 -
GUIDE SPECIFICATIONS NOTES TO SPECIFIERS
(2) Strand not specifically itemized in ASTM Provision should be made for new steels
A-416 may be used provided it conforms which would include new sizes, improved
to the minimum requirements of this characteristics of relaxation, or improved
specification and has no properties which mechanical properties. However, use of pre-
make it less satisfactory than those listed stressing steels not covered by AS TM Specifi-
in ASTM A-416. cations should be permitted only when the
supplier provides conclusive test data sub-
stan tia ting that all characteristics of the mate-
rial are comparable to the properties of steels
conforming to the ASTM Specifications. In
particular, the stress corrosion characteristics
of steels produced by quench and temper heat
treatments should be carefully evaluated.
Relaxation properties of new steels should be
based on a minimum test period of 1000 hours.
(4) Relaxation losses for low relaxation type It is not practical to run 7000 hour relaxation
material shall be based on relaxation tests tests on each pack of strand. For qualitative
of representative samples for a period of identification of low relaxation strand, a short
1000 hours, when tested at 70F and term relaxation test of 30 minutes to ten hours
stressed initially to not less than 70 will suffice. A maximum relaxation percentage
percent of the minimum guaranteed of 1.2 percent has been suggested for identifi-
breaking strength of the strand. cation of low relaxhtion steel in the 30 minute
- 203 -
GUIDE SPECIFICATIONS NOTES TO SPECIFIERS
The tests shall be in accordance with test. However, a 30minute test willnotprovide
ASTM A-416, and ASTM E-328. an accurate indication of the ultimate relaxa-
tion value. Very precise testing procedures are
required with mechanical (not hydraulic)
equipment in a room with rigid temperature
control to accurately evaluate steel relaxation
losses.
(5) Low relaxation strand shall be provided Low relaxation strand is identified by produc-
with a mill applied continuous permanent ers in packs by tags, pack markings and other
physical marking to permit field identi- means, as well as by mill certificates. /den tifi-
fication. cation of low relaxation material in individual
tendons at the jobsite requires the additional
marking required by this specification provi-
sion. Such marking is considered necessary to
avoid inadvertent reduction of structural
capacity through use of stress-relieved strand
in place of low relaxation strand. To provide
manufacturers time to develop a process to
perform this marking, this specification
should not be imposed until January 1, 7986.
(6) The material shall be packaged at the For corrosion protection of strand packs, they
source in a manner which prevents physi- are usually wrapped in paper impregnated
cal damage to the strand during transpor- with vapor phase inhibitor powder.
tation and protects the material from
deleterious corrosion during transit and
storage.
(3) For wedge type anchorages, the wedge For fixed anchorages, the finish of the outer
grippers shall be designed to preclude surface of the wedge that bears against the
premature failure of the prestressing steel wedge seat may have a microfinish of up to
due to notch or pinching effects under the 250. This microfinish of 250 for fixed anchor-
static and/or dynamic test load conditions age wedges and anchor (wedge) seating areas
stipulated under Section 3.2.3 (l), for both in anchor castings is intended to safeguard
- 204 -
GUIDE SPECIFICATIONS NOTES TO SPECIFIERS
stress relieved and low relaxation pre- against loosening of wedges during shipment
stressing steel materials. of tendons. The additional roughness can be
accommodated for fixed anchorages since the
anchorage is attached under plant conditions
in accordance with Section 3.2.6.4 (2).
3.2.4 Sheathing
(1) The tendon sheathing for unbonded sin- The sheathing may be produced by either an
gle strand tendons shall be made of a extrusion process, heat sealing process, or
material with the following properties: any other process which assures a watertight
- Sufficient strength to withstand unre- enclosure over the tendon.
pairable damage during fabrication,
transport, installation, concrete place-
ment and tensioning.
- Watertightness over the entire sheathing
length.
- Chemical stability, withoutembrittlement
or softening over the anticipated expo-
sure temperature range and the service
life of the structure.
- Non reactive with concrete, steel and the
tendon corrosion preventive coating.
(2) Minimum thickness of the sheathing used The increased sheathing thickness specified
in normal (non-corrosive) environments for corrosive environments is intended to pro-
shall not be less than 0.025 inches for vide increased resistance to damage during
medium or high density polyethylene or construe tion.
polypropylene. Sheathing thickness for
tendons used in corrosive environments
shall not be less than 0.040 inches for
medium or high density polyethylene or
polypropylene.
- 205 -
GUIDE SPECIFICATIONS NOTES TO SPECIFIERS
(3) The sheathing shall have an inside diame- Is is preferable that the sheathing provide a
ter at least 0.010 inches greater than the smooth circular outside surface. The sheathing
maximum diameter of the strand. should not visibly reveal the lay of the strand.
(3) Minimum weight of coating material on The corrosion test in Table 3.2.1 is based on a
the prestressing strand shall be not less coating thickness of 0.005 inches. The quantities
than 2.5 pounds of coating material per of coating material specified provide a minimum
100 feet of 0.5 inch diameter strand, and coating over the crests of the strand of approx-
3.0 pounds of coating material per 100 feet imate/y 0.005 inches.
of 0.6 inch diameter strand. The amount of
coating material used shall be sufficient to
ensure essentially complete filling the
annular space between the strand and the
sheathing. The coating shall extend over
the entire tendon length.
- 206 -
TABLE 3.2.1
PERFORMANCE SPECIFICATION FOR CORROSION PREVENTIVE COATING
7. Soak Test
5% Salt Fog at 100F (37.8OC) ASTM B-l 17 No emulsification of the
5 mils coating, Q panels, type S. (Modified) coating after 720 hours of
Immerse panels 50% in a 5% salt exposure.
solution and expose to salt fog
(1) Extension of exposure time to 1000 hours for greases used in corrosive environments requires
use of more or better corrosion inhibiting additives.
(2) Procedure: The inside (bottom and sides) of a 1 L Pyrex breaker, approximate O.D. 105 mm,
height 145 mm, is thoroughly coated with 100 + 10 g of corrosion preventive coating material.
The coated breaker is filled with approximately 900 cc of distilled water and heated in an oven at
a controlled temperature of 100 F f 2 F for 4 hours. The water extraction is tested by the noted
test procedures for the appropriate water soluble ions. Results are reported as ppm in the
extracted water.
- 207 -
COMMENTARY TO TABLE 3.2.1
The tests for corrosion prevention coatings presented in Table 3.2.1 are considered to be base line
tests, to ensure that minimum corrosion protection properties are provided. New developments of
coating materials may not meet some of these test requirements, and in such case other and more
comprehensive tests may be necessary to ascertain their adequacy.
TEST #3:
Water content is limited to exclude the presence of free water in the coating material.
TEST #4:
This test refers to the oil component in the coating material. Too low a flash point indicates higher
content of volatile derivatives, which affect the long term stability and change of consistency of the
coating material.
TEST #5:
This test provides a method to determine the effectiveness of the corrosion preventive properties of
the coating. The method is a standard test used for corrosion preventive coatings such as paints,
etc. The acceptance criteria of grade 7 or better (according to ASTM D-610) after 720 hours of
exposure requires that only 0.3 percent of the area exposed can have indications of corrosion. (See
Fig. 3.2.1 - Examples of Area percentages from ASTM D-610). The test is conducted on 3 x 6 inch
steel panels with a coating thickness of 0.005 inches. When determining the percent of area
corroded, only the area inside l/4 inch from the edges of the panel is evaluated.
TEST #6:
Water soluble ions known to cause corrosion are limited by this requirement.
TEST #7:
The Soak Test is designed to determine the ability of the coating to provide corrosion protection
after having been exposed to standing water for a period of time. Certain coatings will absorb water
to the extent that they will emulsify and break down the barrier against moisture reaching the steel.
This test will guard against inadvertent use of such coatings.
TEST #8:
Certain pertroleum derivatives react with polyethylene or polypropylene, changing its physical
properties to the point where they are no longer usable as sheathing materials. This test is required
to preclude the use of coatings with such derivatives.
-208-
9 8 7
. . .
. . .
.
. .
.
. .
. .
.
0 0 .
.
. . . .
.
.
6 5 4
t0 .
l . 0 0 . 0 .
. .
0 . a . 0
l
a l 0 l
. 0 .
0
. .
0 l
00 0 l *
l 0
0
. . 0. . . 0
. l .
b
0
0 b a . 00 .
1% 10%
16%
- 209 -
GUIDE SPEClFkATlONS NOTES TO SPECIFIERS
- 210 -
GUIDE SPECIFICATIONS NOTES TO SPECIFIERS
(2) For wedge type anchorages, the fixed end Due to variations in equipment and materials, a
wedges shall be seated, with a load of not tolerance of plus or minus 3 percent is recom-
more than 80% of the minimum ultimate mended on the load for seating fixed end wedges.
tensile strength of the tendon for stress
relieved strand or for low relaxation strand.
The seating load shall be sufficient to ensure
adequate capacity of non-stressing an-
chorages.
-211-
GUIDE SPECItiCATIONS
(2) Stressing rams and gauges shall individually It is preferable to calibrate rams and gauges
be identified and calibrated against known together as a unit. However, gauges may be
standards at intervals not exceeding six calibrated against a master gauge of known
months. Calibration certificates for each accuracy, provided the rams are calibrated,
jack used shall be available upon request. against the same master gauge.
(3) Elongation measurements shall be made at Correlation of calculated and measured elonga-
each stressing location to verify that the tions within a f5% tolerance requires that the
tendon force has been properly achieved. elongation calculations be based on the correct
Measured elongations shall agree with modulus of elasticity and area of steel of the
calculated elongations within +5%. Discrep- tendon or tendons under consideration. Further,
ancies exceeding f5% shall be resolved the friction and wobble coefficients used are
with the designer/engineer of record. average valuesand may very slightly from project
to project. Variations in calculated and measured
elongation values in excess of 5% should be
evaluated from the standpoint of the number of
tendons involved and thestructural significance
of the variation. Excess elongation resulting
from a friction coefficient smaller than that
assumed in calculations is usually not astructur-
al problem.
- 212 -
NOTES TO SPECIFIERS
(2) Stressing pockets shall be filled with non It is recommended that stressing pockets be
shrink mortar as soon as practical after filled within 15 days after removal of the stres-
tendon stressing and cutting. Under no sing tails. Earlier filling of stressing pockets is
circumstances shall the grout or mortar desirable when practical.
used for pocket filling contain chlorides or
other chemicals known to be deleterious to
the prestressing steel.
For tendons used in corrosive environments,
the exposed strand and wedge areas shall
be coated with tendon coating material
comparable to that used over the length of
the tendon and a watertight cap shall be
applied over the coated area. Prior to instal-
ling the pocket mortar, the inside concrete
surfaces of the pocket shall be coated or
sprayed with a resin bonding agent.
- 213 -
3.3 RECOMMENDED PRACTICE FOR GROUTING
of POST-TENSIONED PRESTRESSED CONCRETE
3.3.1 General
3.3.1 .l. Scope and purpose.
(1) These recommendations cover the grouting These procedures also apply to grouting of rock
of post-tensioning tendons of prestressed and soil anchors. However, since the hardened
concrete members. grout in rock and soil anchor applications sus-
(2) The purpose of grouting is to provide perm- tains the fullpost-tensioning force, more detailed
anent protection to the post-tensioning steel consideration must be given to grout strength
and to develop bond between the prestres- and injection procedures.
sing steel and the surroundng concrete.
- 214 -
GUIDE SPECIFICATIONS NOTES TO SPECIFIERS
3.3.2 Materials
(1) Portland Cement - Portland cement should Normally, Type III cement is only used for cold
conform to one of the following: Specifi- weather grouting. Trial mixes are necessary to
cations for portland cement -ASTM C150, determine an appropriate mix design using Type
Type I, II or Ill. III cement.
Cement used for grouting should be fresh
and should not contain any lumps or other
indication of hydration or pack set.
(2) Water-The water used in the grout should Known harmful substances are chlorides,
be potable, clean and free of injurious florides, sulphites and nitrates.
quantities of substances known to be harm-
ful to portland cement, or prestressing steel.
(3) Admixtures - Admixtures, if used, should Admixtures common/y used to provide ex-
impart the properties of low water content, pansion of the grout may also reduce the water
good flowability, minimum bleed, and ex- requirement, or improve flowability at a given
pansion if desired. Its formulation should water content, and retard set. Such admixtures
contain no chemicals in quantities that may are often used. However, research on basically
have harmful effect on the prestressing steel horizontal tendons in semi-rigid ducts indicates
or cement. Admixtures containing chlorides that satisfactory grout quality may be achieved
(as CL in excess of 0.5% by weight of without admixtures.
admixture, assuming 1 pound of admixture Current international standards suggest that
per sack of cement), florides, sulphites and bleeding may be measured in a metal or glass
nitrates should not be used. cylinder with an internal diameter of approx-
Aluminum powder of the proper fineness imately 4 inches, with a height of grout of
and quantity or other approved gas evolving approximately 4 inches. However, recent re-
material which is well dispersed through the search in the United States indicates that more
other admixture may be used to obtain 5% to representative test results may be achieved
10% unrestrained expansion of the grout. using a grout specimen of approximately 20 inch
All admixtures should be used in accordance height and 1 l/4 inch diameter. During the test,
with the instructions of the manufacturer. the container should be covered to prevent
evaporation. It is suggested that the following
approximate limits on bleeding be used to
evaluate the acceptability of the grout: 2% of the
volume 3 hours after mixing; a maximum of 4%.
In addition, the separated water should be
absorbed after 24 hours.
3.3.3 Ducts
(1) Forming - (a) Formed Ducts - Ducts Materials commonly used for formed ducts are
formed by sheath left in place should be of a 22 to 28 guage galvanized or bright spirally
type that would not permit the entrance of wound or longitudinally seamed steel strip with
cement paste. They should transfer bond flexible or semi-rigid seams.
stresses as required and should retain
shape under the weight of the concrete.
Metallic sheaths should be of a ferrous
metal, and they may be galvanized.
(b) Cored Ducts - Cored ducts should be
formed with no constrictions which would
tend to block the passage of grout. All
coring material should be removed.
(2) Grout Openings or Vents - All ducts
should have grout openings at both ends.
- 275 -
GUIDE SPECfFICATIONS NOTES TO SPECIFIERS
For draped cables all high points should Research indicates that high point grout vents
have a grout vent except where cable curva- may be eliminated for bridge tendons up to 400
ture is small, such as in continuous slabs. ft. long in semi-rigid conduit.
Grout vents or drain holes should be pro- Material used for grout vents or drain holes may
vided at low points if the tendon is to be be either plastic or ferrous metal.
placed, stressed and grouted in a freezing Grout vent details for rock and soil anchors
climate. All grout openings or vents should require special considerations particular to the
include provisions for preventing grout application.
leakage.
(3) Duct Size - For tendons made up of a
plurality of wires, bars, or strands, duct area
should be at least twice the net area of the
prestressing steel.
For tendons made up of a single wire, bar or
strand, the duct diameter should be at least
l/4 inch larger than the nominal diameter of
the wire, bar or strand.
(4) Placement of Ducts - After placing of There are two methods of placing tendons. First,
ducts, reinforcement and forming is com- preassembled tendons may be placed as a unit
plete, an inspection should be made to prior to placing concrete. Second, bearing p/a tes
locate possible duct damage. Ducts should and duct sheathing may be insjaIled prior to
be securely fastened at close enough in- placing the concrete, and then after concreting,
tervals to avoid displacement during con- theprestressing steeland anchorages are instal-
creting. led. Ties for pre-placed tendons must be ad-
All holes or openings in the duct must be equate to support the tendon weight. When only
repaired prior to concrete placing. the duct is placed prior to concreting, ties must
resist bouyancy forces.
Grout openings and vents must be securely
anchored to the duct and to either the forms
or to reinforcing steel to prevent displace-
ment during concrete placing operations.
3.3.4 Equipment
(1) The grouting equipment should include a It is suggested that standby water flushing equip-
mixer capable of continuous mechanical ment should be available where difficult grout-
mixing which will produce a grout free of ing conditions exist. This equipment should be
lumps and undispersed cement. The equip- in addition to the grouting equipment. The
ment should be able to pump the mixed standby water flushing equipment should utilize
grout in a manner which will comply with all a different power source than the grouting equip-
provisions of this recommended practice. ment, have sufficient capacity to flush out any
(2) Accessory equipment which will provide for partially grouted enclosures if necessary due to
accurate solid and liquid measures should blockage or breakdown of grouting equipment,
be provided to batch all materials. and should be capable of developing a pressure
of at least 300 psig.
(3) The pump should be a positive displace-
ment type and be able to produce an outlet
pressure of at least 150 psig. The pump
should have seals adequate to prevent intro-
duction of oil, air or other foreign substance
into the grout, and to prevent loss of grout or
water.
(4) A pressure gauge having a full scale reading
of no greater than 300 psi should be placed
- 216 -
GUIDE SPECIFICATIONS NOTES TO SPECIFIERS
-2217-
GUIDE SPECIFICATIONS NOTES TO SPECIFIERS
3.3.6 Grouting
3.3.6.1 Preparation of the duct. Historically, flushing has been used to clear the
(1) Flushing of metal ducts should be optional duct of foreign materials, and to wet the duct and
with the post-tensioning contractor. tendon surfaces to improve the groutability.
When tendons are flushed, the water may be
removed by oil-free air, or it may be displaced by
the grout. In recent years, grouting experiences
with semi-rigid conduit and prestressing steel
placed after concreting indicate that f/using is
not necessary and may be undesirable for large
tendons since it is difficult to remo,ve the water
from the duct.
(2) Ducts with concrete walls (cored ducts)
should be flushed to ensure that the con-
crete is thoroughly wetted.
(3) Water used for flushing ducts may contain
slack lime (calcium hydroxide) or quick-
lime (calcium oxide) in the amount of 0.1
pounds per gallon.
- 218 -
GUIDE SPECIFICATIONS NOTES TO SPECIFIERS
- 219 -
3.3.8 METHOD OF TEST FOR FLOW OF
GROUT MIXTURES (Flow-Cone Method)
CRD-C 79-58 (Issued Sept. 1, 1958)
Scope
1. This method of test covers the procedure to (b) Stop Watch. - A stop watch having a
be used both in the laboratory and in the least reading of not more than 0.2 sec.
field for determining the flow of grout mix-
tures by measuring the time of efflux of a Calibration of Apparatus
specified volume of grout from a standard-
3 . The flow cone shall be firmly mounted in
ized flow cone.
such a manner that the top will be level and
the cone free from vibration. The discharge
Apparatus tube shall be closed by placing the finger
2. (a) Flow Cone. - The flow cone shall con- over the lower end. A quantity of water equal
form to the dimensions and other require- to 1725f 1 ml shall be introduced into the
ments indicated in Fig. 3.3.8.7. cone. The point gage shall be adjusted to
indicate the level of the water surface.
7 t%- -
Sample
3-1116 DIAM
3
POINT GAGE. 4. The test sample shall consist of 1725f 1 ml
TACK WELD of grout.
IN PLACE
Procedure
5. Moisten the inside surface of the flow cone
(See note below). Place the finger over the
outlet of the discharge tube. Introduce
l/4 grout into the cone until the grout surface
v MORTAR LEVEL V rises into contact with the point gage. Start
the stop watch and remove the finger
simultaneously. Stop the stop watch at the
first break in the continuous flow of grout
VOLUME OF MORTAR
from the discharge tube. The time indicated
by the stop watch is the time of efflux of the
grout. At least two tests shall be made for
any grout mixtures.
Note: A recommended procedure for insuring that the interior of the
cone is properly wetted is to fill the cone with water and, one
minute before beginning to add the grout sample. allow the water
to drain from the cone.
- 220 -
3.4 ASTM SPECIFICATIONS Amencan Associatton State
Highway and Transwrtatlon Officials Standard
3.4.1 ASTM A421 - 80 AASHTO No M 204
Reprinted, with permission, from the Annual Book of ASTM Standards, Copyright ASTM,
1916 Race St., Philadelphia, PA 19103
This specification has been approved for use 6~ agencies o/ /he Department o/ Defense for li.sring in the DOD Index oJ
Spec$cations and Standards. . -
- 227 -
A 421
- 222 -
A 421
SUPPLEMENT
I. LOW-RELAXATION WIRE
- 223 -
4ib A421
The American Society for Testing and Marerials rakes no position respecring rhe valid+, of an! parenr rights asserted in
connecrion with any irem mentioned in this srandard. Users of rhis standard are express!v advised rhar dererminarion of the validif,
of any such parent rights, and rhe risk of infringement of such righrs. are entire& their own responsibilir,:
This standard is subject I O revision at an! rime b! rhe responsible technical commirree and must be reviewed evervji\~eC,:earc
and if nor revised. either reapproved or withdrawn. Your comments are invired eirherfor revision ojthis standard orjbr addrrronal
standards and should be addressed to ASTM Headquarters. Your commenis will receive care/u1 consideration at a meering ojrhe
responsible technical commirree. which you may attend. If.,,ou/eel rhar .vour commenls have not received a/air hearing .VOU should
make your views known IO the ASTM Comm.irree on Standards. 1916 Race St. Philadelphia. Pa. 19103. which will schedule a
furthe; hearing regarding -your comments. Failing sarisfaction there. vou ma-, appeal I O the ASTM Board oJ Direcrors.
-224-
3.4.2 ASTM A416 - 80
Reprinted, with permission, from the Annual Book of ASTM Standards, Copyright ASTM,
1916 Race St., Philadelphia, PA 19103
This spmtfication has been approved for use by agencies of the Department of Defense and for listing on the DOD Index qf
Specijiations and Standards.
1. Scope
1.1 This specification covers two grades of wire type having a center wire enclosed tightly
seven-wire, uncoated, stress-relieved steel strand by six helically placed outer wires with a uniform
for use in pretensioned and post-tensioped pre- pitch of not less than 12 and not more than 16
stressed concrete construction. Grade 250 and times the nominal diameter of the strand.
Grade 270 have minimum ultimate strengths of
strengths of 250 000 psi ( 1725 MPa) and 270 000 4. Ordering Information
psi (1860 MPa), respectively, based on the nom- 4. I Orders for seven-wire stress relieved strand
inal area of the strand. under this specification shall include the follow-
1.2 Supplement I describes low-relaxation ing information:
strand and relaxation testing for that product. 4.1. I Quantity (feet),
Low relaxation strand shall not be furnished 4.1.2 Diameter of strand,
unless ordered, or by arrangement between pur- 4.1.3 Grade of strand,
chaser and supplier. 4.1.4 Packaging,
1.3 The values stated in inch-pound units are 4.1.5 ASTM designation and year of issue,
to be regarded as the standard. and
4.1.6 Special requirements, if any.
2. AppIicabIe Documents NOTE I-A typical ordering description is as fol-
2.1 ASTM Standards: lows: 84 OW A, % in., Grade 270 strand, in I2 000. ft
A 370 Methods and Definitions for Mechani- spool-less packs to ASTM A 416 - XX.
cal Testing of Steel Products2
5. Materials and Manufacture
E 328 Recommended Practice for Stress-Re-3
laxation Tests for Materials and Structures 5.1 Base Metal-The base metal shall be car-
2.2 Military Standards: bon steel of such quality that when drawn to
MIL-STD- 129 Marking for Shipment and suitable round wire sizes and fabricated into
Storage strand sizes, and stress relieved after stranding, it
MIL-STD- 163 Steel Mill Products Preparation
for Shipment and Storage This specification is under the jurisdiction of ASTM Com-
23 Federal Standard: mittee A-l on Steel, Stainless Steel and Related Alloys, and is
the direct responsibility of Subcommittee A0 I .05 on Steel Re-
Fed. Std. No. 123 Marking for Shipments inforcement.
(Civil Agencies) Current edition approved March 28, 1980. Published May
1980. Oriainallv oublished as A 416 - 57 T. Last previous edi-
3. Description of Term Specific to this Standard tionA4li-741.
zAnnual Book of ASTM Standards. Vol. 0 I .04.
3. I strand-all strand shall be of the seven- Annual Book of ASTM Standards. Vol. 03.0 I.
Available from Naval Publications and Forms Center, 580 I
Tabor Ave., Philadelphia, PA 4 9 120.
- 225 -
411, A 416
shall have the properties and characteristics pre- 6.3.2 Specimens that break outside of the ex-
scribed in this specification. tensometer or in the jaws and yet meet the min-
5.2 Wire-The wire from which the strand is imum specified values, are considered as meeting
to be fabricated shall have a common dry-drawn the elongation requirements of this specification.
finish. 6.3.3 If the minimum elongation requirement
5.3 Stress Relieving-After stranding, all is met prior to initial rupture, it is not nece&ary
strand shall be subjected to a stress-relieving con- to determine the final elongation value.
tinuous heat treatment to produce the prescribed 6.4 If any sample breaking within the grips or
mechanical properties. Temper colors which may the jaws of the testing machine results in values
result from the stress-relieving operation are con- below the specified limits for breaking strength,
sidered normal for the finished appearance of yield strength, or elongation, the results shall be
this strand. considered invalid and retesting shall be required.
6. Physical Requirements 7. Dimensions and Permissible Variations
6.1 Breaking * Strength-The breaking 7.1 The size of the finished strand shall be
strength of the finished strand shall conform to expressed as the nominal diameter of the strand
the requirements prescribed in Table 1, and shall in fractions or decimal fractions of an inch.
be determined as prescribed in Supplement VII 7.2 The diameter of the center wire of any
of Methods and Definitions A 370. strand must be larger than the diameter of any
6.2 Yield Strength-The minimum yield outer wire in accordance with Table 3.
strength, as prescribed in Table 2, as measured 7.3 Permissible Variations in Diameter:
by the 1 % extension under load method, shall 7.3.1 All Grade 250 strand shall conform to a
not be less than 85 % of the specified minimum size tolerance of kO.016 in. (kO.4 1 mm) from
breaking strength. the nominal diameter measured across the
6.2.1 The extension under load shall be mea- crowns of the wires.
sured by an extensometer calibrated with the 7.3.2 All Grade 270 strand shall conform to a
smallest division not larger than 0.000 1 in./in. of size tolerance of +0.026 in. -0.006 in. (+0.66
gage length. -0.15 mm) from the nominal diameter mea-
6.2.2 The initial load indicated in Table 2 sured across the crowns of the wire.
shall be applied to the specimen, at which time 7.3.3 Variation in cross-sectional area and in
the extensometer is attached and adjusted to a unit stress resulting therefrom shall not be cause
reading of 0.001 in./in. of gage length. The load for rejection provided the diameter differences of
shall then be increased until the extensometer the individual wires and the diameters of the
indicates an extension of 1 %. The load for this strand are within the tolerances specified.
extension shall be recorded and shall meet the 7.4 Specially dimensioned stress-relieved
requirements prescribed in Table 2. strand with nominal diameters up to 0.750 in.
6.3 Elongation: ( 19.05 mm) may be employed, providing that
6.3.1 The total elongation, under load, of the the breaking strength is defined, and the yield
strand shall be not less than 3.5 % and shall be strength, as defined in 6.2, is not less than 85 %
measured in a gage length of not less than 24 in. of the specified minimum breaking strength. All
or 610 mm. The elongation shall be determined other requirements shall apply.
by an extensometer which is placed on the test
specimen after an initial load has been applied. 8. Workmanship
The initial load is equivalent to 10 % of the 8.1 Joints:
required minimum breaking strength as pre- 8.1.1 There shall be no strand joints or strand
scribed in Table 2. Following an extension of splices in any length of the completed strand
1.0 %, the extensometer may be removed and unless specifically permitted by the purchaser.
loading continued to ultimate failure. The elon- 8.1.2 During the process of manufacture of
gation value is then determined by the movement the individual wires for stranding, welding is
between the jaws gripping the material on the permitted only prior to or at the size of the last
new base length of jaw-to-jaw distance to which heat treatment (patenting).
will be added the value of 1.0 % determined by 8.1.3 During fabrication of the strand, butt-
the extensometer. welded joints may be made in the individual
- 226 -
A 416
wires, provided there is not more than one such fere unnecessarily with the operation of the
joint in any 150~ft (45-m) section of the com- works.
pleted strand.
NOTE 2-When specifically ordered as WeIdles+
12. Rejection
Grade, a product free of welds shall be fbmished. 12.1 In case there is a reasonable doubt in the
When this grade is specified, no welds or joints are first trial as to the ability of the strand to meet
permitted except as detailed in 8.1.2.
any requirement of this specification, two addi-
8.2 The finished strand shall be uniform in tional tests shall be made on samples of strand
diameter and shall be free of imperfections not from the same coil or reel, and if failure occurs
consistent with good commercial stranding prac- in either of these tests, the strand shall be rejected.
tice.
8.3 When the strand is cut without seizings, 13. Certification
the wire shall not fly out of position. If a wire, or 13.1 If outside inspection is waived, a manu-
wires, flies out of position and can be replaced facturers certification that the material has been
by hand, the strand will be considered satisfac- tested in accordance with, and meets the require-
tory. ments of, this specification shall be the basis of
8.4 The strand shall not be oiled or greased. acceptance of the material.
Slight rusting, provided it is not sufficient to 13.2 The manufacturer shall, when requested
cause pits visible to the naked eye, shall not be in the order, furnish a representative load-elon-
cause for rejection. gation curve for each size and grade of strand
shipped.
9. Sampling
14. Packaging and Marking
9.1 One specimen for test shall be taken from
each 20-ton (18-M& production lot of finished 14.1 The strand shall be furnished on reels or
strand. Test specimens shall be cut from the in compact coils having a minimum core diam-
outside end of reels or either end of coils or eter of 24 in. (610 mm), unless otherwise speci-
reelless packs. Any specimen found to contain a fied by the purchaser. Lengths on reels, in coils,
wire joint should be discarded and a new speci- or in reelless packs shall be as agreed upon at the
men obtained. time of purchase. The strand shall be well pro-
tected against mechanical injury in shipping as
10. Test Methods agreed upon at the time of purchase. Each reel,
coil, or reelless pack shall have a strong tag
10. I The test specimens as selected in 9. I shall securely fastened to it showing the length, size,
be tested by the method prescribed in Supple- grade, ASTM designation A 416, and the name
ment VII of Methods and Definitions A 370.
or mark of the manufacturer.
14.2 Low-relaxation strand produced meeting
I I. Inspection the requirements of Supplement I must be spe-
1 I. 1 The purchaser shall state at the time of cially identified.
order whether inspection by the purchaser at the 14.3 For Governmenl Procurement Only-
plant is required or waived. If purchaser inspec- When specified in the contract or order, and for
tion is required, the manufacturer shall afford direct procurement by or direct shipment to the
the inspector representing the purchaser all rea- U.S. government, material shall be preserved,
sonable facilities to satisfy him that the material packaged, and packed in accordance with the
is being furnished in accordance with this speci- requirements of MIL-STD- 163. The applicable
. fication. All tests and inspections shall be made levels shall be as specified in the contract. Mark-
at the place of manufacture prior to shipment, ing for shipment of such material shall be ac-
unless otherwise agreed upon at the time of pur- cordance with Fed. Std. No. 123 for civil agencies
chase, and shall be so conducted as not to inter- and MIL-STD- 129 for military agencies.
- 227 -
Nominal Diameter Nominal Steel Nominal We&b1
of strand Break@ strcngtb AmaofS~ in?
of Strand, IK (LN) ofst=da?
in. mm (mm3 lb/l000 fi (k8/lOOO m).
Glde250
% (0.250) 6.35 9 ooo (40.0) 0.036 (23.22) 122 (182)
/I6 (0.3 13) 7.94 14 500 (64.5) 0.058 (37.42) 197 (294)
I6 (0.375) 9.53 20 000 (89.0) 0.080 (51.61) 272 (405)
116 (0.438) II.11 27 000 (120.1) 0. IO8 (69.68) 367 ow
12 (0.500) 12.70 36 ooo (160.1) 0. I44 (92.90) 490 (730)
mw 15.24 54 ooo (240.2) 0.216 (139.35) 737 (1094)
Grade 270
h (0.375) 9.53 23 000 (102.3) 0.085 (54.84) 290 (432)
/I6 (0.438) II.11 31 000 (137.9) 0.1 I5 (74.19) 390 (582)
12 (0.500) 12.70 41 300 (183.7) 0.153 (98.71) 520 (775)
~0.600~ 15.24 58 600 (260.7) 0.217 (140.00) 740 (I 102)
TABLE 2 Yidd!!i@qthRc+emds
Nominal Diameter of Strand Minimum Load at I W Extco-
Initial Lord, IK(kN)
in. mm sion, lK(kN)
-250
% (0.250) 6.35 900 (4.0) 7 650 (34.0)
116 (0.3 13) 7.94 I 450 (6.5) I2 300 (54.7)
H (0.375) 9.53 2 000 (8.9) I7 000 (75.6)
716 (0.438) II.11 2 700 (12.0) 23 000 (102.3)
12 (0.500) 12.70 3 600 (16.0) 30 600 (136.2)
ww 15.24 5 400 (24.0) 45 900 (204.2)
Gra&i 270
Jh (0.375) 9.53 2 300 (10.2) I9 550 (87.0)
116 (0.438) II.11 3 100 (13.8) 26 350 (117.2)
12 (0.500) 12.70 4 I30 (18.4) 35 100 (156.1)
i mm 15.24 5 860 (26.1) 49 800 (221.5)
I
I! TABLE 3 DhmeterRchthBetucu--d-W-
Minimum Diffennce Between Center Wii DiamcW
Nominal Diameter of Strands andDiamerofanyoutawii
in. mm in. mm
Grade250
/4 (0.250) 6.35 0.001 0.0254
%6 (0.3 13) 7.94 0.0015 0.043 I
% (0.375) 9.53 0.002 0.0508
/I6 (0.438) II.11 0.0025 0.0685
Ih (0.500) 12.70 0.003 0.0762
I mm 15.24 0.004 0.1016
Gmde 270
% (0.375) 9.53 0.002 0.0508
%6 (0.438) II.11 0.0025 0.0685
/I (0.500) 12.70 0.003 0.0762
o-J.fjw 15.24 0.004 0.1016
I - 228 -
4lb A416
SUPPLEMENT
1. LOW-RELAXATION STRAND
Sl. scope scribed in 6.2, shall not be less than 90 % ofthe specified
S I. I This supplement delineates only those details minimum breaking strength of the strand.
that are peculiar to low-relaxation strand, and to the 5%. Conditions of Relaxation Test
methods of relaxation testing related to seven-wire
strand having properties generally as described in Spec- S6.1 If required, relaxation evidence shall be pro-
ification A 416. vided from the manufacturers records of tests on sim-
ilarly dimensioned strand of the same grade.
S2. Appliible Document S6.2 The temperature ofthe test piece shall be main-
S2.1 ASTM Standard: tained at 68 + 3.5F (20 + 2C).
E 328 Recommended Practice for Stress-Relaxation S6.3 The test piece shall not be subjected to loading
Tests for Materials and Structutes3 prior to the relaxation test.
S6.4 The initial load shall be applied uniformly over
s3. Test Method a period of not less than 3 min and not more than 5
S3.1 Low-relaxation strand shall be tested as pre- min, and the gage length shall be maintained constant;
scribed in Recommended Practice E 328. load relaxation readings shall commence I min alter
application of the total load.
!34. Relaxatioo Properties S6.5 Over-stressing of the test sample during the
S4.1 Low-relaxation strand shall meet the physical loading operation shall not be permitted.
requirements of this specification, with the added re- S6.6 The duration of the test shall be 1000 h or a
quirement that the relaxation loss after 1000 h under shorter computed period extrapolated to 1000 h which
the conditions of S5 shall be not more than 2.5 % when can be shown by records to provide similar relaxation
initially loaded to 70 % of specified minimum breaking values.
strength, or not more than 3.5 % when loaded to 80 % S6.7 The test gage length shall be at least 60 times
of specified minimum breaking strength of the strand. the nominal diameter. If this gage length exceeds the
capacity of the extensometer or testing machine, then
SS. Yield Strength a minimum gage length of 40 times the nominal di-
S5.1 Yield strength of low-relaxation strand, as de- ameter may be substituted.
The American Society for Testing and Materials takes no position respecting the validity of any patent rights asserted in connection
with any item mentioned in this standard. Users of this standard are expressly advised that determination of the validity of any such
patent rights, and the risk of infringement of such rights, are entirely their own responsibility.
This standard is subject to revision at any time by the responsible technical committee and must be reviewed everyfive years and
revised. either reapproved or withdrawn. Your comments are invited either for revision of this standard or for additional
i/not
starwards and should be addressed to ASTM Headauarters. Your comments will receive careful consideration at a meeting of the
responsible technical committee. which you may attend. If you feel that pntr comments have not received a fair hearing you- should
make your views known to the ASTM Committee on Standards. 1916 Race St., Philadelphia. Pa. 19103.
- 229 -
3.4.3 ASTM A722 - 75 (Regpproved 1981)
Reprinted, with permission, from the Annual Book of ASTM Standards, Copyright ASTM.
1916 Race St., Philadelphia, PA 19103
- 230 -
A 722
of each cast or heat. The percentages of from each heat of steel. Whenever one bar
carbon, manganese, phosphorus, sulfur, and size rolled from any one heat exceeds 100
all alloying elements shall be determined. tons (90 Mg), three tension specimens shall
5.1. I Choice and use of chemical composi- be tested. The specimen shall be randomly
tion and alloying elements, to produce the selected following the final processing opera-
mechanical properties of the finished bar pre- tion.
scribed in 6.2, shall be made by the manufac- 6.5 Retests:
turer, subject to the limitations in 5.1.2. 6.5.1 If any tensile property of any tension
5.1.2 On cast or heat analysis, phosphorus test specimen is less than that specified, and
and sulfur shall not exceed the following: any part of the fracture is outside the middle
Phosphorus 0.040 96 third of the gage length, as indicated by scribe
sulfur 0.050 % scratches marked on the specimen before test-
ing, a retest shall be allowed.
5.2 A product analysis may be made by the 6.5.2 If the results of an original tension
purchaser from the finished bar representing test fail to meet specified requirements, two
each cast or heat of steel. The phosphorus additional tests shall be made on samples of
and sulfur contents thus determined shall not bar from the same heat and bar size, and if
exceed the limits specified in 5.1.2 by failure occurs in either of these tests, the bar
0.008 %. size from that heat shall be rejected.
5.3 Method E 30 shall be used for referee 6.5.3 If any test specimen fails because of
purposes. mechanical reasons such as failure of testing
equipment, it may be discarded and another
6. Mechanical Requirements specimen taken.
6.5.4 If any test specimen develops flaws,
6.1 All testing for mechanical properties it may be discarded and another specimen of
shall be performed in accordance with the the same size bar from the same heat substi-
requirements of Methods and Definitions tuted.
A 370.
6.2 Tensile Properties: 7. Requirements for Deformations
6.2.1 Finished bars shall have a minimum
7.1 Material furnished as Type II bar shall
ultimate tensile strength of 150 000 psi (1035
MPa). have deformations spaced uniformly along
6.2.2 The minimum yield strength of Type the length of the bar. The deformations on
I and Type II bars shall be 85 % and 80 %, opposite sides of the bar shall be similar in
respectively, of the minimum ultimate tensile size and shape. The average spacing or dis-
strength of the bars. The yield strength shall tance between deformations on both sides of
be determined by either of the methods de- the bar shall not exceed seven tenths of the
scribed in Methods and Definitions A 370; nominal diameter of the bar.
however, in the extension under load 7.2 The minimum height and minimum
method, the total strain shall be 0.7 %, and in projected area of the deformations shall con-
the offset method the offset shall be 0.2 %. form to the requirements shown in Table 3.
6.2.3 The minimum elongation after rup-
ture, in a gage length equal to 20 bar diame- 8. Measurements of Deformations
ters, shall be 4.0%. 8.1 The average spacing of deformations
6.3 Test Specimens-Tension tests shall shall be determined by dividing a measured
be made using full-size bar test specimens. length of the bar specimen by the number of
Machined reduced section test specimens are individual deformations and fractional parts
not permitted. All unit stress determinations of deformations on any one side of the bar
shall be based on the nominal area shown in specimen. A measured length of the bar speci-
Table 1 or the effective area shown in Table men shall be considered the distance from a
2. point on a deformation to a corresponding
6.4 Number of Tests-Two tensile speci- point on any other deformation on the same
mens shall be tested from each bar size rolled side of the bar. .
t
- 231 -
8.2 The average height of deformations sorted by size and each bundle or lift shall be
shall be determined from measurements properly tagged with metal tags showing heat
made on not less than two typical deforma- number, size, specification number (ASTM
tions. Determinations shall be based on three A 722) and the name of the finished-bar manu-
measurements per deformation: one at the facturer in order to assure proper identifica-
center of the overall length, and the other two tion. The tags shall display the following state-
at the quarter points of the overall length. ment: High-Strength Prestressing Bars. In
8.3 To indicate adequately the conformity addition, both ends of each bar shall be
to the dimensional requirements, measure- painted yellow.
ments shall be taken at random from one bar 11.32 When specified in the contract or pur-
from each 30 tons (27 Mg) of each lot or chase order, bars shall be marked in accordance
fraction thereof. with Practices A 700.
8.4 Insufficient height, insufficient pro-
jected area, or excessive spacing of deforma- 12. Inspection
tions shall not constitute cause for rejection 12.1 The inspector representing the pur-
unless it has been clearly established by deter- chaser shall have free entry, at all times while
minations on each lot that typical deforma- work on the contract of the purchaser is being
tion height or spacing does not conform to the performed, to all parts of the manufacturers
minimum requirements prescribed in Section works that concern the manufacture of the
7. No rejection may be made on the basis of material ordered. The manufacturer shall af-
measurements if fewer than ten adjacent de- ford the inspector all reasonable facilities to
formations on each side of the bar are meas- satisfy him that the material is being fur-
ured. nished in accordance with this specification.
NOTE 3-The term lot means all bars of the All tests (except product analysis) and inspec-
same nominal weight per linear foot contained in an tion, shall be made at the place of manufac-
individual shipping release or shipping order. ture prior to shipment, unless otherwise speci-
fied, and shall be so conducted as not to
9. Permissible Variation in Size or Weight
interfere unnecessarily with the operation of
9.1 For Type I bars, the permissible varia- the works.
tion from the nominal diameter specified in 12.2 If specified in the purchase order, the
Table 1 shall not exceed +0.030, -0.010 in. purchaser may reserve the right to perform
(+0.76,-0.25 mm). any of the inspection set forth in the specifica-
9.2 For Type II bars, the permissible varia- tion where such inspections are deemed nec-
tion from the nominal weight specified in Ta- essary to assure that the material furnished
ble 2 shall not exceed +3 %, -2 %. conforms to prescribed requirements.
10. Finish 12.3 If outside inspection is waived, the
finished-bar manufacturers certification that
10.1 The bars shall be free of defects inju-
the material has been tested in accordance
rious to the mechanical properties and shall
with, and meets the requirements of, this
have a workmanlike finish.
specification, shall be the basis of acceptance
11. Delivery of the material.
11.1 Unless otherwise specified in the con-
13. Rejection
tract or purchase order, bars shall be packed
for delivery in accordance with the finished- 13.1 Unless otherwise specified, any rejec-
bar manufacturers standard commercial tion based on tests made in accordance with
practice. 5.2 shall be reported to the manufacturer
11.2 When specified in the contract or pur- within 5 working days from the receipt of
chase order, bars shall be packed in accordance samples by the purchaser.
with Practices A 700. 13.2 Material that shows injurious defects
11.3 Marking: subsequent to its acceptance at the manufac-
11.3.1 Unless otherwise specified in the turers works will be rejected, and the manu-
contract or purchase order, bars shall be facturer shall be notified.
- 232 -
14. Rehearing is reported to the manufacturer. In case of
dissatisfaction with the results of the tests,
14.1 Samples tested in accordance with 5.2 the manufacturer may make claim for a re-
that represent rejected material shall be pre- hearing within that time.
served for two weeks from the date rejection
SUPPLEMENTARY REQUIREMENTS
The following supplementary requirements shall app!y only when specified in the purchase
order or contract. Supplementary requirements shall in no way negate any requirements of the
specification itself.
TABLE 1 Dimensions for Type I (Plain) Bar TABLE 2 Dimensions for Type II (Deformed) Jhr
- 233 -
TABLE 3 Lkformatloa Dimendons for Type II Bar
Deformation Dimensions
Nominal Diameter
Maximum Average Minimum Average Minimum Projected
Spacing Height Areaa
in. mm in. mm in. mm in.*/in. mmzlmm
Sla 15 0.437 11.10 0.028 0.71 0.094 2.41
I4 20 0.525 13.34 0.038 0.96 0.130 3.40
1 26 0.700 17.78 0.050 1.27 0.168 4.39
1 I4 32 0.887 22.52 0.064 1.62 0.212 5.40
1 la 36 0.987 25.07 0.071 1.80 0.233 6.08
51a I5 d=6t
I4 20 d=6t
1 26 d=6t
1 I4 32 d=&
l'la 36 d=&
The American Society for Testing ond Moteriols tokes no position respecting the validity of any potent rights asserted in
connection with any item mentioned in this standard. Users of this standard are expressly odvised that determination of the validity
of any such patent rights, and the risk of infringement of such rights, are entirely their own responsibility.
This stondard is subject to revision ot ony time by the responsible technical committee ond must be reviewed everyfive years
and if not revised, either reapproved or withdrown. Your comments ore invited eitherfor revision of this standard orfor additional
standords and should be oddressed to ASTM Heodquarters. Your comments will receive careful considerotion at a meeting of the
responsible technical committee, which you may attend. If you feel that your comments have not received o fair hearing you should
make your views known to the ASTM Committee on Standards, 1916 Race St., Philadelphia, PO . 19103.
-234-
il
Chapter 4
Recommendations
for
Prestressed Rock
and Soil Anchors
RECOMMENDATIONS COMMENTARY
4.1 SCOPE
These recommendations have been prepared to
provide guidance in the application of permanent
and temporary prestressed rock and soil anchors
utilizing high strength prestressing steel. They
represent the present state of the art and outline
what are considered the most practical pro-
cedures for installation of prestressed rock and
soil anchors.
4.2 DEFINITIONS
Anchor: A system used to transfer tensile loads
to soil or rock. It includes all prestressing steel,
anchorages, grout, coatings, sheathings and
couplers if used.
Permanent Anchor: Any prestressed rock or soil A permanent anchor has to fulfill its function for
anchor for permanent use. Generally more than an extended period of time, sometimes through-
an 18-month service life. out the service life of the structure, and thus
requires special design and supervision.
Temporary Anchor: Any prestressed rock or soil Temporary anchors installed in corrosive en-
anchor for temporary use. Generally less than an vironments may require special corrosion pro-
18-month service life. tection.
Downward Sloped Anchor: Any prestressed
anchor which is placed at a slope greater than 5
degrees [0.087 rad] above the horizontal.
Upward Sloped Anchor: Any prestressed anchor
which is placed at a slope greater than 5 degrees
[0.087 rad] above the horizontal.
Horizontal Anchor: Any prestressed anchor
which is placed at a slope between f5 degrees
[0.087 rad] with the horizontal.
Tendon: The complete anchor assembly (ex-
cluding grout) consisting of stressing anchorage
and prestressing steel with sheathing and
coating when required.
Stressing Anchorage: The means by which the
prestressing force is permanently transmitted
from the anchor tendon to the supported
structure.
Coupling: The means by which the prestressing
force may be transmitted from one partial-length
of prestressing tendon to another.
Sheathing: Enclosure around the prestressing
steel to avoid temporary or permanent bond
between the prestressing steel and the sur-
rounding grout and/or to provide corrosion
protection.
- 236 -
RECOMMENDATIONS COMMENTARY
- 237 -
RECOMMENDATIONS . COMMENTARY
4.3.1 Description
- 238 -
GROUT TUBE
. 0 * -. .. 0.
. . . .. . . . .*.
. . . . . . . ?. .* : *...?.
* .*
STRESSING ANCHORAGE
81 BEARING PLATE
PRESTRESSING S T E E L
t-
SECONDARY GROUT
(OPTIONAL)
GROUT
- 239 -
RECOMMENDATIONS COMMENTARY
4.3.2 Design
Rock anchors can be easily installed in down-
ward positions. Horizontal and upward sloping
anchors requirespecialized grouting techniques.
- 240 -
RECOMMENDATIONS COMMENTARY
- 241 -
RECOMMENDATIONS COMMENTARY
Typical Ultimate Bond Stresses for Rock The typical values shown in this table are not
Anchors intended for final design. Working bond stresses
should be established on a project-by-project
Ultimate Bond basis after review of geologic data and rock
Stress Between cores.
Sound Rock and
Anchor Grout
4.3.3 Fabrication
4.3.3.1 Materials
Anchor material shall be in accordance with PTI
Guide Specification for Post-Tensioning Mater-
ials.
Anchor material shall consist of either single or
multiple elements of the following:
a) Wires conforming to ASTM Designation
A421, Uncoated Stress-Relieved Wire for
Prestressed Concrete.
- 242 -
RECOMMENDATIONS COMMENTARY
b) Strand conforming to ASTM Designation The use of low relaxation strand is recommended
A416, Uncoated Seven-Wire Stress Re- because of its lower long-term losses.
lieved Strand for Prestressed Concrete or
ASTM Designation A779 Uncoated Seven
Wire Compacted Stress Relieved Strand for
Prestressed Concrete.
c) Steel bars conforming to ASTM Designation
A-722, Uncoated High-Strength Steel Bars
for Prestressed Concrete.
- 243 -
RECOMMENDATIONS
Tendons shall be handled and protected prior to Damage like abrasion, kinks, welds and weld
installation in such a manner as to avoid splatters, cuts, nicks, will impair the proper
corrosion and physical damage thereto. performance of the tendon and should be cause
for rejection.
4.3.4 Drilling
Holes for anchors should be drilled where Core drilling, rotary drilling, or percussion
specified and within the tolerances specified by driling may be employed to drill the anchor hole.
the engineer. The diameter of the drill bit should Core drilling is generally slow and expensive.
not be less than l/8 inch [0.32 cm] smaller than
The hole diameter is a function of the grout to
the specified diameter.
rock bond stresses, the diameter of the tendon,
the corrosion protection, and the drilling equip-
ment.
Drilling tolerances are controlled by the size of
the drill steel or rods, weight of the drill rig, the
method of drilling, and the nature of the
overburden and rock. Drill holes normally can be
started within an angle tolerance of 1 to 3
degrees [0.017 - 0.052 rad] from their planned
orientation. A deviation of 1 to 2 inches in 10 feet
[25mm to 51mm in 3.05 m] can be maintained
with normal drilling methods.
4.3.5 Watertightness
The holes for some or all permanent rock Holes are water-pressure tested and consolida-
anchors may be tested for watertightness, if tion grouted in order to limit grout loss, and to
specified by the engineer. When specified, the insure proper anchoring of the tendon and
entire hole in rock shall be tested for watertight- corrosion protection. Consolidation grout usual-
ness by filling it with water and subjecting it to a ly has a water/cement ratio of between 0.45 and
- 244 -
RECOMMENDATIONS COMMENTARY
pressure of Spsi [0.034 MPa] in excess of the 0.55. It is normal practice to redrill a consolida-
hydrostatic head, as measured at the top of the tion grouted hole after the grout has had 24
hole. If the free length portion of the hole is in hours to set up.
fractured rock or soil, a packer or casing must be
Payment for consolidation grouting, redrilling
used to allow the bond length to be water-
and testing should be based on unit prices since
pressure tested. If the leakage rate from the hole,
these quantities are unpredictable. Typical pay-
over a period of ten minutes, exceeds 0.001
ment units should be: water tests (each); cement
gallons per inch diameter per foot of depth [0.49 (94 lb. [42.6kg] bags); redrilling (lin. ft.) [ml.
ml/mm/m] per minute, the hole should be
consolidation grouted, redrilled and retested.
Should the second watertightness test fail, the
entire process should be repeated.
Temporary rock anchor holes need not be
water-pressure tested, since the anchor capacity
is verified during testing and corrosion generally
presents no problem during the life of the
anchor.
Holes adjacent to a hole being tested for
watertightness shall be observed during the
tests so that inter-hole connections may be
detected and sealed.
If artesian or flowing water is encountered in the Some anchor grouting techniques allow the
drill hole, pressure will have to be maintained on grout to be placed under high pressure. If the
the consolidation grout until the grout has anchor grout pressure is 25psi [0.17 MPa] or
initially set. higher than the hydrostatic head at the top of the
drill hole, water-pressure tests or consolidation
grouting may not be necessary since the hole is
sealed during grouting of the anchor.
The tendons shall be placed in accordance with Grout tubes may be checked with water or
approved details or the recommendations of the compressed air to insure that they are clear.
tendon manufacturer or specialist anchor con-
tractor.
Anchor tendons should not be subjected to
unintentional sharp bends. Care must be taken
to prevent bending of tendons installed through
soil which is likely to settle.
Centralizers should be used with permanent Centralizersare normally provided at a maximum
anchors to insure that the tendon does not of 10 ft. [3.05m] center to center throughout the
contact the wall of the drill hole. bond length.
If multi-element tendons are used without a
fixed anchorage at the lower end, provisions
should be made for adequate spacing of the
tendon elements to achieve proper grout cov-
erage.
Care shall be taken not to damage the corrosion Any damage of the corrosion protection shall be
protective sheathing and/or centralizers during repaired following the tendon manufacturers
installation of the anchor tendon. directions.
- 245 -
RECOMMENDATIONS . COMMENTARY
When unsheathed permanent tendons are used, The process of checking the level of the primary
primary and secondary grouting of the drill hole grout is expensive. Water flushing to the top of
is required. First the primary grout is placed. A the primary grout is a satisfactory method of
means for determining the level of the primary determining the level of the primary grout.
grout must be provided. After the anchor force
has been locked-off, the secondary grout shall Sheathed tendons which are grouted over their
be injected and the free length grouted. entire length at once provide a better and more
economical anchor than anchors where the
grout is injected in two stages. When stage
grouting is performed, a construction joint is
created at the top of the primary grout. This joint
is often surrounded by poor quality grout and
forms a zone where corrosion can attack the
tendon.
Any void at the top of the free length shall be
filled with grout if the anchor is to be used for a
permanent application.
After grouting, the tendon shall remain undis-
turbed until the grout has cured.
The following data concerning the grouting Strength tests on grout cubes are not normally
operation shall be recorded and kept on file by necessary since the grout is tested as the anchors
the owner: are tested. The engineer may require grout
Type of mixer strength tests if an admixture is used or if the
Water/cement ratio conditions warrant.
Types of additives (if any)
Grout pressure
Type of cement
Strength Test Samples (if any)
Vo!ume of first and second stage grout.
- 246 -
RECOMMENDATIONS COMMENTARY
Each rock anchor shall be tested. The maximum Anchor testing is normally carried out seven
test load shall not exceed 80 percent of the days after grouting for Type I or Type II cements
guaranteed ultimate tensile strength (GUTS) of and three days after grouting for Type III
the tendon. The test load shall be simultaneously cements. At these times, grout with a water/
applied to the entire anchor tendon. cement ratio of 0.45 will have a compressive
strength of about 3500 psi [24.13 MPa].
The percentage of additional anchors perform-
ance tested is generally in the range of 1 to 2
percent. The number of performance tests run
may be increased, especially when the anchors
are being used for permanent applications, when
creep susceptability is suspected, or when
varying ground conditions are encountered, but
normally will not exceed 5 percent of the total
number of anchors.
The performance test shall be made by incre- The performance test is used to determine
mentally loading and unloading the anchor in whether the anchor has sufficient load carrying
accordance,with the following schedule. At each capacity, that the free length has actually been
increment, the movement of the tendon shall be established, and the residual movement (per-
recorded to the nearest .OOl inches [0.0025 cm] manent set) of the anchor.
with respect to an independent fixed reference
point if possible. The anchor load shall be
measured with a pressure guage calibrated with
the jack and accurate enough to read 100 psi
(690 KPa) changes in pressure. The pump shall
be capable of applying each load increment in
less than 60 seconds.
A calibrated mastergage shall be kept on the site
to periodically check the test gauge.
Movement measurements shall be taken at the The load is not decreased to zero after each
Alignment Load and at each load increment. increment of load. A nominal alignment load of
between 2 and 10 percent of the design load is
The increments of load shall be: maintained in order to keep the testing equip-
(P = Design load for the anchor;) ment aligned. The magnitude of this alignment
(AL = Alignment load) load depends on the type of tendon and the
length of the tendon.
-247-
RECOMMENDATIONS COMMENTARY
Total Residual
Load Movement Movement
AL LOAD
.25 P St1
AL Srl
.25 P
so P St2
AL Sr2
.25 P
.50 P
.75 P St3 iij
AL Sr3 EU-J Sr = RESIDUAL MOVEMENT
.25 P w Sel = ELASTIC MOVEMENT
.50 P F AL = ALIGNMENT LOAD
St = TOTAL MOVEMENT n
.75 P
1.00 P St4
AL Sr4
25 P
.50 P
1.00 P
1.20 P S t5
AL Sr5
.25 P
.50 P
1.00 P
1.20 P
1.33 P St6 Testload
St, Readings during
load hold
Adjust to lock-off load
The anchor tendon may be completely unloaded A plot of a performance test is shown above. The
prior to lock-off, if circumstances warrant. Final upper graph shows the total anchor movement
stressing then does not require further move- as a function of load. The lower graph shows the
ment readings. residual movement of the anchor as a function of
load. The residual movement (permanent set) of
The load shall be held at each increment just
the anchor is the non-elastic or unrecoverable
long enough to obtain the movement reading.
movement of the anchor which is measured
Except for the reading of the residual movement
when the load is released after each loading
at AL, no movement readings need to be taken
during unloading of the anchor. increment.
The hydraulic jacks used to test anchors may
The test load shall be held or 10 minutes. Total
require repumping while holding the test load.
movements with respect to a fixed reference
The repumping will compensate for small move-
point shall be recorded at 1 minute, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6
ments or minor hydraulic oil seepage. Care must
and 10 minutes. If the total movement between 1
be exercised not to exceed the test load. Also
minute and 10 minutes exceeds 0.04 in. (lmm),
any changes in the test load due to temperature
the test load shall be held for an additional 50
minutes. Total movements shall be recorded at variations during the load hold period must be
15 minutes, 20, 25, 30, 45 and 60 minutes. The corrected.
Load Hold timeshall start when the pump begins
to load the anchor from the 1.2OP load to the test
load.
- 248 -
The maximum load for performance testing may An increase in the maximum performance test
be increased to 1.5OP for special project load above 1.33P, may result in increased
conditions. tendon steel area and hole diameter and, there-
fore increased cost.
The magnitude of the lock-off load should not The maximum load for the performance test
exceed 70 percent of the guaranteed ultimate verifies the load holding performance of the
strength of the tendon. anchor. The design load includes the engineers
factor of safety; the maximum test load is not a
part of the factor of safety. When all production
anchors are load tested, maximum test loads of
1.33 x design load, give satisfactory results.
The proof test shall be performed by incre- The proof test is a fast, economical test which,
mentally loading the anchor in accordance with when used in conjunction with performance
the following schedule. At each increment, the tests, can verify anchor capacity and preload the
movement ofthe tendon shall be recorded to the tendon.
nearest .OOl inches [.0025 cm] with respect to an
independent fixed reference point if possible.
The anchor load shall be measured with a
pressure gage calibrated with the jack and
accurate enough to read 100 psi (69 KPa)
changes in pressure. The pump shall be capable
of applying each load increment in less than
60 seconds. The increments of load shall be: A typical plot of a proof test is shown below. The
plot shows anchor movement as a function of
(P = Design load for the anchor)
load.
(AL = Alignment load)
Proof Test Proof Test Results
AL
.25 P
.50 P
.75 P
1.00 P
1.20 P
- 249 -
RECOMMENDATIONS COMMENTARY
Anchors installed in certain geologic formations Creep testing of anchors in all but the most
may exhibit plastic or cohesive behavior. When decomposed rock formations seldom yields any
performance or proof tests indicate that the rock useful information.
is sensitive to creep, the rock anchor shall be
creep tested as set forth by Section 4.5.5.3 of
these Recommendations.
Lift-Off Test:
Lift-off tests may be specified by the engineer. The lift-off tests, if required, are usually done on
The stressing anchorages shall be capable of a random basis and only on permanent rock
lift-off in order to check the anchor load. Allow- anchors. The engineer should select those
antes shall be made for time dependent losses anchors for which lift-off tests are to be made.
when comparing the lift-off with the previous Lift-off tests can be madea minimum of 24 hours
lock-off load indicated by the initial lift-off after the transfer foad has been faded-oHin fire
reading. anchor. Lift-off tests are normally performed
- 250 -
RECOMMENDATIONS COMMENTARY
After an anchor has been accepted by the In general, cutting is done with abrasive blades
engineer the portion of the anchor tendon or a quick acetylene torch cut. When future lift-
protruding beyond the stressing anchorage may off tests are planned, an adequate length of
be cut, if not otherwise required. Cutting has to tendon must be left protruding over the anchor-
be done according to the tendon manufacturers age to permit jacking.
recommendations and as approved by the
engineer. Care shall be taken not to damage the
tendon anchorage.
The engineer shall investigate the anchor test If the first anchors installed fail during testing, it
results and determine whether the anchor is will be necessary to modify the design or construc-
acceptable. An anchor shall be acceptable if: tion procedures. These modifications may in-
clude reducing theanchordesign load by increas-
1. Thetotal elastic movement obtained from ing the number of anchors, increasing the bond
a performance test should exceed 80 length, changing the anchor type, or modifying
percent of the theoretical elastic elong- the installation techniques. The engineer and
ation of the stressing length and be less the anchor contractor should work closely
than the theoretical elastic elongation of together in order to determine the most suitable
the stressing length plus 50 percent of modifications.
the bond length.
2. The total movement obtained from a The total elastic movement obtained from a
proof test, measured between 50 percent performance test may exceed the recommended
of the design load and the test load upper limit if the upper portion of the bond
should exceed 80 percent of the theor- length is in weak rock or soil.
etical elastic elongation of the free stress-
ing length for this respective load range.
3. The creep rate does not exceed 0.080
inches (2.0 mm)/log cycle during the
final log cycle of the performance test,
proof test and/or creep test regardless of
tendon length and load.
4. The initial lift-off reading shows an
anchor load within 5 percent of the speci-
fied lock-off load.
5. The lift-off test shows an anchor load
within ten percent of the specified trans-
fer load.
-257 -
RECOMMENDATIONS . COMMENTARY
The long term performance of permanent an- Load monitoring devices, or load cells, have
chors can be monitored by using load cells and become more reliable in recent years and are
extensometers. When properly used, these in- being used more frequently for long-term
stuments can offer the engineer assurance that monitoring of anchor loads. It is desirable that a
the anchors are performing as intended during percentage of the anchors installed in special
their service life. circumstances be equipped with some form of
load monitoring device.
Monitored anchors must remain unbonded in
the free stressing length. Specifications may
require the load in the anchor tendon to be
adjustable at a later time.
4.3.10 Records
4.4.1 Description
- 252 -
RECOMMENDATIONS
Gel Time: Is controlled by the anount and kind of The Specifier as well as the Contractor should
catalyst contained in the cartridge and can consult with the resin manufacturer about actual
range between less than 1 minute to 30 minutes expected gel and cure times under the specific
and more. Resin can be classified as: job conditions for each type of cartridge. A 95 F
[35C] temperature can cut gel times in half and
fast setting: 1 minute or less
a 45F [7.2C] temperature may quadruple
medium setting: 5 to 10 minutes standard gel times (72 F) [22.2 C]. For extreme
slow setting: 15 to 30 minutes conditions such as temperatures below 45F
or more [7.2C], the resin manufacturer should be
consulted for special cartridges made to fit the
These numbers are based on a 72 [22.2C]
requirements.
temperature. Warmer temperature will speed up
gel time and cooler conditions will lower them.
The gel time also depends on the rotational
mixing speed.
- 253 -
RECOMMENDATIONS . COMMENTARY
Physical Properties: Resins vary with the For detailed information, the resin manufacturer
manufacturer. Typical properties of the cured should be consulted. Normally, the physical
resin are: properties of the resin do not influence the resin
anchor design, as the compressive and shear
Compressive strength: 12000 to 18000 psi
strength of the rock will be the governing factors.
[82.7 to 124.1 MPa]
Tensile strength: 3000 to 6000 psi
. [20.7 to 41.4 MPa]
Shear strength: 2500 to 5000 psi
[ 17.2 to 34.4 MPa]
Viscosity: Resin cartridges are available in Special job conditions may require a resin with
different viscosities. Viscosity of the resin also non-standard viscosity. For easier installation of
depends highly on temperature. Viscosity is long fully encapsulated anchors or for low
reduced by increased temperatures. temperature conditions, the use of a low viscosity
resin may be of advantage. To prevent flowout of
resin from overhead anchors, a high viscosity
resin may be used.
Shelf Life: The shelf life of the resin is stated by Depending on the manufacturer and type of
the manufacturer with each shipment. Expired cartridge, the shelf life normally ranges from 6
resin cartridges shall not be used unless proper months to 1 year.
performance has been established. The car-
tridges should be stored in a dry, cool ventilated
placeawayfrom direct sunlight. Extreme temper-
atures and overstacking should be avoided.
Selection of the resin cartridge diameter shall be The volume of resin in the cartridges shall be
based on the manufacturers suggested relation such that the resin will flow towards the drill hole
between drill hole and bar diameter. For best opening during the installation of the bartendon.
results, the difference between the hole diameter
and bar should be kept to a minimum.
- 254 -
RECOMMENDATIONS COMMENTARY
Prestressed resin anchors may either have a For resin anchors with a fully encapsulated
resin point anchorage with resin only in the bond length exceeding 20 ft. [6.1 m], installation may
length or may be fully encapsulated. In the latter become difficult. In such case the resin manu-
case, slow setting resin cartridges are placed facturer should be contacted.
after the fast setting ones. The anchor tendon
must be prestressed after the fast setting resin
has cured but before the slow setting resin can
cure. This timing is critical to insure load transfer
to the bond length only. Fully encapsulated resin
anchors are used when the anchor tendon shall
be bonded also in the free stressing length
and/or for corrosion protection in the free
stressing length.
Corrosion Protection: During installation the This applies for anchors with full encapsulation.
anchor tendon is coated with the polyester resin
which provides a good protection against cor-
rosion. For permanent anchors the protection by
the resin alone may not be sufficient. Further
details on corrosion protection are given in
Section 4.6 Corrosion Protection.
4.4.4 Installation
4.4.4.1 Drilling
Holes shall be drilled to the specified depth, In most cases, checking of the diameter on the
angle and diameter using rotary or rotary first three holes for any rock formation on a
percussiveequipment. Drill holesshall beclean- project will be sufficient.
ed of cuttings and debris by air or water. The
diameter of the hole shall be checked with a
gauge for compliance with the specifications.
- 255 -
RECOMMENDATIONS COMMENTARY
4.4.4.4 Stressing
Stressing shall not start before the resin in the
bond length has acquired the specified design
strength and shall be finished before any slow
setting resin used in thefreestressing length has
solidified. Stressing and testing shall be accom-
plished with hydraulic rams following the
applicable portion of the guide lines given in
Section 4.3.7 Anchor Testing and Stressing.
Adequate support shall be provided for the
stressing ram to avoid tilting and introducing
bending into the anchor tendon. Test load and
lock-off load shall be according to the project
specifications.
- 256 -
GROUT TUBE
GROUT
BULB
Figure
Figure 4.2
4.2- -
Pressure
Pressuregrouted
grouted soil anchor
soilanchor
GROUT TUBE (IF REQUIRED)
SECONDARY GROU
PRESTRESSING
STRESSING ANCHORAGE
& BEARING PLATE
PRIMARY GROUT
FIXED ANCHORAGE
I
/
SECONDARY GROUT
AND/OR SHEATHING \
PRESTRESSING STEEL /
STRESSING ANCHORAGE
& BEARING PLATE
I-
PRIMARY G
Combination
Pressure of Friction 81 Post
Friction Bulb Underream Pressure Bulb Groutina
Drilled Casing
Cohesive NA C C C
Non-Cohesive C NA C P
Driven Casing
Cohesive NA NA NA C
Non-Cohesive C NA C P
Conventional Auger
Cohesive C NA C C
Non-Cohesive P xx P *** NA C **
- 260 -
COMMENTARY
- 261 -
RECOMMENDATIONS. COMMENTARY
- 262 -
RECOMMENDATIONS COMMENTARY
Minimum bond lengths of 15 ft. [4.6 m] are Normally, the bond length for soil anchors is in
recommended for all types of soil. In general, the range of 20 to 30 ft. (6 - 9m).
cohesive soils will require longer bond lengths
than cohesionless soils.
The existing theoretical and empirical methods Field testing is the only reliable method of
for predicting anchor capacity should only be assuring that the design load can be safely
used for preliminary design estimate purposes. carried by the anchor.
Final anchor capacity shall be verified by field
testing each anchor.
A Cohesive Soils
1. Straight Shaft: The bond length can be The value of T,., is sometimes expressed as a
estimated by the following equation: function (typically 0.3 to 0.5) of the undrained
shear strength of thesoil. Alternatively and more
P commonly, an empirical value of 700 to 1400 psf
Lb = [0.035 to 0.069 MPa] is used as a working stress
lr . d l Tw
for shaft friction (T,,,) in medium stiff to very stiff
cohesive soils.
Where: Post grouting can increase thecarrying capacity
Lb = bond length by 20 to 50 percent or more.
P = anchor design load Tested values for soil anchors constructed in the
d = diameter of the drill hole U.S. have varied considerably. The following
TV4 = working shaft friction between
the soil and the grout table is a summary of some of the maximum
loads achieved.
- 263 -
RECOMMENDATIONS . COMMENTARY
- 264 -
RECOMMENDATIONS COMMENTARY
4.5.3 Fabrication
The recommendations g.iven in Section 4.3.3
Rock Anchors - Fabrication also apply for Soil
Anchors.
Soil Anchors should always be sheathed in the
free stressing length to prevent contact of the
anchor tendon with the drill hole wall.
4.5.4.1 General
The engineer shall identify special site condi-
tions which may influence choice and method of
equipment.
Drilling may be by any appropriate method and
equipment the specialist foundation contractor
chooses for the particular soil or anchor method.
However, the overburden should be cased when
there is danger of subsidence around existing
structures. Alignment tolerances of 2 to 3 de-
grees [O.O35to 0.052 rad] for angle of inclination
are recommended. Any significant change in
method of drilling will require repeating of per-
formance and acceptance testing.
The provisions given in Section 4.3.6 Insertion
and Anchor Grouting for rock anchors also
apply for Soil Anchors.
- 265 -
RECOMMENDATIONS COMMENTARY
After the hole is drilled, a string of flush jointed The quantities of grout used and the size of the
casing clean of debris is in place for the full pressure bulb vary depending on drilling meth-
depth of the hole. The casing is first tremied full od and permeability of the soil. In general, a
of neat cement grout and the tendon is then drilled open end casing will take more grout
inserted through the grout to the bottom of the and result in a larger pressure bulb than a driven
hole. Alternatively, the tendon may be placed closed end casing. (Typical grout takes l/2 to 1
into the open casing with a grout tremie tube bag per foot vs. l/4 to l/2 bag per foot. Typical
attached and grouted full by meansof this tremie diameter 8 to 18 vs. 4 to 8) [Typical grout
tube. After grout filling is complete, the casing is takes 1.64 to 3.28 bags per m vs. 0.82 to 1.64 bags
capped and additional grout is pumped into the per m. Typical diameter 203mm to 457mm vs.
casing. This additional grout is forced out the 102mm to 203mm]. However, load carrying
bottom of the casing into the surrounding soil. characteristics of the two types of anchor have
When the grout pressure rises to the required proven to be very similar.
level, withdrawal of the casing is begun. The
Typical grouting pressures vary from 60 to 350
entire bond length of the anchor is pressure
psi [0.41 to 2.41 MPa]. Large amounts of grout in
grouted while the casing is withdrawn. After the
horizontally stratified soil may cause heaving
casing is pulled up to the bottom of the stressing
problems. In these conditions grout pressures
length, pressure grouting is discontinued. The
may have to be held to 2 psi/ft. [0.045 MPa/m] of
casing may be kept topped-off and the stressing
overburden pressure or the quantity of the
length gravity grouted for corrosion protection.
pumped grout must be limited.
Only sheathed anchor tendons may be grouted
in the free stressing length prior to stressing.
- 266 -
4.5.4.4 Augered or Open-Hole Rotary Drilling
Open hole rotary and auger drilling, sometimes
with belling at the bottom of the anchor, are
employed in cohesive soils only. Hole sizes may
range from 6 to 24 inches [152 to 610mm] or
more in diameter. The diameter of the bell is
generally about twice the diameter of the hole.
Auger Drilled - Friction type Anchors (Fig. 4.3)
are installed using either continuous flight
augers or short augers on a Kelly Bar type of
machine. These anchors differ from those drilled
in cohesionless soil only in placement. The
auger is withdrawn before grouting, and pres-
sure grouting is not used.
Belled Type Anchors (Fig. 4.4) are drilled either
by a Kelly Bar type machine using augers and a
standard caisson belling bucket or the drilled
casing method which employs a small air or
mechanically activated underreamer. The cut- .
tings are removed by air or water flushing.
After the hole is drilled to final depth, the tendon Centralizers should be used to keep the tendon
is placed in the hole and grout or concrete is in the approximate center of the hole.
placed in the hole by gravity. If the hole is full of
drill fluid or water, grout is tremied from the
bottom of the hole until the bond length is
completely grouted. The stressing length is
either grouted or, for temporary anchors only,
backfilled with soil.
- 267 -
RECOMMENDATIONS . COMMENTARY
CREEP TEST
Load Observation Period
(min)
For For
Tempory Permanent
Anchors Anchors
AL
.25 P 10
.50 P 10 30
.75 P 15 30
1.00 P 30 45
1.20 P 30 60 The family of creep curves are plotted for each
1.33 P 100 300 increment of load creep as a function of the log
(base 10) of time in minutes. The creep rate is the
The times for reading the total movement during slope of the creep curve over the final time
an observation period shall be 1 minute, 2,3,4,5, decade of the observation period.
6, 10, 15, 20, 25, 30,45,60,75,90, 100, 120, 150,
180, 210, 240, 270, 300 minutes. The hydraulic jacks used to test anchors may
require repumping during the creep test. The
repumping will compensate for small move-
ments or minor hydraulic oil seepage. Care must
be exercised not to exceed the test load.
- 268 -
RECOMMENDATIONS
- 269 -
RECOMMENDATIONS COMMENTARY
4.5.8 Records
The provisions given in Section 4.3.10 Records
for rock anchors also apply for soil anchors.
- 270 -
RECOMMENDATIONS COMMENTARY I
Corrosion protection begins with the storage, A light coating of rust on the anchor tendon is
fabrication, and handling of the tendon com- normal and will not affect the ability of the
ponents prior to insertion in the bore hole. anchor to perform its function. Heavy corrosion
Proper care is required to avoid prolonged or pitting should be cause for rejection of the
exposure to the elements, and to avoid mech- anchor tendon.
anical or physical damage which would reduce
or impair the future ability of the components to
resist any adverse conditions encountered dur-
ing their service life.
The time the tendon is left ungrouted in the hole
and the conditions which will exist within the
hole until the tendon is grouted must also be
evaluated to determine if corrosion preventive
measures are necessary during this phase.
4.6.2 Materials
Prestressed rock and soil anchors shall be pro-
tected against corrosion using materials and
procedures suitable for the intended service life.
The following materials may be used inde-
pendently or in various combinations to suit the
application:
a) Portland Cement grout
b) Plastic pipe or tubing
c) Steel pipe or tubing Thick wall steel pipe may be used for corrosion
protection, but only in combination with other
d) Greases specially compounded for post-
protective measurements.
tensioning
e) Epoxies: Polyesters
Galvanizing of any anchor tendon component or Both methods are not considered to provide a
cathodic protection is not recommended. reliable long term corrosion protection.
The properties of any corrosion protection
material shall not be detrimental to the pre-
stressing steel and shall prevent the intrusion
of corrosive environments. Coating materials
shall also have the following properties:
a) Stable against deoiling In the absence of specific temperature require-
ments, the usual range is 0 F [-20 C] to 160 F
b) Free from cracks and not brittle or fluid over [70 C].
the entire anticipated range of tempera-
tures;
c) Chemically stable for the life of the tendon;
d) Nonreactive with thesurrounding materials
such as concrete, tendons, or sheathing;
e) Corrosion-inhibiting; high-wetting proper-
ties;
f) Impervious to moisture.
- 271 -
RECOMMENDATIONS . COMMENTARY
- 272 -
Expansive additives should not be used.
- 273 -
RECOMMENDATIONS COMMENTARY
Pipes or trumpets may be welded to the bearing Casing used during the drilling operations may
plate, a seal provided between the anchor and the also be used. A slip joint detail between the casing
sheath, and the entire void should be pumped full and the sheath may be incorporated to prevent
of corrosion inhibiting grease, mastic or grout. outflow of the grease or mastic.
In some instances, for example in sheet pile walls,
movement of the structure should be expected and
proper details should be provided to eliminate
corrosion in the under-anchorage area.
Temporary anchors usually do not require special
means of corrosion protection. However, some
thought is required as to the aggressiveness of the
elements and the longevity of the temporary
anchor before under-anchorage corrosion protec-
tion schemes are eliminated.
- 274 -
RECOMMENDATIONS COMMENTARY
- 275 -
4.8 SELECTED BIBLIOGRAPHY
Anderson, T.C., Earth-Retention Systems Temporary and
Permanent, Paper presented at the 32nd Annual Soil Mech-
anics and Foundation Conference, Minneapolis, MN, January
24, 1984.
Bureau Securitas. Recommendations Concernant La Concep-
tion, Le Calcul, LExecution et Le Controle des Tirants DAnch-
rage, (Recommendations Concerning the Conception, the Cal-
culation, the Execution and the Control of Ground Anchors)
T.A. 77, Editions Eyrolles, 61, Boulevard Saint-Germain 75005
Paris, 1977.
Bustamante, M., Delmas. F. and Lacour. J., Behavior of
Prestressed Anchors in Plastic Clay, IX lCSMFE, Japan,
Special Session No. 4, Review Francaise Geotechnique, No. 3,
pp. 24-34, 1978.
Cheney. R.S.. Permanent Ground Anchors, FHWA-DP-68-1,
U.S. Department of Transportation, FHWA. Washington, DC,
January, 1984.
Deutsche lndustrie Norm. Verpressanker fur dauernde Ver-
nankerungen (Daueranker) im Lockergestein, (Soil and rock
anchors; permanent soil anchors; analysis structural design
and testing) DIN 4125, Part 2, pp. 1-9, February 1976.
Deutsche lndustrie Norm, Verpressanker fur vorubergehende
Zwecke im Lockergestein (Soil and rock anchors; temproary
soil anchors, analysis, structural design and testing) DIN 4125,
Part 1, pp. 1-9, June 1972.
Federation lnternationale De La Precontrainte. Recommenda-
tions for the Design and Construction of Prestressed Concrete
Ground Anchors, Federation lnternationale De La Precon-
trainte. Wexham Springs, Slough SL3 6PL, United Kingdom,
1982.
Hanna, T.H.. foundations in Tension, Ground Anchors, Trans
Tech Publications, McGraw Hill Book Company, New York,
1982.
Hobst, Leos & Zojic Josef, Anchoring in Rock, Elsevier Scien-
tific Publishing Co.. New York, NY, 1977.
Littlejohn, G.S.. and Bruce, D.A., Rock Anchors, State-of-the-
Art, Foundation Publication Ltd., England, 1977.
Ostermayer. H.. Construction, Carrying Behavior and Creep
Characteristics of Ground Anchors, Proceeding of Diaphragm
Walls and Anchorages Conference, Institute of Civil Engineers,
London, pp. 141-151. 1975.
Post-Tensioning Institute. International Symposium on Pre-
stressed Rock and Soil Anchors, Proceedings of symposium
sponsored by PTI in Chicago, IL, on October 3-4. 1984, Post-
Tensioning Institute. 301 W. Osborn, Suite 3500, Phoenix, AZ,
1984.
Schnabel, Jr.. H. Tiebacks in Foundation Engineering and
Construction, McGraw-Hill Book Company, New York, New
York, 1982.
Swiss Society of Engineers and Architects, Ground Anchors,
SN 531 191. 1977.
Weatherby, D.E., Tiebacks, FHWA/RD-82/047, U.S. Department
of Transportation, FHWA, Washington, DC, July 1982.
- 276 -
Chapter 5
Analysis
and Design
of
Post-Tensioned
Structures
5.1 GENERAL
This chapter applies primarily to post-tension- P, acting at a constant eccentricity. Hence the
ed flexural members used in buildings. However, primary moment in the beam is Pe as shown in
the procedures described may be adapted to Fig. 5.7 (b). This primary moment will cause a
other applicationssuch as bridges, water storage theoretical upward deflection at the center sup-
tanks, foundations and dams. port of Pe1/2EI. The reactions necessary to
retain the beam at its original position are shown
It is usually preferable in post-tensioned in Fig. 5.7 (c). It is important to note that the
design to determine the required prestressing secondary moments are functions of the re-
force and hence the number, size, and profile of actions, and that for this reason the secondary
the tendons for behavior at service loads. The moments always vary linearly between the sup-
ultimate capacity of the section in flexure and ports. Also, note that, for this case, the second-
shear must then be checked at thecritical points. ary moment at the interior support is 150 percent
Determination of both the strength and of the primary moment and of opposite sign. The
serviceability characteristics of indeterminate total moment due to post-tensioning may be
post-tensioned structures depends on elastic expressed as the super-position of the primary
analysis procedures. The serviceability of a and secondary moments as shown in Fig. 5.7 (e).
structure is assessed primarily in terms of
stresses and elastic and long-term deflections.
5.2 ANALYSIS
5.2.1 Primary and Secondary
Moments Due to Post-Tensioning
In simple span post-tensioned beams, as in
A 1 B
l.
,
I C
-I
pretensioned beams, the moments induced by (a)
the post-tensioning are directly proportional to Primary moment j
the eccentricity of the tendons with respect to / 1 -Pe
I I
the neutral axis of the beam. In continuous, or
indeterminate post-tensioned structures, the (b)
moments due to post-tensioning are usually not
directly proportional to the tendon eccentricity.
The difference occurs because the deformations
imposed by post-tensioning are resisted by the
continuous member at the points where it is
continuous with other members in thestructure.
This restraint to post-tensioning deformations (c)
modifies the reactions and hence affects the
elastic moments and shears resulting from the
Secondary moment
post-tensioning. The moments resulting from
the restraints to the prestressing deformations
are usually called secondary moments. This
(d)
term is used because the moments are induced
by the primary post-tensioning moments, Pe,
and not because the secondary moment is Pe
negligible, nor necessarily smaller than the /+Q
.
primary moment. - PeIv
Total moment
Primary and secondary moments, as well as
the total moments due to post-tensioning are (e)
illustrated for a two-span continuous beam in
Fig. 5.7. This beam has a post-tensioning force, Fig. 5.1 - Primary and secondary moments
- 278 -
Secondary post-tensioning moments play a shears are also modified because of the second-
significant role in the design of continuous post- ary post-tensioning moments. This effect is also
tensioned structures because they significantly illustrated in design examples in Sections 5.5.2,
modify calculated stresses and strengths in both 5.5.3 and 5.5.4.
positive and negative moment areas. In most
continuous structures, the secondary moments
have the effect of increasing the magnitude of 5.2.2 Area-Moment Method of Analysis
the positive post-tensioning moments at interior The classical area-moment method of deter-
supports, and of reducing the magnitude of the mining slopes and deflections in beams may be
negative post-tensioning moments between applied to determination of secondary moments
supports. induced by post-tensioning in statically indeter-
Section 18.10.3 of AC/ 318-83 states: minate structures. The theorems of the area-
moment method are outlined in strength of
Moments to be used to compute required materials and structural engineering text books
strength shall be the sum of the moments due to and will not be repeated here. A variation of the
reactions induced by prestressing (with a load area-moment method, the conjugate beam ana-
factor of 1.0) and the moments due to factored logy, is used in the solution of Example 5.5.2.
loads including redistribution as permitted in This discussion will be confined to determin-
Section 18.10.4. ation of the moment effects induced by the post-
Application of this code provision usually re- tensioning tendon. Moments and shears due to
duces very substantially the amount of nonpre- all other loadings may be determined by the
stressed bonded reinforcement required over same procedure or by any other method of
supports of continuous post-tensioned struc- elastic structural analysis.
tures and occasionally requires the use of addi- The three-span beam in Fig. 5.2 will be used to
tional nonprestressed bonded reinforcement in illustrate application of the area-moment pro-
positive moment areas. Calculation of design cedure to calculation of secondary moments in
moments using the secondary post-tensioning indeterminate post-tensioned structures. The
moments as prescribed in Section 78.70.3 ofAC/ beam is post-tensioned by a tendon with a
378-83 is illustrated in the continuous tee beam profile made up of a series of parabolic curves.
design example, Section 5.52, and the flat plate To analyze the structure, the spans are con-
design example, Section 5.5.4. The most sig- sidered to be cut at interior supports and each
nificant effects occur in the tee beam example span is considered as a simple beam on which
where the secondary moments increase the moments, Pe, are imposed due to the post-
design positive moments by about 29 percent, tensioning tendon. As illustrated in Fig. 5.3 (a),
and decrease the magnitude of the design the slope of the end span at the first interior
negative moments by about 37.5 percent at support due to post-tensioning may then be
exterior columns, and by about 23.9 percent at calculated as:
the interior column.
Since the secondary post-tensioning moments
are a result of modified reactions, the design
Post-tensioning tendon
/
- 279 -
The next step in the analysis is to apply a In a similar manner, the rotation due to post-
moment on the end span at B (M SBA, the fixed- tensioning moments are calculated for the
end secondary moment at B) which will rotate interior span and the other end span. For the
the beam back to zero slope. For a two span interior span, moments are imposed at each end
symmetrical structure this moment would be the of the span to rotate the beam back to zero slope
secondary moment due to post-tensioning. as shown in Fig. 5.3 (c). It is then necessary to
However, for structures of three or more spans solve two simultaneous equations to determine
or unsymmetrical structures, it is necessary to values of MSBC and MSCB. After obtaining MsB~,
distribute the fixed-end secondary moments MSCB, and MSCD (the latter in a manner identical
calculated for each span to obtain the final to MSBA), the moment distribution technique
secondary moments. Application of MSBA at B may be used to calculate the final secondary
will result in a triangular moment diagram over moments at the two interior supports.
the end span as shown in Fig. 5.3 (b) and the
After determining the final secondary mo-
rotation at the interior support due to this
ments at supports the secondary moment effect
moment diagram will be:
at any interior span point is readily obtained by
MSBA 11 linear interpolation between the secondary mo-
3 EI ments at supports. For stress calculations, final
moments due to post-tensioning at any point
Equating rotations due to post-tensioning to the may then be calculated as the algebraic sum of
above makes it possible to solve for MSBA in the primary moments, Pe, and the secondary
terms of the moments due to post-tensioning: moments, Ms. For strength calculations the
secondary moments may be considered as
modifications of the factored dead load and live
load moments as described in Section 5.2.7.
Note that in the area-moment procedure de-
M S BA f (IPeAl, x) scribed above, the secondary moments, MS, are
=y
1 calculated in terms of the primary post-tension-
ing moment, Pe.
- 280 -
assumed constant which allows the tendon to be The load exerted by the tendon on the member is
held in equilibrium with the uniform vertical load then equal but opposite this load, or:
as shown in Fig. 5.4 (c). -8P2e1
w, =
The magnitude of the vertical load exerted by l2
the member to hold the tendon in equilibrium Note that the sign convention considers WP to be
may be derived in various ways. Taking one-half positive when it acts downward.
of the tendon as a free body, the forces are as
shown in Fig. 5.4 (d). Summing moments about Summing up the loads exerted by the tendons
support A and solving for the load WP provides: on the simple span beam of Fig. 5.4 (a) provides
the loads shown in Fig. 5.4 (e). Caculating
8P2e equivalent loads is probably not justified for
w, = ~
l2 simple span beams where the moments induced
by the tendons are directly proportional to the
tendon eccentricity. However, for continuous
beams, the use of equivalent loads permits
P2 tan cr analysis for the total moment effects of the post-
i tensioning (combined primary post-tensioning
Psi ,--2
.
- - - ==-SK----
moments, Pe, and secondary post-tensioning
p ,------ AA--.bP 1
moments are obtained by the equivalent load
, t
(a) analysis) by considering a single additional
loading case. To obtain the magnitude of
secondary post-tensioning moments at any
point, it is only necessary to subtract the primary
post-tensioning moment, Pe, from the post-
tensioning moment obtained from theequivalent
loads.
Using the equivalent load procedure, the total
post-tensioning moments at supports may be
lb)
obtained by calculating fixed end moments and
using moment distribution or other methods of
indeterminate structural analysis. After the post-
tensioning moments have been determined at
the supports, post-tensioning moments between
supports may be obtained by superimposing the
simple beam moment diagram due to the post-
tensioning loads on the base line provided by
connecting the total post-tensioning moments
at supports. However, it may be simpler to obtain
interior post-tensioning moments using the ten-
don profile. Using this approach, the interior
moments may be expressed as:
(d)
- P [en+( eB -eA) f
1
where MAe and MBA are the total post-tensioning
moments at two adjacent supports, P is the
tendon force, and eA, eB, and e are the eccentri-
P, J]cPl cities of the tendon at A, B, and x, respectively.
t Eccentricity is taken as negative when it falls
(e) below the c.g.c. and positive above the c.g.c. For
the tendon profile in Fig. 5.5, the moment at x is
Fig. 5.4 - Equivalent load analysis the algebraic sum of the end moments at the
- 281 -
+B -eA) $ (eB - eA) 1
P tan 9 P t/an .9
(a)
2 Centroidal pi
I (MRA - MAR) I
MAB
: (b)
Fig. 5.5 - Interior post-tensioning moments
- 282 -
fessor Lins ACI Journal paper concerning the
determination of the amount of load to be
balanced and the accuracy of the method is
presented below:
Using this concept of load balancing, an
important question arises: what should be the
loading to be balanced by the prestress? The
E+k%J
answer to this question may not be simple. As a
starting point, it is often assumed that the dead
load of the structure or element be completely
balanced by the effective prestress. This would
mean that a slight amount of camber may exist
under the initial prestress. In the course of time,
(b) when all the losses of prestress have taken place,
Fig. 5.7 - Load balancing the structure or element would come back to a
level position.
rupture), it is only necessary to reduce the Although it seems logical to balance all the
amount of post-tensioning provided. The net dead load, such balancing may require too
stress on the section may be calculated from P/A much prestress. Since a certain amount of de-
+ M&/I where M, is the net (unbalanced) bend- flection is always permitted for a nonprestressed
ing moment on the section. For continuous structure under a dead load, it is reasonable to
designs, the tendon geometry would be as- also permit a limited amount of deflection if it
sumed as shown in Fig. 5.7 (b). would not become objectionable. However,
The above example serves to illustrate the there is greater tendency in prestressed struc-
salient features of load-balancing. These are tures to increase their deflections as a result of
that the prestressing force is selected to balance creep and shrinkage. Hence the deflections
or counteract some portion of the load, and that should be limited to a smaller value at the
under the balanced loading conditions thestruc- beginning.
ture will theoretically have no deflection and will When the live load to be carried by the struc-
be subjected only to an axial compressive stress, ture is high compared to its dead load, it may be
P/A, from the tendon. The net moment in the necessary to balance some of the live load as
structure at any point is that resulting from the well as the dead load. One interesting approach
load not balanced by the post-tensioning. This is to balance the dead load plus one half the live
is an extremely powerful concept for visualizing load (DL + 1/2LL). If this is done, the structure
the effect of the post-tensioning on the struc- will besubjected to no bending when one-half of
ture, and it greatly simplifies design calcula- the live load is acting. Then, it is only necessary
tions. Secondary post-tensioning moments can to design for one-half live loading up when no
be readily obtained by subtracting the primary live load exists, and for one-half load acting
moment, Pe, from the moments caused by the down when full live load is on the structure. This
balanced load at any point. Application of the idea of balancing dead load plus one-half live
load-balancing design procedure is illustrated load, while theoretically interesting, could result
by the flat plate design example presented in in excessive camber if the live load consists
Section 5.5.4. essentially of transient load. Furthermore, it may
The load-balancing concept was introduced not result in an economical design.
by Professor T.Y. Lin in a paper Load-Balanc- When attempting to evaluate the amount of
ing Method for Design and Analysis of Pre- live load to be balanced by prestressing, it is
stressed Concrete Structures in the June 1963 necessary to consider the real live load and not
Journal of the American Concrete Institute, the specified design live load. If the specified
Proceedings Vol. 60, No. 6. The concept can be design live load is higher than the actual live
applied to rigid frames, two dimensional struc- load, only a small amount of the live load or even
tures, and to shells and folded plates. Those no live load at all should be balanced. On the
learning to use this method will want to review other hand, if the actual live load could be much
the above referenced article and the additional higher than the design live load, especially if the
references listed in the article. For the con- live loading would be sustained, it would be
venience of the reader, discussion from Pro- desirable to balance a greater portion of the live
- 283
load. Theengineer should exercise his judgment shown that the effect of reverse tendon curva-
when choosing the proper amount of lbading to ture at supports on post-tensioning moments is
be balanced by prestressing. This should be on the order of 5 to 10 percent. Therefore, since
done while keeping in mind the satisfaction of the calculated moments only effect the calcu-
other requirements such as elastic stress limita- lated stresses and not the ultimate capacity, the
tions, crack control, and ultimate strength. load-balancing method is sufficiently accurate
in most cases without consideration of the re-
The load balancing method can be achieved
verse tendon curvature at supports. This is
with considerable accuracy because both the
particularly true for applications such as post-
gravity load and the prestressing force can often
tensioned flat plates, where the generally used
be predicted with precision. However, variations
analysis procedures (which have been demon-
may be encountered so that the actual loading
strated to provide satisfactory structural be-
and the actual prestress may not be as expected.
havior) involve significant approximations rela-
For a relatively stiff member, errors in estimating
tive to the magnitude of peak moments in the
the weight and the prestress will usually be
immediate vicinity of columns.
negligible. For a slender member, even slight
variations may result in considerable errors in The load-balancing procedure is by far the
the estimation of load balancing, and either most convenient design approach for most in-
camber or deflection may result. determinate post-tensioned structures, and is
recommended as the basic design approach for
As is well known, the modulus of elasticity of
most applications.
concrete and the creep characteristics cannot
be predetermined with accuracy. Fortunately,
neither the modulus nor theflexural creep would 52.5 Ultimate Strength Analysis
enter into the picture if the sustained load is The required design capacity in moment and
exactly balanced by the prestressing compon- shear is determined by multiplying elastically
ent. In other words, since there is no transverse determined service load moments and shears by
load on the member, there will be no bending the load factors specified in Section 9.2 of AC/
regardless of the value of the modulus or the 378-83. The moments and shears so obtained
creep coefficient. may be modified for redistribution of moments
Owing to frictional resistance in post-tension- due to inelastic behavior in accordance with the
ing, the prestress and hence its transverse com- provisions of Section 78.70.4 of AC/ 378-83.
ponent may vary along the length of a tendon. Further, the dead and live load factored mo-
For the usual case of low frictional loss, an ments (design moments) are to be modified by
average prestress can be used for computation the secondary moments due to reactions in-
without introducing serious errors. Should the duced by post-tensioning (with a load factor of
1.0) asspecified in Section 78.70.3ofAC/378-83
loss be excessive, its effect must be carefully
computed. and as described above in Section 5.2.7.
- 284 -
\
stances, a number of which are illustrated in the counteracts the additional balanced load. Ac-
applications of post-tensioning described in tually, this is a fortunate circumstance because
Chapter 1. in many applications (such as flat plates) it is
necessary to locate the anchorage hardware
near the neutral axis in order to obtain the
Table 5.1 - Typical span-depth ratios necessary edge distance.
T Continuous
Roof
spans
Floor
T Roof
Simple
spans
Floor
See Section 6.2.2 for further discussion of
tendon installation procedures.
5.3.3 Prestress Losses
One-way solid slabs 50 45 45 40 Since 1954, a value of 25,000 psi has been used
Two-way solid slabs to represent the total loss of prestress, except for
(supported on the effects of friction and anchor set, for normal
columns only) 45-48 40-45 weight concrete members post-tensioned with
Two-way waffle slabs stress relieved steel. The Commentary to the
(36 pans) 40 35 35 30 AC/ 378-83 Building Code Section 18.6 notes:
Beams 35 30 30 26 Lump sum values of prestress losses for both
One-way joists 42 38 38 35 pretensioned and post-tensioned members
which were indicated in previous editions of the
The above ratios may be increased if calculations verify that commentary are considered obsolete. These
deflection, camber, and vibration frequency and amplitude are lump sum loss values were originally proposed
not objectionable. as average values satisfactory for general design
use. This was done with the understanding that
actual loss values may vary above and below the
5.3.2 Type and Placement of Tendons lump sum values with little, if any, significant
effect on the performance of the structure. In
A significant aspect of the design of post-
this regard, afurtherquotefrom thecommentary
tensioned structures relates to providing suf- to AC/ 318-83 Section 78.6 is pertinent:
ficient space for the post-tensioning tendons
and coordinating the location of the tendons Actual losses, greater or smaller than the com-
with the nonprestressed reinforcement, elec- puted values, have little effect on the design
trical and telephone conduit, and other em- strength of the member, but affect service load
bedded items. The available tendon sizes and behavior (deflections, camber, cracking load)
types are described in Chapter 2, which also and connections. At service loads, overestima-
gives dimensions of anchorage hardware and tion of prestress losses can be almost as detri-
the ferrous metal conduit used for grouted mental as underestimation, since the former can
tendons. Capacities of the individual post-ten- result in excessive camber and horizontal
sioning steel elements currently used are pre- movement.
sented in the Appendix.
The basic responsibility for calculating or
For design purposes, tendon profiles are nor- specifying prestress losses for a structure rests
mally considered to be parabolically curved. with the engineering or architectural firm or
Straight line tendon profiles are occasionally agency responsible for the design. In some
used as described in Section 5.2.3. In most cases, concern about the accuracy of the lump
cases, the most economical location for the sum loss values, or lack of better information,
tendon in continuous post-tensioned structures has led to a reluctance on the part of the
is as near the bottom fiber as possible at the designing agency to specify the prestress losses.
points of maximum positive moment, and as However, a great deal of information has been
near the top fiber as possible over interior published to aid the designer in calculating
supports. As can be inferred from the load- losses. In particular, the July-August 1975
balancing concept, the maximum capacity is Journal of the Prestressed Concrete Institute
obtained from agiven tendon by installing it with contains Recommendations for Estimating
the maximum total drape. An exception to this Prestress Losses by the PCI Committee on
occurs in end spans where no additional tendon Prestress Losses, and the June, 1979 issue of
effectiveness or capacity is obtained by anchor- Concrete International includes a paper Esti-
ing the tendons above the neutral axis at exterior mating Prestress Losses which was prepared as
supports. In this case, the cranked-in moment part of the work of: and sponsored by, ACI-
- 285 -
ASCE Committee 423, Prestressed Concrete. Particular attention is invited to the footnote to
The Specifications for Bridges published by the Table 5.2 which suggests applications where
American Association of State Highway and variations above and below the loss values in the
Transportation Officials also contains specifica- tables might be expected.
tions for prestress losses. These sources are
5.3.4 Design for Service Loads
recommended for use by engineers in cases
where more precise calculation of prestress In the design of post-tensioned members, the
losses is considered necessary. response of the total frame must be considered
for the instantaneous prestressing loads applied,
In circumstances where a post-tensioning
as well as for the time-dependent volume
materials fabricator must supply a bid on a job
changes and the applied service loads.
on which the engineer has not specified the
prestress losses, the quantity of tendons, and AC/ 378-83 allows service load flexural tensile
therefore the bid, is a function of the value used stresses up to 12 flfor one-way systems if
for prestress losses. If possible in this case, it is deflections based on transformed cracked sec-
recommended that prestress loss values be tion and bilinear moment-deflection relation-
determined by the post-tensioning materials ships are considered. In view of the approxi-
fabricator in accordance with the procedures in mations involved in the generally used analysis
the references noted above. However, to ac- procedures for two way flat plates, the service
complish this, it is necessary for all post-ten- load tensile stress limitation for ost-tensioned
sioning materials fabricators submitting bids to flat plates is limited to 6 P fZ unless more
have complete design information on the job. In rigorous analysis procedures are used.
many cases, this design information is not gen-
The serviceability behavior and strength of
erally or readily available. For this reason, the
one-way slabs with different tensile stresses at
post-tensioning industry suggests use of the
service load level is indicated by Fig. 5.8. Dimen-
lump sum loss values in Table 5.2 for uniformity
sions and other details of slabs A and B are
in determination of tendon requirements on jobs
shown in Fig. 5.9. Slabs A and B are the proto-
where prestress losses (from all sources except
type designs for model slabs tested at the
friction) have not been specified by the engi-
University of Texas at Austin.** Slab C was
neer. The values presented in Table 5.2 are
designed for a mximum tensile stress of 12 fl
average values for general applications. They
and Slab D was designed for zero tensile stress
were developed through an extensive computer
study utilizing the best available information,
including the latest research on steel relaxation
for various post-tensioning tendon materials.*
_-_-
Low relaxation
270k strand I 15.000 I 20.000 cl -0.5 -1.0 -1.5 -2.0 -2.5 -3.0 -3.5
- 286 -
\-
- 287 -
which are presented in Sections 78.7.2 (a) and Where d = effective depth of all tension rein-
78.7.2 (b) of AC/ 378433. It is important to forcement
recongnize that thedifferent responseof bonded
A,, = area of tendons
and unbonded tendons is fully recognized by the
respective formulas for stress at design loads of dl = effective depth of tendons from com-
AC/ 378-83. While different amounts of post- pressive face
tensioning steel are required for the same flexural
As2 = area of nonprestressed reinforcement
strength for bonded and unbonded members,
both types of tendons satisfy the flexural strength d2 = effective depth of nontensioned rein-
requirements of AC/ 378-83. forcement from compression face
Section 78.9 of AC/ 378-83 represents mini-
mum requirements for bonded reinforcement The distance from the compression face to the
for structures using unbonded tendons. The centroid of the compressive force, da, can be
purpose of this reinforcement is to provide determined by using the equivalent rectangular
control and distribution of cracking at high load stress distribution, 0.85 f;, and equating ultimate
levels. This ensures that the structure will re- steel and concrete forces. For rectangular sec-
spond as a flexural element rather than as a tions, or flanged sections in which the neutral
shallow tied arch. Control of crack widths also axis lies within the flange, the distance to the
contributes to shear capacity because of a re- centerofthecompressiveforcefrom thecompres-
lated reduction of crack depth resulting in a sion face may be expressed as:
greater depth of the concrete section in compres-
sion to resist shear stresses. &.I f,, + As2 f,
ds =
In most cases, the most economical design for 1.7 f2b
flexural strength will utilize the maximum per-
missible tensile stresses for prestressed con- For this case, the ultimate moment capacity
crete, although the tensile stress level may be may be expressed as:
limited by serviceability conditions such as de-
flection and a desire for watertight construction.
Use of higher tensile stresses will reduce the Mu = @(As1 f,, + As2 fy) (d-ds)
amount of post-tensioning reinforcement re-
quired and at the same time, for unbonded
construction, will utilize the flexural capacity For flanged sections in which the netural axis
provided by nonprestressed reinforcement. It falls outside of the flange, the following formula
has been demonstrated by many tests that the is suggested for computation of the ultimate
yield strength of nonprestressed reinforcement moment capacity:
will bedeveloped at the time the unbonded post- Total steel force provided:
tensioning tendons develop their maximum
stress as specified by equations (78-4) and T = &I fps + As2 f,
(78-5) of AC/ 378-83. Force required to develop the overhanging
The location of the resultant steel force for flange:
post-tensioned members with nonprestressed TI = 0.85 f;: (b-b)t
reinforcement should be calculated by taking
moments of the forces about the compression b = effective flange width
face of the cross-section. Use of forces to b = width of web
determine the center of gravity of the steel force
is required because the tendons and nonpre- t = thickness of the flange
stressed reinforcement are operating at different Force required to develop the web:
unit streses. The effective depth then becomes:
T2 = T - T,
&I f,,dl + Asz f,dn The ultimate moment capacity may be expressed
d = as:
&I fps + As2 f,
0.59T2
M = @ Tzd (1 - b,dfZ ) + TI (d-t/2)
- 288 -
5.3.6 Shear Strength where V, is the factored shear force at the
section considered, and V, is the nominal shear
Shear strength calculations for buildings
strength computed by equation (1 l-2):
should be made in accordance with ACI 318-83
with particular reference to Chapters 9 and 77. v, = v, + v,
Shear strength calculations for bridges should
where V, is nominal shear strength provided by
be made in accordance with the provisions of
the concrete, and V, is nominal shear strength
Section 9 of the Standard Specifications for
provided by shear reinforcement.
Highway Bridges published by the American
For shear reinforcement perpendicular to the
Association of State Highway and Transporta-
axis of the member, the value of V, is calculated
tion Officials.
by equation (11-17) of ACI 318-83:
Shear in the concrete in both statically deter-
minant and continuous post-tensioned members A, f,d
v, = ___
S
is significantly affected by the shear carried by
the post-tensioning tendons. This effect is Where A, is the area of shear reinforcement
shown schematically for an interior span of a within a distance s. For inclined stirrups, equa-
continuous post-tensioned member in Fig. 5.70. tion (11-18) of ACI 318-83 may be used to
In statically determinant members without calculate shear strength of the stirrups.
reverse tendon curvature at the supports, the
shear carried by the tendon is transferred back Determination for the value of V, is based on
into the reaction by concentrated vertical forces equations (11-11) and (11-13) of ACI 318-83for
at the anchorages. flexure-shearcracking and web-shearcrack-
ing, respectively. A discussion of these two
equations and the different types of shear crack-
ing is presented in the Commentary to ACI 318-
ililll~lI1Lllll11lllilllllllIIll1 ( a ) LOad 83. As an alternative to use of equations (7 7-7 7)
1 1
fb) Tendon and (7 7-73) for determination of the shear stress
profile carried by the concrete, equation (77-70) was
introduced in the 1971 ACI Building Code.
I Equation (77-70), expressed in terms of shear
r-m4 stress, is shown in Fig. 5.77 with test data of
Itt1iiI rI I! ; ; ; (13 Equivalent
f!lll r!llr!!tl~ load due to prestressed beams failing in shear and contain-
I 0 I
I prestress ing no web reinforcement. The data includes
members with a wide range of prestress and
concrete strength, including several tests where
there was no prestress. The solid points re-
present test results for members with an effective
prestress equal to or greater than 0.4 f&Only two
beams with an effective prestress of more than
0.4 f g failed at a shear stress less than that
A (e) Shear due predicted by equation (7 7-70).
to prestresz
Equation (77-70) is simplified and generally
conservative approximation of equation (7 7-7 7).
The useof equation (7 7-70) is limited to members
having prestress equal to 40 percent of the
tensile strength of all the flexural reinforcement.
(f) Design sheaf
When using this equation V, need not be taken
(4 + (e)
as less than 2 fi b,.,d and shall not be greater
than 5 Jf;: b,d. The lower limit of 2 fi is
Fig. 5.10 - The effect of shear carried by the post-tensioning
tendon on design shear.
greater than the lower limit of 1.7 f: b,d for
equation (7 7-7 7) which has no restriction on the
amount of prestress in the reinforcement. The
Shear design in ACI 318-83 is based on
upper limit of 5 fl b,d serves as a restriction
equation (1 l-l):
on V,,.
vu < @ vn The basic purpose of shear design is to arrive
at members and structures that under severe
- 289 -
I I 1 I I slabs. Severe cracking has been observed in
several instances where no stirrups were pro-
vided. Unintended curvature of the tendons may
be avoided by securely tying tendons to stirrups
which are rigidly held in place by other elements
of the reinforcing cage. For bundles of two to
four tendons, ties to a minimum of No. 3 stirrups
. . at 2 ft. 6 in. centers is suggested, and for bundles
of five or more tendons, ties to a minimum of No.
4 stirrups at 3 ft. 6 in. centers is recommended.
This amount and spacing of stirrups is recom-
mended even when the magnitude of the shear
stress is such that no stirrups are required under
the provisions of Section 7 7.5.5.7 of AC/ 378-83.
In most cases, closer stirrups spacings will be
required to satisfy the shear reinforcement
requirements of AC/ 378-83.
- 290 -
provide the code specified amount of mild steel strains. The behavior of a single given cross
to improve flexural behavior of this narrow zone, section can be modeled by considering it to be a
as tension stresses drop off sharply away from column under an axial load equal to the effective
the support face. Mid-span regions exhibit more prestress and subjected to moment. From equil-
gradual moment gradients than do support ibrium considerations, the crack depth and steel
regions. Thus, a small amount of bonded mild strain can be found by trial and error, and the
steel can be more effective in distribution and transformed section properties calculated. Sec-
control of cracks in positive moment areas. By tions away from peak moments remain un-
contrast, simple span beams post-tensioned cracked and elastic, so deflection behavior can-
with unbonded tendons and containing no not be determined from the properties of a
bonded reinforcement behave after cracking as single section, and the method of Section
tied arches. With increasing load and rotation, 18.4.2(c) of ACI 318-83 underestimates the stiff-
the single initial crack increases in width and ness of continuous members.
progresses toward the compression face until
Results of tests give a better picture of the
finally an abrupt compression failure occurs.
effective stiffness. Fig. 5.12 compares behavior
This effect is eliminated in both slabs and beams
at different load stages for a three-span slab
by providing the amount of conventional bond-
designed for service tensile stresses of 9 fi,
ed reinforcing steel specified by Section 78.9 of
but loaded to stress levels of 12 a. Degradation
ACI 318-83.
of stiffness was maximized by the increased
Cracking due to high tensile stresses reduces cracking due to service overloading. Had the
stiffness, and prediction of deflections can no slab been designed for the higher loads required
longer be based on elastic gross section pro- to produce tensile stresses of 12 n, it would
perties. The bi-linear approach to deflection have contained additional bonded reinforce-
prediction specified by ACI 318-83. Section ment sufficient to provide the corresponding
78.4.2(c) does not adequately describe the be- higher required ultimate capacity. It therefore
havior of continuous members. The bi-linear would have exhibited slightly higher stiffness
approach assumes that the total deflection can due to the effects of higher transformed section
be predicted as the sum of the deflection up to properties. The straight line is a proposed
cracking calculated by elastic means, and an approximation for effective stiffness of con-
additional deflection based on the cracked tinuous rectangular members containing the
section properties. This approach is approx- code specified amount of bonded reinforce-
imately correct for simply supported single span ment. As can be seen, Fig. 5.12 is conservative
members, since the properties of a single section of tensile stresses between 6 fi
dominate the effective stiffness, and a single f2, but somewhat overestimates the
load pattern dictates deflection behavior. how-
ever, for continuous members two or more IO
sections and load patterns affect the behavior.
For most continuous structures, the maximum
moments at a given section must be found by 09
- 291 -
effective stiffness as 12 Jf;:. However, at 12 fi perpendicular to the above (primary) tendons,
loads are higher than the design service load for another set of tendons (secondary) to provide
the test specimen, and it is therefore reasonable an upward load under the downward load.
to expect a loss of stifffness at that particular Remembering that the downward load of the
point for the test slab. primary tendon system occurs over a relatively
narrow width under the reverse curvatures and
5.3.7.2 Shear in One-Way Slabs that the only available exterior reaction, the
Typically, one-way slabs are subjected to low column, is also relatively narrow, it becomes
shear stresses since high concentrated loading obvious that the secondary tendon system
is uncommon. Compared to tee beams, the should be in narrow strips or bands passing over
available shear area is large, and typical slab the columns. There are two ways of accom-
design shear stresses are well below the lower plishing this two-part tendon system to obtain the
bound shear capacity of 2 fispecified by ACI nearly uniform upward load we desire for ease of
318-83. Where high shears are encountered, analysis. Tendons of the primary system could
such as from high concentrated loading near be spaced uniformly in each of two directions and
supports, equation (1 l-10) of ACI 318-83 may be reacted by a secondary system along column
used to more closely reflect available shear grid lines in each direction. This method would fit
capacity. For conditions of high shear due to within preconceived ideas of two-way slabs, as
permanent concentrated loads, it is recom- the secondary tendons are then analogous to
mended that tendons be harped under the load two-way beams, but it would not recognize the full
to maximize the effective depth, d, and the shear potential of the balanced load approach, nor
carried by the tendon. would it be practicable for structures whose
columns are not aligned on rectangular grids, The
second method does recognize the full potential
5.3.8 Flexure and Shear in and, by illustration, aids in the understanding of
Flat Plates
the contribution of the tendons.
5.3.8.1 Flexure in Flat Plates The power of the second method becomes very
clear if we examine a slab which has columns of
It is helpful to the understanding of post-ten-
irregular layout. For an example, with reference to
sioned flat plates to forget the arbitrary column
Fig. 5.13, let us assume that the odd numbered
strip, middle strip and moment percentage tables
grid lines are offset one-half bay from the even
which have long been familinr to the designer of
numbered grid lines, but columns on a given
reinforced concrete flat plates. Instead, behavior
letter grid are aligned. If we reverted to the
can best be understood by examinining the
column strip approach illustrated in Fig. 5.14 as
mechanics of the action of the tendons.
for conventionally reinforced slabs, we would find
The load balancing approach is an even more that each span which started in a column strip
powerful tool for examining the behavior of two- would end in a middle strip and tracing of load
way systems than it is for one-way members. By paths, a rational analysis, and proportioning rein-
the balanced load approach, attention is focused forcement would become difficult if not im-
on the loads exerted on the slab by the tendons, possible. So let us return to the basic idea of
transverse to the plane of the slab. As for one-way balancing loads with tendons. The primary
slabs, this typically means a uniform load exerted system of tendons (parallel to letter grid lines)
upward along the major portion of the central can be accomplished with little regard for column
length of a tendon span, and statically equivalent location. It is only necessary to place the high
downward load exerted over a short length be- points of the tendon profile (where reverse cur-
tween the points of reverse curvature. In order to vature and downward load occur) at the inter-
apply an essentially uniform upward load over the section of the tendons with the number grid
entire slab panel and to satisfy some rationality of lines. This system is then reacted with the
statics, these downward loads should be reacted secondary tendons placed on the number grid
by another structural element. The additional lines as shown in Fig. 5.15. By this procedure, the
element could be a beam or wall as in the case of portion of the gravity load balanced by the
one-way slabs, or by columns in a two-way tendons is carried directly to columns, without
system. However, a look at a plan view of a flat any flexural action of the slab. Since this balanced
plate reveals that columns provide an upward load is typically a large portion of the permanent
reaction for only a very small area. Thus, to load on the slab, errors in analysis which are due
maintain statical rationality, we must provide, to incorrect assumptions of load path are a
- 292 -
function of relatively small loads, and thus are
small. The possible consequences of such errors
can be investigated by examining the behavior of
the slab under overloads.
Tests and applications have demonstrated that
a post-tensioned flat plate behaves as a flat plate
regardless of tendon placement. The effects of
the tendons are, of course, critical to the behavior
as they exert loads on the plate as well as provide
reinforcement. Since the tendons exert trans-
verse loads on the plate, these loads may be
considered like any other dead or live loads. since
the tendon effect is opposite to the effect of
gravity loads, the net loads causing bending are
Fig. 5.13 - Irregular Flat Plate Column Layout. relatively small. An additional effect of the ten-
dons is the axial precompression which counter-
acts flexural tensile stresses. Therefore, at service
dead load, the net downward loads which cause
bending in the plate are normally very low and the
slab is essentially under uniform axial com-
pression.
Experimental
result5
I i I
c
Fig. 5.14 - Column Strips and Middle Strips with Irregular
Column Layout
- 293 -
square panels and equal pre-compression in both
directions, the first crack forms at the faces per-
pendicular to the reinforcing which has the
smaller effective depth, regardless of the distribu-
tion of tendons. These cracks are quite small and
have no significant effect on the stiffness of the
slab. However, as cracking extends toward mid-
panel with increasing load, the initial cracksat the
column face increase in width and depth. This
zone is of utmost importance to the shear strength Moment - b +
of the slab, and for this reason crack width and Span
depth should be minimized. While compression
due to prestress delays the formation of cracks, it c Column
is less efficient in controlling crack widths and Moment at mldspan ( Adopted from Reference 3 1
spacings than nonprestressed bonded rein-
forcement, placed in the top of slabs immediately Fig. 5.17 - Distribution of Moments at Midspan in Flat Plate
adjacent to and above the column. The code
specified amount of bonded nonprestressed
reinforcement controls and distributes cracks,
be lesssignificant for redundant, lightly prestressed
and allows full mobilization of the potential shear
structures such as continuous one-way slabs or
and flexural strength in the column zone. Bonded
two-way plates, slabs and waffles. It has been
reinforcement uniformly distributed in the top of
shown in all two-way tests that bonded, mild
slabs within lines one and one-half times the slab
reinforcing is required in positive moment regions
thickness either side of the column toughens the
only where ultimate flexural strength require-
punching zone and is effective for maximizing the
shear capacity. Bars placed outside that im- ments exceed the flexural capacity provided by
tendons alone, and that no minimum crack con-
mediate column zone are of no value in con-
trol bars are necessary for satisfactory behavior
trolling cracks in the shear zone. Thus, all mild
under service or ultimate loads. However, ACI
steel required for support sections should be
318-83 requires positive moment bonded rein-
placed as close to the column vicinity as con-
forcement proportioned in accordance with equa-
struction practice will allow. Although bonded
tion (18-7) where the computed tensile stress in
tendons provide some control of cracking due to
the concrete at service load exceeds 2 fi
their strain compatibility, few slabs are con-
structed with bonded tendons, and very limited
testing has been conducted on such slabs. 5.3.8.2 Shear in Flat Plates
Bonded reinforcement placed near mid-panel The ACI 318-83 Building Code was the first to
does not become effective in crack control nor contain specific provisions for punching shear in
contribute to the flexural capacity until the high
prestressed flat plates. Likewise, until recent
load levels where yield lines start to develop. Even
years there was little research on moment transfer
then, negative moment strains are much lower
in prestressed slabs. The ACI Committee 426
near mid-panel than in the column region, so that
review of code provisions for shear for reinforced
the full yield force of such bars may never be
concrete slabs has pointed out the need for
realized.
careful consideration of the effects of transfer of
In mid-span regions, positive moments are moment as well as transfer of shear between a
almost uniformly distrubuted across the panel slab and a column. Thus, while typical interior
width as shown in Fig. 5.17. First cracking, there- slab/column connections may not be required by
fore, occurs much later at mid-spans than at analysis to transfer unbalanced vertical load
supports. However, since such positive moment moments or lateral load moments, moment trans-
cracking is not confined to a small zone there is a fer may actuallyoccurdue to pattern live loading,
noticeable but not marked loss in stiffness caused temperature movements or deformations under
by that cracking. The behavior of a member which lateral loading caused by flexibility of the primary
is reinforced only by unbonded tendons has been lateral resistance system. Further, for conven-
described as similar to that of a shallow tied arch. tional reinforced flat plates, and some prestressed
This behavior has been observed in one-way plates as well, punching failure at a column can
statically determinate members, but it appears to cause load and moment to be transferred to
- 294 -
adjacent columns, and a horizontal progressive An accepted method for evaluating total
shear failure can then theoretically be propagated shear stress is that reflected in provisions
if the design shear capacity is based on vertical of ACI 318-83. The critical section for
load only. With proper consideration of moment shear is assumed to be at d/2 from the
transfer and detailing, this possibility is avoided. support face. The general expression for
The following steps are recommended for shear shear stress is:
design of prestressed flat plates:
VU aMt CJ
9 v u =b,d+ J,
1. Use the equivalent frame procedure of
ACI 318-83 Section 13.7 (excluding Sec- Where: V, = factored shear force at section
tions 13.7.7.4 and 13.7.7.5) to obtain
moments for frame members including V = shear stress at design (factored)
unbalanced moments at joints. Use of loads
prismatic column stiffness rather than b, = perimeter of shear section at
equivalent frame stiffness, while conser-
d/2 from face of column as de-
vative for moment transfer at exterior
fined by ACI 317-83, Chapter 11
columns, will lead to underestimation of
moment transfer at interior columns, and d = distance from centroid of ten-
will also lead to inadequate proportioning dontocompressionfaceindirection
of positive moment flexural capacities at of moment transfer, but need
exterior spans. Moment capacity provided not be less than 0.8 h, where h is
at an exterior column based on moments member thickness
obtained using prismatic column stiffness d= capacity reduction factor for
cannot be mobilized due to torsional flex- shear, 0.85.
ibility of slab sections away from the a = fraction of moment transferred
column, and other sections of the spans by shear
will then be required to resist more
1
moment than anticipated. An assumption a = l-
of zero column stiffness will usually give /2
conservative moment values in the slab,
but is also unsatisfactory because there
are no unbalanced moments which must Cl support dimension in the direc-
=
- 295 -
Shear-Stress Equations:
v
y-j f-y &=A
c
+
a(Mt ; g) CAB, (Eq. la);
c
I--------- v = +aMtc3
Jc v
vc=- - a(Mt ; g) CCD, (Eq. , b)
0 \ AC c
I ---- ---- , -aM,c:
y= - a=l-
1
6 JC
1 + 2/3 (c,/c,) h (Eq. 2)
s
l- -3 %- ,, -.
1 I , Critical-Section Properties:
GF3-P +v, f o r
ct*d
&=d(c,+2ct);cAe=-
design A,
Fig. 5.18 - Moment-Shear Interaction - Relationships for
Cl
Interior Columns CCQ = ct - C A B ; g = CC0 - 2
- 296 -
Shear -stress distribution,
Eq. 3a controlling
Column
centraidal axes
\
Shear-stress distribution,
Eq. 3b or 3c controlling
Al3 g,
Column critical axes
Plan
Shear-Stress Equations
v ax (Mx -vgl) CAB a, (4 - Vg2) C A D
VA = - + +
(Eq. 34
AC J CX J CY
V
v,, = - + ax (Mx -&I,) CAB - a, (4 - vg2) (CY + d/2 - C A D )
(Eq. 3b)
AC J =x J CY
Critical-Section Properties
A, = (cx+c,+d)d;
- 297 -
I I I I I I I I 1 ,
0
0 I 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 IO
bcqz
*
Did not fail in punching shear; maximum stress attained
- 298 -
requires that some tendon anchorages be placed b) Minimum A, at columns is A, = 0.00075hl
within the column width and that auxilliary closely (equation 78-8 in AC/ 378-83) where I is
spaced bonded reinforcement be placed through the length of the span in direction parallel
the column and as close as practicable to the to that of the reinforcement being deter-
column in each direction. Theflexural capacity of mined. At least four bars shall be provided
the tendons and the bonded reinforcement within in each each direction in negative moment
lines 3h/2 either side of the column must exceed areas at columns. For determining the
the fraction of the moment not transferred by amount of bonded reinforcement parallel
shear, (1 - CI) Mt. to the slab edge at exterior columns, the
amount obtained from equation (18-8)
should be multiplied by the ratio I&
5.3.8.3 Details of Tendons and Bonded where I3 and I4 are as defined in Fig. 5.23.
Reinforcement in Flat Plates (Note: this provision for reinforcement
parallel to the slab edge at exterior col-
Many arbitrary distribution arrangements have umns anticipates a revision of ACI 318-83
been successfully used, proportioning from 50% now under consideration by ACI Com-
to 100% of the total bay force in column strips mittee 318. Also, it reflects the basis of
and from 50% to 0% of the total bay force in so- proportioning this reinforcement shown
called middle strips. Most of these arbitrary to be satisfactory in model tests of post-
values are adaptations from design tables for tensioned flat plates.)
reinforced concrete slabs, and fail to recognize
one of the most important actions of post-ten-
sioned tendons. It is important that the designer
recognize the fact that tendons exert downward
loads at the high points that join adjacent
parabolic profiles, and these downward reactions
should be, as nearly as practicable, resisted by
columns, walls, and/or upward tendon loads to
achieve minimum deflections and maximum
shear capacity. Then for a statically rational
distribution of tendons, all the tendons in one
direction wpuld be placed thru or immmdiately
adjacent to the columns, and the tendons in the t First Intwiof Column
m
perpendicular direction would be spaced uni-
formly across the bay width. Where irregular
Fig. 5.23 - Adjustment coefficients of ACI 318-83 equation
column layouts must be used, the advantages of (18-8) for bonded reinforcement parallel to slab edge at
being able to easily trace the path of balanced exterior columns
loads to supports, as discussed in Section 5.3.8.1,
becomes an obvious and powerful design tool,
but the rationale applies to all two-way systems. c) Place the bonded reinforcement within a
slab width between lines that are 1.5h
In addition to the obvious structural advantages,
outside opposite faces of column supports
this banded tendon arrangement simplifies the
(AC/ 318-83 Section 18.9.3.3). Maximum
construction sequence, reducing labor cost and
spacing of these bars is 12 in.
construction time. Tendon distribution using the
d) Minimum length for the negative moment
banded system is illustrated by Fig. 5.22. See also,
bars shall extend l/6 the clear span on
the discussion in Section 6.2.4 and the related
each side of support.
figures. Recommended details of reinforcement
4 Where service load positive moment
for banded tendon distribution are as follows:
stresses are in excess of 2 fi, minimum
bonded reinforcement is specified by
a) The number of tendons required in the equation (78-7) of AC/ 318-83:
design strip (center to center of adjacent
panels) may be banded close to the col- & = Nc/0.5f,
umn in one direction and distributed in the
other direction. At least two tendons where N, is the tensile force in the con-
should be placed through columns in the crete due to unfactored dead load plus live
distributed direction. load.
- 299 -
f) Min. A, for positive moment (when not Anchorage plates apply the prestress force in a
considered in plate strength calculations) concentrated manner which involves high local
shall have length at least l/3 the clear stresses requiring a certain length to spread out
span with the bars centered in the positive over the cross-section of the member. The length
moment area. required for these localized stresses to distribute
9) Where bonded reinforcement is used is generally called the transmission zone. De-
along with unbonded tendons to meet pending on the size and location of the anchor-
strength requirements (rather than mini- ages relative to the concrete section, significant
mum &) the bar cut off points should be tensile stresses can be generated in a direction
as specified in Chapter 12 of ACI 318-83. perpendicular to the tendon in the transmission
f-0 For generally uniform loading, the maxi- zone.
mum spacing of single tendons or groups If the anchorages are located in a massive
of tendons in one direction should not section of concrete, the tensile stresses can
exceed 8 times the slab thickness, with a dissapate without causing distress to the con-
maximum spacing of 5 ft. In addition, the crete. On the other hand, if the ancorages are
spacing of tendons should provide a min- located in thin section of concrete, reinforcement
imum average prestress of 125 psi on the
is usually required to carry the tensile stresses
local slab section tributary to the tendon
and prevent concrete from splitting.
or tendon group (the section l/2 of the
spacing either side of the center of the Leonhardt discusses the distribution and cal-
tendon group). Special consideration of culation of the tensile bursting stresses in his
tendon spacing may be required to ac- textbook.* Fig. 5.24, taken from Leonhardts text,
commodate heavy concentrated loads. shows the distribution of the tensile stresses in a
direction perpendicular to the tendon path. These
distribution curves were plotted assuming the
5.4 SPECIAL DESIGN AND
width of the bearing plate equal to the width of the
DETAILING CONSIDERATIONS concrete section. Therefore, they closely approx-
5.4.1 Anchorage Zones imate the stress distribution of anchorages on
thin members. The stresses imposed by the
Anchorage bearing area must be provided for
anchorage immediately behind the plate are
the tendon anchorages in accordance with Sec-
tion3.7.7. Manufacturersstandard bearing plates
and other standard anchorage hardware should l Leonhardt, F.. Prestressed Concrete-Design and Construction,
be used in all but special applications. Second Edition, Wilhelm, Ernest & Sohn. Berlin, Munich, 1964.
0.5
0.4
0.3
0.2
0.1
Fig. 5.24
- 300 -
compressive but become tensile at some distance As discussed in Section 6.2.8, the restraint
away from the plate depending on the ratio of the forces can be reduced by use of pour strips to
depth of the anchor plate, a, to the depth of the temporarily isolate the post-tensioned floor sys-
concrete section, d. Since only tensile forces are tem from restraining columns or walls. In this
of concern in this context, only that portion of the regard, Fig. 5.25 provides an approximate indica-
diagram is shown by Fig. 5.24. tion of the proportion of final shrinkage or creep
movements vs. time. The figure indicates that
The magnitude of the tensile splitting force can
about 40 percent of shrinkage or creep takes
be determined from the following equation:
place within the first 28 days (after casting and
after loading, respectively), and that 60 percent
Z = 0.3 P(l - a/d)
takes places within the first 90 days. Accordingly,
Where: pour strips left open for these time periods would
Z = total splitting or busting force substantially reduce creep and shrinkage re-
P = tendon force straint forces. Of course, the pour strip would
a = depth of the anchor plate eliminate the development of any restraint from
d = depth of the concrete section the isolated vertical elements due to elastic
shortening of the floor system at the time of
In Fig. 5.24, u0 = P/bd, where b is the width of
post-tensioning.
the anchor plate.
Sufficient vertical reinforcement acting at a unit 10
stress of 0.6 x reinforcement yield stress to resist OS
the computed value of Z should be distributed
05
within the distance of d/2 of the anchorage
location. Normal shear reinforcement may be - 07
- 301 -
displacement of 6 was induced in the beam over a Although onlyapproximategeneralizationscan
period of time, the maximum force required was be drawn from this specific research, it does
reduced to only a fraction of the force required for suggest that concrete creep in restraining col-
the same instantaneous deflection. umns (and possibly in walls), may reduce the
ultimate restraint momentsand forces due to both
elastic and creep displacements to approximately
50 percent of the value that would be expected if
the total elastic shrinkage and creep displace-
ment occured instantaneously (Creep displace-
ment is about twice the elastic displacement).
Accordingly, the total creep restraint moments
Force P and forces may be approximately 50 percent of
P
those resulting from the displacement due to
I elastic and creep shortening due to post-tension-
-I ing, and due to concrete shrinkage.
A detail that has been used successfully to
reduce restraint forces in post-tensioned slabs
Pmax B supported by walls and still provide a final struc-
tural connection between the slab and the wall is
shown in Fig. 5.28. The use of the NMB Splice
Pm a x A
Sleeve provides for a delay of 60 days or more
!k- before the bent dowel connecting the slab and the
0 Time wall (which is cut at the middle of the splice
sleeve) is connected by filling the splice sleeve
Fig. 5.26 - Time-dependent forces caused by differential
settlement of a support in a continuous reinforced concrete
with high strength grout. The use of the heavier
beam: A - when settlement occurs suddenly; B - when it than usual bent bar connection reduces the
occurs progressively number of splice sleeves required. Details on the
NMB Splice Sleeve may currently (1985) be
obtained from: Splice Sleeve North America, 1107
Ninth Street, Suite 700, Sacramento, CA 95814.
The results of this research are shown on a
quantitative basis in Fig. 5.27. As indicated by the See Section 6.2.8 for discussion of other details
dashed line, the force due to an instantaneous and procedures to avoid or minimize develop-
deflection without creep relief was a little less than ment of restraint to dimensional changes.
24 kips. When the same settlement occurred over
a time period of 30 days or more, the induced
force was 12 kips or less.
NM SPLICE SLEEVE
RI? PLAN
i
NOTE: Thlr bar to bm
cul 01 lho mldpdnt ol
In. lpllC..
- 302 -
5.4.3 Catastrophic Loading of The effective width of the compression flange
Beams and One-Way Slabs of a-r-beam is not constant along the length of the
with Unbonded Tendons beam and depends:
A catastrophic loading such as might occur on the nature of the beam considered (simply
from an explosion or a severe earthquake which supported spans or continuous spans);
resulted in a failure in one bay of a beam or one-
on the method of load application (distributed
way slab with unbonded tendons could result in a
or concentrated);
progression of the failure throughout all bays of a
multi-bay building. Concern about this potential on the ratio of the thickness of the flange to
failure mode under abnormal loadings led to the the depth of the beam and on the existence of
following provision of Section 2678(j) of the any connecting fillets;
Uniform Building Code:
on the ratios of the length of the beam
One-way, unbonded, post-tensioned slabs between points of zero moment to the width of
and beams shall be designed to carry the dead the web and to the distance between webs.
load of the beam plus 25 percent of the unreduced
Tables based on elastic analyses have been
superimposed live load by some method other
published which may be used as a means of
than the primary unbonded post-tensioned re-
determining the effective flange width of isolated
inforcement. Design shall be based on the
or multiple cast-in-place T-beams.* Alternatively,
strength method of design with a load factor and
flange width determinations may be made by
capacity reduction factor of one. All reinforce-
finite element analysis, or by any other generally
ment other than the primary unbonded rein-
accepted elastic analysis procedure. In lieu of
forcement provided to meet other requirements of
these more rigorous analytical procedures, the
this section may be used in the design.
generally conservative approximations of effec-
This provision provides a secondary means of tive flange width of Sections 8.70.2, 8.70.3, and
carrying loads in one-way structures with un- 8.70.4 of ACI 318-83 may be used.
bonded tendons under abnormal or catastrophic
Comparative stress calculations for post-ten-
loading conditions. A provision of this nature is
sioned T-beams based on precise elastic analyses
not considered necessary for applications such
and Section 8.70 of AC/ 378-83 indicate that
as two-way flat plates where the system of ten-
Section 8.70 generally provides conservative
dons in the,second direction automatically pro-
results. However, the wider flange widths which
vides substantial load carrying capacity in event
normally result from more precise analyses are
unusual or abnormal circumstances should result
in loss of post-tensioning force in one direction. more realistic, particularly from the standpoint of
strength calculations.
The amount of bonded reinforcement required
The diffusion of the prestressing force from the
by the above Uniform Building Code provision
anchorages, which progressively affects the
may exceed the amount required for one-way
entire section, may be recognized in an approxi-
slabs and beams by Section 78.9 of AC/ 378-83.
mate way as follows: T
5.4.4 Effective Flange Width At the end sections of post-tensioned T-beams
of Post-Tensioned Tee Beams adjacent to tendon anchorages, the prestressing
moment may be considered effective at the beam
The current provisions of Section 8.70 of AC/
end. The prestressing force may beconsidered to
378-83 have been in the code in the same format
be distributed into the main plane of a slab or web
for many years. Due to the exclusion of Sections
from the area of the beam end covered by
8.70.2, 8.70.3, and 8.70.4 relative to application to
anchorage hardware within an angle bounded by
prestressed concrete in Section 78.7.3 of AC/ 378-
straight lines above and below the tendon tra-
83, there are no explicit provisions for effective
jectory each inclined at an angle of 33 degrees to
flange width of cast-in-place post-tensioned T-
the direction of the force.
beams. The discussion presented below is pre-
sented to provide guidance for flange width * Recommendations for an International Code of Practice for Re-
determination for cast-in-place post-tensioned T- inforced Concrete, American Concrete Institute and the Cement
beams. In addition, a procedure is presented for and Concrete Association, 52 Grosvenor Gardens, London S.W. 1
calculation of the diffusion of the post-tensioning p p 6570.
t International Recommendations for the Design and Construction
force throughout the effective section at sections of Concrete Structures, Second Edition Cement and Concrete Asso-
adjacent to end anchorages. ciation, 52 Grosvenor Gardens, London S.W. 1 p. 40.
- 303 -
Application of the above procedure is illus- Step 1 (Day 1)
trated in Fig. 5.29. Girder construction
Assume that the girder to be constructed is of
minimum height H and span Land will eventually
support a 12-story building. The compressive
strength fI: of the concrete is specified to be 5000
psi at 28 days.
The formwork, which is supported by scaffold-
L Web depth covered
ing from below or by a truss spanning between
by anchorage hardware the supports, carried the dead weight D, of the
girder.
Inside the girder there are several ducts which
have a predetermined profile. Post-tensioning
tendons will subsequently be threaded through
these ducts.
Step 2 (Day 5)
Application of Stage 1 post-tensioning (P,)
When the compressive strength of the concrete
Fig. .X29- Recommended procedure for calculation of diffusion reaches a minimum of 3000 psi the first post-
of post-tensioning force into tee beams adjacent to anchorage tensioning force PI (Stage 1) is applied. This
prestress balances (with WeI) the dead weight
Do of the girder, plus the first stage of applied load
WI (in this case the dead load of the first three
floors).
5.4.5 Stage Post-Tensioning*
Note that at the completion of Step 2, a maxi-
Stage post-tensioning may be defined as a pre- mum compressive stress of 0.45 fci is induced at
stressing technique in which prestress is applied the bottom fiber of the girder at midspan while the
incrementally to counteract successive loading maximum permissible tensile stress at the top
stages. The applied load may be due to external fiber is 3 &.
forces or loads, or due to internal volume changes
(elastic shortening, shrinkage and creep). The
concept of stage post-tensioning is not new and Step 3 (Day 25)
has been used in conventional post-tensioning Application of Stage 1 loading W,
work. The construction of three floors takes place,
say from Day 5 through Day 25, applying a total
The principle and mechanics of stage post-
tensioning are illustrated in Fig. 53Ofordesign of load of WI to the girder.
a girder to span a subway and to support the loads By this time the compressive strength of the
due to progressive construction of a high rise concrete has reached almost the specified value
building above the girder. Fig. 5.30 shows the of 5000 psi. The top fiber stress at midspan is now
construction steps involved in the project and the 0.45 f; compression and the bottom fiber stress is
pertinent stress conditions in the girder cor- 3 fl tension.
responding to each construction stage.
These stresses are almost the reverse of the
Further details on the various steps and post- stress state at Step 2. Also, the vertical deflection
tensioning stages in the project as shown in Fig. has changed from an upwards induced camber
5.30 are as follows: (at a relatively low concrete modulus Ez) to a small
downwards deflection (at a concrete modulus Es).
- 304 -
STRESS BLOCK- MID
- SPAN-
: TENSION
n
step 1
day 1
StePday$
step 4
day 25
Do+,+? pz Do+\nq+S+?
\+y7=~
step 5
day45
Do+w,+p,+P2 w2 &l+wf+wz+
step 6
day 115
Fig. 5.30 - Principle and mechanics of stage post-tensioning showing stress conditions at corresponding construction steps
- 305 -
Again, the girder stresses are reversed so that From a structural viewpoint, stage post-ten-
the top fiber stress 3 *is kept safely below the sioning has several important advantages:
cracking value and likewise the compressive 1. The depth of beams and girders can be
stress in the bottom fiber is controlled at a safe kept to an absolute minimum affording
level. Note that the shear resistance of the girder substantial savings in the cost of materials
also increases with each application of stage and providing slender, attractive mem-
post-tensioning. bers.
Step 5 (Day 45) 2. The working stresses can be controlled as
Application of Stage 2 loading each successive loading is applied.
Construction is completed to Floor 5 and the 3. Deflection and camber may becontrolled.
full load from Floors 4 and 5 is applied to the
girder with the resulting change in stress state 4. Because fairly large prestress losses can
similar to that described in Step 3 above. be recovered, the amount of prestressing
steel may be significantly reduced. (How-
Step 6 (Day 115) ever, it is to be noted that recovery of
Application of Nth Stage post-tensioning prestress losses requires that tendons
(restressing of tendons) remain in the ducts in a stressed and
Stage post-tensioning and construction con- ungrouted state for a period of four or five
tinues through (N-l) stages until the 12th level months. In some environments, it may be
(roof) is reached at Day 115 after girder con- preferable or necessary to grout the ten-
creting. During this4-month period (in which only dons within a more limited time period
approximately uniform normal prestress, P/A, has after initial stressing or use some effective
been applied), prestress losses have been taking means to inhibit development of corro-
place in the tendons. (Note that at this stage the sion).
tendons, still remain ungrouted.) the following
volume changes occur:
1. Shrinkage of concrete.
2. Elastic shortening of concrete.
3. Creep of concrete.
4. Relaxation of prestressing steel.
These losses are represented by terms relevant
to each stage API, AP2.. . APN-I over a given time
internal (days) from T, to TIIs.
However, very significantly, all the tendons can
now be retensioned to their original forceduring
the Nth and final stage of post-tensioning. At the
level of the original forces it is found that addi-
tional elongations AE,, AE2 . . . EN-, are
attained in each tendon group, more in the
earliest stages and less in the later stages.
During this Nth stage of post-tensioning, all the
prestress losses in the tendons are recovered or
recaptured. (Note that at this time the tendons
can be anchored and grouted.) This gain in
prestress losses may in many cases amount to
15,000 psi, or provide a savings of over 10 percent
in the prestressing steel.
- 306 -
5.5 DESIGN EXAMPLES
EXAMPLE 5.5.1
Cast-in-place T-Beam - Single Span
18 -I it-
I
20,-O
I
P (0.000817 + 0.003805) = 3367
P = 3367/0.004622 = 728,473 lb
Use l-3/8 in. diameter 150k threadbars.
P,,=A,x150=1.58x150=2371<
2. Section Properties.
P, = 0.66 x 237 kips = 156.4k
Assume T-beam with a slab 9 ft. 6 in. wide (per
Sec. 8.10 of ACI 318-83): Prestress losses = 25 ksi x 1.58 = 39.5k
A, = 1224 in.* Approximate P,, = 156.4 - 39.5 = 116.9k
43 = 140,300 in.4
Approximate number of bars required =
yb = 25.06 in.
;, = = 5600 10.94in.3 in. 728,473
116,900 = 623
Zt = 12,820 in.3
Prestress losses will be reduced due to tem-
porary overstressing to compensate for elastic
shortening loss.
Try six l-3/8 in. diameterGrade150threadbars
Aps = 6 x 1.58 = 9.48 sq. in.
- 307 -
5. Effect of Friction (two-&d tensioning). 6Po 6 x 163.40
at end = - = = 0.801 ksi
With a parabolic drape and the c.g.s. at the A, 1224
centroid of the section at the end of the beam. 6P, PXe2 he
atmidspan = A+F - -
9 9 I!3
I
6x159.5+ 6x159.5x21.3 1191(12)(21.3)
= 1224 140,300 - 140,300
= 0.782 -I- 3.095 - 2.170 = 1.707ksi
- 308 -
Effective prestress force per tendon All of the stresses are less than allowable and
center of span = 152.50 are therefore satisfactory.
- Prestress losses = 32.97 Since there are no moments at the beam ends
in this case due to either applied loads or post-
P,, = 119.53 tensioning, the stresses at beam ends are also
satisfactory (0.748 ksi uniform compression at
Total effective transfer, and 0.586 ksi uniform compression
Prestress force at end = 6 x 123.43 = 74058k after all losses). Note: Moments due to applied
Total effecftive prestress loads and post-tensioning do occur when single
force at midspan = 6 x 119.53 = 717.18k span beams are framed monolithically to
columns.
9. Flexural Capacity.
8. Check midspan stresses at critical Applied ultimate loads =
load stages.
1.4 D + 1.7 L
(Compression = +, Tension = -)
Applied M, = 1.4 (1307) + 1.7 (462)
Stresses, ksi
Top Bottom = 2615 ft. kips.
Dead load, beam and slab + 1.115 - 2.552 Determine location of neutral axis,
Post-Tensioning, initial 1.4 d p,, f,,/f;
P/A, = 152.50 x 6/l 224 + 0.748 + 0.748 estimate f,, = 144,000
Pe/Zt = 6 x 1.58 144,000
152.50 x 6 x 21.3/l 2,820 - 1.520 =1.4(32.25) 114x32.25 X =3.35 in.
5,000
Pe/Zb =
152.50 x 6 21.3/5,600 + 3.480 Neutral axis is located in the flange.
1
472/d%% = 6.68 fl
Maximum allowable tensile stress = 12 fl. (1 - 0.59 x .0743)
So, tensile stress OK although greater than
6Jf;: M, = 3,160 ft-kips > 2615 ft-kips required
Allowable compression,
Ultimate moment capacity is more than re-
initial = 0.6 x 4000 = 2400 psi
quired. Amount of post-tensioning could be
Allowable compression, reduced by permitting a higher midspan tensile
final = 0.45 x 5000 = 2250 psi stress (say = 9 Jfr: ).
- 309 -
10. Shear. 11. Aochorage Zone Stresses.
v, = 0.6Jf:, + 700
AC/ 378-83 Section 77.54 specifies maximum Bearing stress = 2 x 162.93/(7 x 15) = 3.10 ksi
stirrup spacing of 0.75 h 524. In this case, 0.75 h Bearing stress at time of anchorage is less
= 0.75 x3.0 = 2.25 ft., so maximum spacing is 24 than 3.51 ksi, so the 7 x 15 in. bearing plates are
in. Use No. 4 Grade 60 stirrups at 24 in. centers satisfactory, both at time of anchorage and
throughout beam length. under service loads.
Location
vu M d VC Vu vu - v c
kips ft.kips ft. ksi ksi ksi
h/2 from face of support 147.04 226 1.062 .354 .334 -0.020
l/4 Span 76.91 1961 2.240 .141 .175 +o. 034
l/3 Span 52.30 2324 2.480 .141 .115 -0.036
M idsoan 0 2615 2.690 .141 0 -0.141
- 310 -
12. Deflection.
w14
Live load deflection = $4 x F
= 5x2Ox4Ox68x(68x12)3
384 x 4.3 x 1 O6 x 140,300
68x12 1
= 0.64 in = .64 =mx Span
-311-
EXAMPLE 55.2
Two-Span Cast-in-place T-Beam
1. Given.
Design a two-span cast-in-placeT-Beam park- Effective slab width in accordance with Section
ing garage floor of normal weight concrete. Use 8.70 of AC/ 378-83 = stem width + 8 x slab
fl: = 5000 psi, fzi = 4000 psi, and f,, = 270,000 psi thickness each side = 14 in. + 8 x 7 x 2 = 126 in.
(l/2 inch diameter strand post-tensioning ten-
dons). Beams are spaced 26.9 ft. on centers. The 2. Section properties. (See table below)
design is based on use of unbonded tendons.
3. Dead load and live load moments
20 x 24 ~01s.. 10 long
Dead load = 2777 Ib/ft (including full slab)
Live load = 50 psf reduced to 30 psf on
columns and beams (30 x 26.9 = 807 Ib./ft.)
b = 126 L
- ~~ i .( i
I
w
57.0
Section Properties
Section A Y AY Ay2 4
Top slab 126 x 7 882 - 3.5 - 3,087 10,804 3,601
Stem 29x 14 - 406 -21.5 - 8,729
- 187,674 28,453
1,288 -11,816 198,478 32,054
-11,816
Yt = = -9.17 in.
1,288 32,054
y b = 36 - 9.17 = 26.83 in. 230,532
2, = 122,179/9.17 = 13,324 in.3 -1288 x 9.172 = -108,353
2, = 122,179/26.83 = 4,554 in.3 I= 122,179 in.4
- 312 -
4. Post-tensioning force selection Fixed end moments (per kip of force)
The effects of post-tensioning are treated 92 - 28, 538.29
separately from the effects of loads and are F.E.M. @ 1 =
l/2 = - 28.5
dependent on the magnitude and position of the
post-tensioning force and on frame action. As- = 18.89 in-kips
sume two-end stressing. A tendon profile is e, - 2e2 299.19
selected: F.E.M. @ 2 =
l/2 = ~ 28.5
= 10.50 in-kips
I 57,-O" I
I
I-
a) Secondary Moments:
Secondary moments induced by post-tensioning
are accounted for by considering the effects of
restrained rotations. For simplicity, a post-ten-
+ 18.89 + 10.50 + 10.50 + 18.89
sioning force of 1 kip is used. - 7.97 + 3.99 + 3.99 - 7.97
Rotation @ 2: 13,324
Support AM =424x 12 ooo =470.78ft.-kips
EI,j 2
The required post-tensioning force at columns
1
can be calculated as follows:
-$x4.75x5.17x(52.25+$x4.75) $
= ft - (f allowable)
= -378.89
Multiplying both sides by Zt and solving for P 7.92
provides: al = 7.92 degrees = 57.2g radians = 0.138
- 314 -
initial effective tendon stress at interior Interior column effective force =
columns: 1 5 x .153 x 147,500 = 338,512 lb.
= 0.7 x 270,000 x 1.04/l .12 = 175,500 psi Exterior column effective force =
- creep, shrinkage & steel
relaxation = 28,000 1 5 x .153 x 153,440 = 352,145 lb.
Effective tendon stress at Average force = 353,384 lb.
interior column = 147,500 psi
b) At midspan =
4 Midspan
I f t = + 369,495 - 369,495 (23.83 - 12.71)
4
Exlerlor Intedor 1,288 13,324
Tendon Stress Diagram
Column Column
587,000 x 12
+
13,324
7. Number of l/2 @ 270 k strand required.
f t = + 287 - 308 + 5 2 9
- 315 -
c) At interior column: . f t = + 433,755 - 433,755 (23.83 - 12.71)
P = 338,512 1,288 13,324
338,512 338,512 (5.17 + 14.49) 455,000 x 12
ft = + +
1,288 + 13,324 13,324
1,174,ooo x 12 f t = + 337 - 368 + 4 1 0
+
13,324 = + 379 psi compression OK
ft = + 263 + 499 - 1,057 = -295 psi
433,755 (23.83 - 12.71)
tension OK f b = +337 +
4,554
f b = + 338,512 - 338,512 (5.17 + 14.49)
_ 455.000 x 12
1,288 4,554
4,554
1,174,ooo x 12
+ f b = + 333 + 1,059 - 1,199
4,554
= + 193 psi compression OK
f b = + 263 - 1,461 + 3,094
= 1,896 psi compression OK c) At interior column:
All service load stresses are well within the P = 15 x 175,500 x 0.153 = 402,772 lb
allowable stresses.
402,772 402,772 (5.17 + 14.49)
ft = +
1,288 + 13,324
910,000 x 12
9. Stresses under initial post-tensioning
13,324
force, considering only dead load present.
f t = +312+594-819
Allowable stresses = 0.6 x 4000 =
= + 87 psi compression OK
2400 psi compression 402,772 (5.17 + 14.49)
3J4ooo = 190 psi tension fb = + 3 1 2 -
4,554
a) At exterior support: + 910,000 x 12
P = 181,440 x 15 x .153 = 416,405 lb. 4,554
416,405 + 416,405 (0 + 10.92) f,, = +312-1,739+2,398
ft = +
1,288 13,324 = + 971 psi compression OK
All stresses at the time the tendons are stressed
- 436,000 x 12 are also well within the allowable stresses.
13,324
- 316 -
1
Total moment capacity required to be provided
@M, = 0.90 15x.1 53~171,637 (26.83 - +)
by tendon =
-826 + 321 = -505 ft. kips
GM, = 8338 in. kips/l2 = 695 ft. kips
At midspan: OK > 505 ft. kips required.
5,260
M, = 3584 (587) = +861 ft. kips
Since tendons alone provide more than re-
quired moment capacity, provide bonded rein-
secondary moment = forcement for rectangular section only.
12.71
-1 2 x 353.38 = +374 ft. kips
1
14.49
12 x 353.38 = +427 7.56
M, = 0.9 454 (27.65 - 2)
@ Mu = @
4,s f,
A,, f,,
0.153x1 5~171,637
(d - $ )
1 @M, = 0.90 [613 (32.82 - 0.57)l
@M, = 17,792/12 = 1483 ft. kips
= 6.62in. OK 1498 ft. kips > 1235 ft. kips required
a = .85 f; b = .85x5000x1 4
-317-
at interior columns: . Since bonded reinforcement is required for
strength, it must be detailed for laps between
Use 8 No. 6 Grade 60 bars as per exterior
positive and negative moment bars in accordance
column calculation
with Chapter 12 of ACI 318-83.
A, = 3.52 sq. in.
15x.153 = 0.0051 11. Shear
= 14x32
V, at center of interior column = 163.8 k
5000
f,, = 147,500 + 10,000 + .51 = 167,300 psi V, at center of exterior column =
149.9 - 13.9 = 136 k
3.52
___ = .0076
p = 14x33 e
1 136K
Interior Column
o = .0076x60/5 = 0.091
12,313+6969 19,282
d = = 32.35 in.
385f211 = 596 Shear Diagram
1222
- = 94.3% Design shear reinforcement at columns based
1296 on shear at h/2 from the face of columns (ACI-
318-83 Section 11.1.2.2).
Add 2 No. 6 Grade 60 bar for a total of 10 No. 6
bars over interior column to meet moment re- 10 + 36/2 = 28
quirement 28/12 = 2.33 ft. from center of columns
At h/2 from face of exterior columns:
10x.44
.0095
p=14x33= 23.54
Shear = 25.87 x 136k = 123.75 k
w = .0095x60/5 = .114
At h/2 from face of interior column =
o+wp = .114+.171 = .285 < .30OK
31.13 - 2.33
Since up + w> 0.24 x .80 = .192, Section Shear = x 163.8 = 151.54 k
31.13
78.70.4.3 of AC/ 378-83 does not permit re-
distribution of moments. Assume shear carried by the concrete is calcu-
lated by equation 77-70 of AC/ 378-83.
d =
12,313+4.40x60x33
385+4.40x60 V, = 0.6 fl + 700 M
Vud b,d
>
12,313 +8712 2 fl b,d < V, < 5 n b,d
d = = 32.85 in.
385+264
2 &j3F = 141 psi 5 &ZiF= 353 psi
649
a = .85 x5 x 14 = 10.91 in. Check stirrup requirement 2.33 from % of
exterior column
q3 M, = 0 . 9 0 6 4 9 (32.85 - Approximate Ultimate Moment Diagram (Note
midspan moment is assumed to be the maximum
@M, = 1336ft/kips > 1296ft. kipsrequiredOK moment)
- 318 -
(181 - 164) 14 s
A, = 0.40 in.2 =
60,000
60,000 x 0.40
S= = 101 in.
17 x 14
In accordance with AC/ 318-83 Section Use No. 4 Grade 60 stirrups at 15 in. centers in
7 7.5.4.7, use No. 4 Grade 60 stirrups @ 24 inch l/3 of beam span either side of interior column.
centers in end of beams adjacent to exterior
columns.
Check shear at l/4 span
14.24 12. Deflection.
V, = 136 - 25.87 x 136 = 61.09 k
I = 122,179 in.4
M, = 1221 - (.25 x 1,737)) = 787k
E = 150~5x33x~~ =4.29x106psi
d = 9.17 + [23.83 -(;Er x 23.831 Liveload =30 psf x 26.9 = 807 plf
= 27.04 = 2.25 Permissible liveload deflection = 1/360x span
Permissible liveload deflection = l/360 x57 x
vc = [42 + 700 (61.0~~~.25)]= 164 psi 12 = 1.9 in.
61,900
V
= 0.85x14x0.8x36= 18 psi
- 379 -
Moment Diagram
5wL4
A = 384 EI
= 5x807~57~(57~12)~
384 x 4.29 x 122,179
A = +0.37 in.
1.728
A = - (127~57~ + 264~57~) , 6x4.2gx, 22,, 7g
-320-
5.53 One-Way Slab Parking Structure 1 2 3 4
2. Determine loads.
Dead150x5.5/12 =69x1.4=96psf
Live =50x1.7=85psf
Total = 119 psf, service
= 181 psf ultimate
Positive moment at middle of first span = w12/8 =
3. Estimate balanced load. (Arbitrarily balance 0.91/2 = 2.02 - 0.45 = 1.57 ft. kips
about 65 percent of the dead load.)
Maximum negative moment at column 3: loads
wbal = 0.65 dead load = 45 psf on second and third spans
4. Determine frame properties, El is constant,
no column stiffness.
Thus:
Say stiffness k interior = 1, k endspan = 3/4
Carry-over
;;;
-321 -
6. Calculate post-tenstoning force required
to balance assumed loads.
a) Determine sag
Assume cover for 2 hour fire rating; i.e.:
3/4 typical bottom cover, but 2 typical
top cover in consideration of traffic and
exposure to weather and deicing chem-
icals. ,,-Beom axis
Then @ endspan
2% + 3%
sag a = - 1 = 2
2
Typ-Span a = 5% - 2% - 1 = 2.25
End span F = 0.045 (324) 12/(8 x 2.0) Magnitude Moments (ft. kips at support)
Loading PSf 2 3 4
= 1 0.94k/ft. Dead Load 0.69 -2.39 -1.72 -1.86
Live Load 0.050 -1.87 -1.71 -1.71
F/A = 10.94/(5.5 x 12) = 166 psi Balanced Load 0.045 +1.56 +1.12 +1.21
Net Load 0.074 -2.70 -2 31 -2.36
Int. span F = 0.045 (324) 1.5/2.25 =9.72k/ft.
Min. V at Support (kips) 0.67 0.67
F/A = 147 psi
Vc/3 0.67 x s x ; + .26
- 322 -
8. Calculate secondary moments and design 9. Calculate capacity utilizing minimum bonded
moments by factoring and combining results steel area = 0.002 bh in accordance with ACI
from previous moment distributions. 318-83 equation (18-6).
a) Calculate ultimate tendon force from
a) Calculate secondary moments due to
equation (18-5) of ACI 318-83.
post-tensioning. The power of the load
balancing method is that it directly in-
cludes both the primary effect of post- f,, = f,, + 10,000 + -
c
tensioning, MI, (due to force times eccen- 300 PP
tricity) and the secondary effects, MP, (due
to moment restraint of supports). This can Stressing tendons to 0.7 x 270 = 189 ksi, and
be expressed as: allowing 29,000 psi for losses provides an
effective tendon force, fe, of 160,000 x 0.153 =
Mbal = MI + MZ or Mbal = Fe + M2 24.5 kips for each l/2 inch diameter 270 k
strand (area of steel = 0.153 sq. in.)
Where MI = Fe = Primary Moment
MP = Secondary Moment pP = A,, / bd
10.94
Since we have previously found the moments end span pP = 24.5 x .153/(12 x d)
due to balanced load, Mbal, and have defined
force and profile, secondary moments are 3.25 + 4.5
easily found for design moment calculations Use average d = 2 = 3.88 in.
by:
MP = Mbal - Fe 10.94
end span PP -- -
2 4 . 5 x .153/(12 x 3.88) = .00147
Balanced load moment correction to face of
support: 4000
end span f,, = 160,000 + 10,000 + .440 =
14 1 179,090 psi
Vc/3 at support 2 = 0.045 x 9 x r2 x 3 = 0.158
Supports 2 3 4 9.72
interior spanpp = -
24.5 x.153/(12x3.88)=.00130
Balanced Moment at +1.56 +1.12 +1.21
Supports - Vc/3 -0.16 -0.16
~ -0.16
___ 4000
Balanced Moments interior span f,, = 170,000 + -
.3go = 180,250 psi
at Face $1.40 -to.96 +1.05
Fe = 10.94k x 0.5/l 2 = -0.46
Fe = 9.72k x 0.5/l 2 = -0.41 -0.41 Use average value of 179,670 psi throughout for f,,
Secondary Moments, ~ ___ ~
M2 = +0.94 +0.55 +0.64 179.7
FPS= -160 x 10.94 = 13.44 kips/ft. end spans
(Moments shown have units in ft. kips)
179.7
F,, = 160 x 9.72 = 10.92 kips/ft. interior spans
b) Combine 1.4 dead + 1.7 live + 1.0 M2
(units in ft. kips)
b) Calculate Design Capacity
Mldspan 2 Midspan 3 Midspan 4 (1) Capacity at exterior midspan section:
1.4D +2.22 -3.35 +1.04 -2.41 +1.30 -2.60 Exterior midspan A, = 0.002 (5.5) 12 =
1.7L +2.67 -3.18 +2.18 -2.91 +2.18 -2.91 0.132 sq. in. No. 4 @ 18 in. = 0.133 sq.
l.OM +0.47 +0.94 +0.75 f0.55 f0.60 +0.64
in.
M +5.36 -5.59 +3.97 -4.77 +4.08 -4.87
V 1.63 1.63 1.63 1.63 1.63 1.63
vc/3 + .63
F,, = 13.44 kips end span
+ 63 + .63
Vc/6 .31 - .31 - .31 A,f,=O.l33x60= 7.97 kips
Mf,C, +5 05 -4.96 i3.66 -4.14 +3.77 -4.24 T, = 21.42 kips end span
- 323 -
depth of compression block, With redistribution, M, required =
(4.96) (1 - 0.112). M, required = 4.40
T ft. kips < M, provided = 4.80 ft. kips.
a = 0.85f;b Note that end span positive moment
section has enough excess capacity
21.42
a = o.85 x 4 x 12 = 0.53 in. to take the additional moment result-
ing from this redistribution.
(d - $) = 4.50 - 0.27 = 4.23 in. (3) Check typical midspan moment capa-
city with #4 at 18 inch centers:
F = 10.92 kips
4.23 A:, = 7.98 kips
Mu = @T, (d - $ ) = 0.9 (21.42) 12 = Tu = 18.90 kips
18.90
6.80 ft. kips a = o.85 x 4 12 = 0.46 in.
4.27
-
(2) Capacity at first interior support 1 2 = 0.356 ft.
A, = 0.133 - No. 4 @ 18 in. centers
T, = 21.42 kips as for exterior midspan. M,=@T,(d-;)=
depth of compression block:
21.42 0.9 (18.9) (0.356) = 6.06 ft. kips
a= .85x4x12 OK M, provided = 6.06 ft. kips >
a = 0.52 in. 3.77 ft. kips required.
- 324 -
limits on redistribution of moment,
and have been found to be adequate.
Note that bonded reinforcement
must be lapped in accordance with
Chapter 12 of ACI 318 since the
reinforcement is used in meeting
the capacity requirements.
11. Reference
(1) Continuity in Concrete Building Frames,
Portland Cement Association, Skokie, III-
inois, 1959.
- 325 -
5.5.4 Flat plate Apartments Assume hardrock concrete f: = 4000 psi
in slabs and columns.
I. Design typical transverse strip as described
in drawings and calculations below.
2. Design procedure
Assume a set of loads to be balanced by
parabolic tendons. Analyze an equivalent
frame subjected to the net downward loads,
according to the principles of ACI 318-83,
Section 13.7. Check flexural stresses at
critical sections and revise load balancing
tendon forces as required to obtain net
flexural tension stresses in accordance with
ACI 318-83.
When final forces are determined, obtain
frame moments for factored dead and live
loads. Calculate secondary moments in-
duced in the frame by post-tensioning forces,
and combine with factored load moments to
obtain design moments. provide minimum
mild steel reinforcement in accord-
j- 20-0~/- B a y s -1 ance with ACI 318-83 Section 18.9. Check
flexural capacity and increase mild steel if
PART PLAN
required by strength criteria. Investigate
Exterior 12 x 14 shear strength, including shear due to vert-
ical load and due to moment transfer by
torsion; compare total to allowable values
/ I Interior 20 x 14 calculated in accordance with ACI 318-83
Section 11 .I 1.2.
3. Load Balancing
Arbitrarily, a force corresponding to an
average compressive stress of 175 psi, with
maximum parabolic tendon profile, will be
used for the initial estimate of balanced load.
Then F, = 0.175 x 6.5 x 12
= 13.65 kips/foot
SECTION
Assuming l/2 diameter, 270 ksi strand
Slab Thickness @ L/45 tendons and 30 ksi long term losses, effec-
tive force per tendon is 0.153 x (0.7 x 270 -
20x 12 30) = 24.33k.
Longitudinal = 45 = 5.3
For a 20 foot bay, 20 x 13.65/24.33 = 11.2
25x12 tendons, say eleven.
Transverse = 45 = 6.7
Then F, = 11 x 24.33/20 = 13.38k/ft.
Use 6% Slab F/A = 13.38/78 = 0.172 ksi
Loads
6% Slab = 81 4. Tendon Profile
Partitions = 15
Dead = 9 6 x 1.4 = 134
Live = 4 0 x 1.7 = 6 8
Total = 136 psf = 202 psf, ultimate
- 326 -
For spans 1 and 3: Exterior column - 14 x 12
3% + 5% 14~12~
a= - 1% = 2.625 I= = 2016 in.4
2 12
Wbal = 8 x F x a/( 12 x L*) = (13.38 x 2.625)/ E Cd
-= 1.0
(1.5 x 289) = 0.081 ksf. E slab
Net load causing bending = Wnet =
0.136 - 0.081 = 0.055 ksf 4x1.0x2016
Kc = 1o3 _ 2 x 6.5 = 90 x 2 =
For span 2:
a = 6% - 1 -1 = 4% 180 joint total
Wba, = 0.064 ksf
Torsional stiffness of slab in column line,
W net = 0.072 ksf
Kt, is calculated as follows:
( (0 2 2Oxl2(l.O-1.l7/2O)3=65
Kc=; 1+3 +,
Equivalent column stiffness is then
Where I is taken at the column, L is obtained:
center to center height and L is clear 1
height. -II+++
Kec t c
Carryover factors are approximated by K,, = (l/65 + l/180)- = 48
-l/2 (1+3h) where h is the length of
infinite I. Interior column = 14 x 20
A simpler approximation is shown by
I = 14 x (20) 3 = 9333 in.4
Rice and Hoffman in Structural Design
12
Guide to the ACI Building Code*
4EI 4 x 1 x 9333
=415x2
Kc = L - 2h Kc= 1 0 3 - 2 x 6 . 5
2112
* References are listed at the end of the example.
- 327 -
b. Slab stiffness (see Rice and Hoffman, 7. Check net tensile stresses.
ibid.) width of slab-beam = 20/2 + 20/2 = a. At face of column
20 ft.
Moment at column face is center line
moment + Vc/3
4EI
Ks = L, - G/2 -M,,, = -3.49 + 3 yl 2 (12.5 x 0.072)
where LI is centerline span
cl is column depth = -3.49 + 0.50 = - 2.99 ft.-k
at exterior column S = bt2/6 = 12 x 6.5 x 6.5/6 = 84.5 in.3
K =4x1 x20~(6.5)~
s = 111
12x17-12/2 = 84.5 in.3 $-m = 7.04 in.2 ft.
at interior column 2.99
spans 1 and 3 then ft = -
7.04 - 0.172 = 0.425 - 0.172
Moment Distribution:
- 328 -
Moment Distribution Balanced Loads:
T = 0.130 x 1.40 x + = 1 .Ogk/ft.
- 329 -
Moment Distribution Factored Loads: End span positive moment =
1.30 x 6.45 = +.840
0.7 0.37 0.25 symm. -.202 (6.45) = -4.20
2
-4.86 -4.86 -10.52 FEM End moment = -1.15
+3.40 -2.09 + 1.42 dist +3.05
+1.05 -1.70 - 0.71 C.O. MP = 0.48
-0.74 +0.37 - 0.25 dist
+M max. = +3.53 ft. kips/ft.
-1.15 -8.28 -10.06
Span 2
-202 x 25
Combine factored load and secondary V= = 2.52 k/ft.
moments to obtain design moments: 2
+ Moment = .202 x 252/8 =
Span 1 Span 2 15.78 ft. kips/ft.
Factored - End Moment = -10.06
load + 5.72
Moments -1.15 -8.28 -10.06
MP = + .77
Secondary
Moments +0.51 +0.44 +0.77 + M max. = + 6.49 ft. kips/ft.
design
moments at
COI -0.64 -7.84 -9.29 b. Calculation of flexural capacity
Span 1 A, = 0.00075h x L
.202x 1 7 (8.28 - 1.15) The initial check of flexural strength
v exterior = 2 - 17 will be made considering this steel.
= .172 - 0.42 = 1.30 kips/ft. A, = 0.00075 x 6.5 x (17 + 25)/2 x 12
v center = . 172 +0.42 = 2.14 kips/ft. = 1.22 in.2
I
- 330 -
Calculate available capacity at mid-
span and allowable inelastic moment
Final design moments
redistribution at column. See ACI 318-83
Section 18.10.
Allowable redistribution:
0.64
wp + w
= 20% x 1- o.30
>
18.7
IO = = 0.071 < 0.20
5.5 x 12 x 4
-331-
Therefore, with addition of 2 No. 4 bars at
midspan and redistribution of 0.50 ft.
kips from the negative moment area to
midspan, both sections are adequate for
strength. Midspan sections of spans 1 1
a=l-
and 3 have more than adequate capacity
by comparison with span 2.
The flexural capacity at exterior col- 1
umns is goverened by moment transfer = 1 - .63 = 0.37
a=1-l+.58
requirements. Since moment transfer
also involves shear stresses, the two dct3 ctd3
J, = 6 + C,,,dCAB2
aspects will be treated under the heading T+
of shear.
+ 2 ctd ($- cAB)2
9. Shear Capacity
5.2 x 14.63 14.6 x 5.23
a. Shear at exterior Column J, = +
Vertical shear at exterior column cal- 6 6
culated above at 1.30 kip/ft. + 19.2 x 5.2 x 4.02
Total shear at exterior column = 20 x 1.30
= 26.0 kips 14.6
+ 2 x 14.6 x 5.2 ( ~-4.40)~
Assume exterior skin is masonry and
glass averaging 0.4 klf J, = 2697 + 342 + 1937 + 1277 =
6249 in.4
VU=1.4x0.4x20=ll.2kips
Slab shear = 26.0 Total bay moment at column center-
Total Shear = 37.2 kips line:
M, = 20 x (-0.64) =
b. Moment Transfer:
-12.8 ft. kips
At exterior columns, a portion of the
total bay moment is transferred to the Moment transferred by eccentricity of
column by the eccentricity of the critical shear reaction:
section relative to the column center. In
order to evaluate these cases the pro- 4.2
Vg = 26.0 x 12 = -9.10 ft. kips
perties of the critical section must first be
calculated. Net moment to be transferred = Mt
Shear Section Properties
= -12.8 - ( -9.10 ) = -3.70 ft. kips
The critical shear section is taken at
d/2 from the face of the column as per
Amount to be transferred by shear
Fig. 5.19. Referring to Fig. 5.19:
= aMt
Assume d = 0.8 x 6.5 = 5.2 in.
aMt = 0.37 x -3.70 = -1.37 ft. kips
cl = 12 in.
3 7 , 2 0 0 1,740x12x4.40
c2 = 14 in.
= 252 x .85 + 6249 x 0.85
cm = 14 + 5.2 = 19.2 in.
vc = 173 + 17 = 190 psi
ct = 12 + T= 14.6 in.
Shear stress allowable according to
Equation (1 l-36) of ACI 318-83.
A, = 5.2(19.2 + 2 x 14.6) = 252 in.2
CAB + 14.62 x 5.2/252 = 4.40 in.
CC,, = 14.6 - 4.40 = 10.2 in. vc=4fi=4&i%z
g = 10.2 - 12/2 =4.2 vc = 253 psi
- 332 -
Allowable shear stress exceeds cal- rebar jUd = (5.5 - 1.22/2)/12 =
culated stress. Note the discussion in 0.41 ft.
Section 5.3.8.2 concerning the use of @MU = 0.9 x (0.22 x 79 + 0.41 x 60)
Equation (1 l-37) of ACI 318-83 for = 37.38 ft. kips. Much greater than
shear design at edge columns. In this moment transfer requirement.
case, equation (11-37) would permit
an allowable shear at the exterior
column: c. Shear at Interior Column
vc = 3.5 d%tifI + 0.3 x (172) Direct shear left and right of interior
(ignoring v,/A,) columns is calculated in section 8 above.
vc = 221 + 52 = 273 psi Total direct shear = (2.14 + 2.52)20 =
93.20 kips
Check flexural moment transfer: Moment transfer Mt = 20(9.35 - 7.86) =
29.80 ft. kips
Although the flexural moment to be
transferred is small, for illustrative Shear section properties (See Fig. 5.18)
purposes, calculate the capacity of the d = 6.5 - 1.0 = 5.5 in.
section of width equal to the width of
d + cl = 5.5 + 20 = 25.5 in.
thecolumn plus l-1/2slabthicknesses
each side. Assume that of fthe eleven at torsion faces, d = 0.8 x 6.5 = 5.2 in.
tendons required for the 20 foot bay d + c2 = 5.2 + 14 = 19.2 in.
width, three are anchored within the b,d = 2 x (25.5 x 5.2 + 19.2 x 5.5)
column cage and are bundled together = 476 in.*
across the building. This amount
Polar moment of inertia:
should be noted on thestructural draw-
ings. Besides providing flexural capa- J = 2 (5.2 x (25.5)3/12 + 25.5 x
city, this prestress will act directly on (5.2)3/12 + 19.2 x 5.5 x
the critical section for shear and en- .25.i
hance shear strength. As previously (7)) = 49,300 in.4
shown, a minimum amount of mild
steel is required at all columns. For this J = 49,300
= 322.2 in.* - ft.
joint the area of rebar is: 12xc 12 x 25.5/2
I
A, = 0.00075 x 6.5 x 12 x 17 = Portion of moment to be transferred by
1 .O in.* torsional shear:
I
Say 5 No. 4 bars x 5 ft. including 1 .o
a= 1.0 - =43.3%
standard nook 1 .O + 213 h
A, = 1 .O in.*
Calculate stress in strand tendon
b = 14 + 3 x 6.5 = 33.5 in. M, = 29.80 - 12.90 = 16.90 ft. kips
MVt = 0.433 x 29.80 = 12.90 ft. kips I
33.5 x 3.25 x 4 Shear Stresses:
- + 169=
fps = 300x0.153x3 93.20
direct shear = v u =-476 = 0.196 ksi
172 ksi
172 torsional 12.90
Fp = - x 24.33 x 3 = 79.0k shear =v=~=0.040
159
F, = 60 x 5 x 0.2 = 60.0k total shear =
T, = 139.0 kips
139.0
= 1.22 in. 318-83 equation (1 l-37):
a = 0.85 x4 x33.5
tendon jUd = (3.25 - 1.22/2)/l 2 =
0.22 ft.
,- I99 f-h
tendon force crossing the critical section
will0.273
b make
= 14<+up
3
0.276,
xthe
6.5slight
=
but33.5
V, in.
component of
deficiency.
M,r = 16.90 ft. kips
- 334 -
instantaneous live load deflection at the
center of the panel would be about 0.28
inches. Permissible long term plus short
term deflection = span/480 = 0.63 in. The
calculated deflections of this structure
are satisfactory.
12. References
(1) Cross, Hardy, and Morgan, Newlin
Dolbey, Continuous Frames of Rein-
forced Concrete John Wiley & Sons,
Inc. New York, 1954.
(2) Rice, Paul F., and Hoffman, Edward S.,
Structural Design Guide to the ACI
Building Code, Van Nostrand Rhein-
hold, New York.
Chapter 6
Detailing
and
Construction
Procedures
6.1 GENERAL
extent that it is or is not responsive to the data
The primary emphasis of this chapter is on given in the contract documents. The Owner and
detailing and construction procedures for build- the Contractor are entitled to reply upon the
ings. While much of the material presented is Engineers approving or disapproving these
also applicable to post-tensioned bridge con- submissions.
struction and other applications of post-ten-
sioning, these applications may require special- The above quotations are presented in this
ized considerations beyond the scope of this discussion relative to detailing and shop draw-
chapter. Detailing procedures for cast-in-place ings to emphasize the importance of this step in
post-tensioned bridges are presented in a the construction process as well as to suggest
separate PTI Publication entitled Post-Tension- the fundamental responsibilities of the design
ed Box Girder Bridge Manual. engineer. While post-tensioning materials fabri-
cators do routinely review projects from an
engineering perspective in development of shop
6.2 DETAILING
drawings, their awareness of the intent of the
In accordance with the procedures followed design engineer is usually limited to the informa-
for most types of construction, details for post- tion communicated by the design drawings and
tensioned buildings are first developed by the contract documents. The post-tensioning sub-
design engineer or architect. Following award of contractor normally does not, have design
the contract more specific detail drawings, calculations or other information on the project
called shop drawings are developed by the necessary for complete determination of struc-
post-tensioning subcontractor as well as by the tural adequacy. For these reasons, the post-
subcontractors for the other materials to be tensioning subcontractor as well as the general
embedded in the project. The shop drawings for contractor must rely on the engineer to deter-
post-tensioning materials are normally prepared mine that the information submitted on theshop
in much more detail than the design drawings drawings is structurally adequate and respon-
and are submitted for review and approval by the sive to the intent of the contract documents.
design agency before fabrication of tendons is It is essential that details of the post-
initiated. tensioning tendons, nonprestressed reinforce-
In cases where construction difficulties, ment, underfloor ducting for electrical or tele-
problems or accidents develop on a project, phone services, and any other embedded items
litigation often develops relative to liability for be reviewed for conflicts during the detailing
financial losses. Such litigation sometimes stage. It often develops that final details for these
evolves around questions as to whether the different materials are shown on separate shop
material supplied in accordance with approved drawings produced by different subcontractors,
shop drawings conforms to the design concept and that these drawings show two or more items
of the project and complies with the project occupying the same space. The ultimate respons-
specifications and drawings as prepared by the ibility for eliminating such conflicts between
design engineer. In a Commentary on Contract shop drawings is considered to rest with the
Documents published by the National Society engineer, architect or other agency responsible
of Professional Engineers in 1974, the following for construction supervision. In most cases
position is taken relative to the engineers details can be rather easily adjusted at the shop
responsibility in such a case: drawing stage to accommodate all embedded
items. When conflicts do arise during the
In approving Shop Drawings, catalog data,
development of shop drawings, or during con-
schedules and samples, the Engineer should
struction, preferential consideration should be
indicate that these items conform to the design
given to the primary structural system which
concept of the Project and comply with the
Specifications and Drawings prepared by him. normally includes the post-tensioning tendons.
Special procedures for detailing beam-column
Once the submission is given to him, the joints to avoid conflicts or undue conjestion are
Engineer approves or disapproves of it to the described in Section 6.2.7.
- 338 -
300-0"
~--
t= --;-Tj
p-6Lc!>..-w 12@20--6;_ 248--0
-?=9
_ ~~----.
/
Fig. 6.1 - Framing plan for a one-way beam and slab parkmg garage
Fig. 6.2 - A typical one-way beam and slab parking garage with formwork and tendons in place.
61-6 I 61-6
I
-I
I 18STR
\ r
r Il8STR I B-2
7 1 \
f
B-9
I B-8
B-9 7
I I
B-8
8-9
5v**-
B-8
B-9
18 STR 18 x 24 column -
TT\
B-2
18 x 24 column - 24 x 24 column
-I
No. of % 6 strands
refer to frame elevs (typ.1
T-
4== 2 cl.
- 340 -
The following sections illustrate typical 6.2.2 f3eams
design detailing practices for most common The beam schedule for one frame of a one-
applications of post-tensioning in building con- way slab parking garage is shown in Fig. 6.3.
struction. In most cases, photographs showing Details for beam B-2 in this frame are presented
tendon installation are provided for construction in Fig. 6.4. fig. 6.5 shows fabrication of nonpre-
projects of the type illustrated in the drawings. stressed reinforcement and post-tensioning ten-
6.2.1 One-Way Slab dons in beams similar to those detailed in Fig.
6.4. However, in the specific case shown in Fig.
The framing plan for a one-way beam and 6.5, the post-tensioning tendon and beam are
slab parking garage is shown in Fig. 6.7. In a continuous over two spans, whereas Fig. 6.4
typical panel, the primary slab tendons are l/2 shows details for a beam for a single span.
in. 270k strand at 14 in. center to center. Detailing of the beam-column intersection in an
Additional l/2 in. 270k strand tendons are used application such as this should be carefully
at 60 in. center to center in the end panels to developed to avoid conflicts between the post-
allow for the increased moments due to lack of tensioning tendon and anchorage and the main
continuity at one end. fig. 6.2 is a photograph of vertical column reinforcement as discussed in
a job of this type with formwork and tendons in Section 6.2.7. Adequate clearance must be
place, In this picture the primary structural slab provided to permit access by stressing equip-
tendons run from left to right across the picture. ment Stressing equipment clearance require-
Temperature tendons occur at wider spacing ments for various tendon sizes are typically
normal to the primary tendons. Detailing of detailed for the different post-tensioning sys-
beam tendons for this teype of construction is tems in the systems data presented in Section
described in Section 6.2.2. 2.2.
One-way post-tensioned slab construction
is also widely used for slabs supported on cast- 6.2.3 One-Way Joists !
in-place bearing walls. In this case, tendon
installation is simplified in comparison with the The floor framing plan for one-way joist
one-way beam and slab example described construction for an office building is shown in
above and in Section 6.2.2 due to lack of a fig. 6.6. The joists span 47-ft., 4 in. between
requirement for detailing the beam tendons. exterior columns with a total floor depth of 24-
,r---7r--..--7r-----7r-----T,
IL---JL-----JL-----JL-
:r---,r------
----A
7,-----.lr-----,,
b L---.Jl------JL-----JL----dJ
lrmp-7r-mm - - - 7r--m-p7r-----,;
!l.___JL_~-~--JL------JL------J,
;r ---,r-------,r------~r--------~,
4
4
,I _ _ _ _ AL _ _ _ _ _ _ JL------JL------A
,r---~T------~r-----~r------~,
,L---JL------JL------JL-e-m-J
,r - - - - or - - - - - - or - - - - - -,r------7,
I L - - - J L - - - - - - J L - - - - - - J L - - - - - - J
,r--m-,r------- ~r-----.-,r-.- .---,
L---JL------Jt------JL--m-mm,c
~,r---7r------7r--.- .~r-.. .-.-,I
I IL---JL----__JL---.-.-JL_ m-J;
! ,r---~r------~r---~---~r---,I
I L - - - J L - - - - - J L - - - - - A L - - - -- - -- -J -, - -
,r---~T------~r-----~~ ~,
1 I L - - - J L - - - - - - A L - - - - - - J L - - - - - J I
, ,T---,r------~r------,r------~,
IL---AL-----AL-----AL-----J,
,r---7r-----7r - - - - - or .---- ~,
IL--AL-----JL-----JL------I
-
l/2 in. Details of the typical joist section are All reinforcement, tendons and rebar, is placed
shown in fig. 6.7. Typical post-tensioning in in two layers.
each joist stem consists of 4-l/2 in. 270k Fig. 6.77 shows an installation of a banded
strand. Nonprestressed reinforcement in joist tendon flat plate. The tendon bands run vertically,
stems consisted of one No. 5 and one No. 4 A and the uniformly spaced tendons run horizontal-
432, 60 ksi yield strength bars. A construction ly in the photo. Fig. 6.72 shows reinforcement
view of a one-way joist building is presented in details over a column similar to that detailed in
fig. 6.8. In this case, steel columns were utilized Fig. 6. IO.
to minimize column size for architectural pur- Sometimes it is desirable to make a structural
poses connection between flat place (and other) post-
tensioned floors and walls. When the walls are
6.2.4 Two-Way Fiat Plate cast in advance of the floor system, post-
Fig. 6.9 shows the tendon layout for a 7 in. tensioning anchors can be cast in the wall with
flat place apartment building as presented on sleeves provided for the insertion of the tendons
the shop drawing prepared by a post-tensioning through the wall and the anchor when the floor
material fabricator. The tendons delivered to the slab is constructed. This detail is illustrated by
job site will be color coded as indicated on the Figs. 6.13, 6.14, and 6.15.
drawing. Groups of two, three, or four strands Flat plate buildings often use more compli-
are bundled together along each tendon line as cated geometric shapes which in turn inherently
indicated by the legend. Tendon hands are not require more complicated tendon geometry.
required over the exterior columns at the top and The use of banded tendon installations may
bottom of the drawing because the slab is provide a practical tendon layout in such cases,
supported by beams. The drawing also shows as discussed in Chapter 5. In some circum-
the stressing and dead ends of the tendons, as stances more complicated tendon geometry is
well as the elongation of the tendons during required, as, for example, the layout of tendons
stressing. Detail F2 showing the location of and nonprestressed reinforcement for a typical
tendons and rebar over the interior columns is apartment floor of the Edmonton House in
shown in Fig. 6.10. Except for the bundle of Edmonton, Canada shown in Fig. 6.76. A
uniform tendons directly through the column construction view is provided in Fig. 6.77
centerline, tendons in both directions have the showing layout of tendons and nonprestressed
same eccentricity in the negative moment area. reinforcement as well as placement of concrete.
Fig. 6.8 - ConstructIon view of forming and tendon Installation for a one-way joist building.
- 343 -
6 x 9lA= 7-l /4 GOLD A = 3-7/8 WHITE
6 x 61A= 6-1/2.. RED 12 x 91A= 7-114 GOLD
I -
6- -
b-
NOTE-OPEN- -
ON LEV. 3 ONLY
bP
-
-
3- -
g-
I iTAlL 7
-
3- - --
3=
;,t
26 x 91A= 7-114 GOLD A= 7-l 14 GOLD 36A= 2-314 BROWN
L 4
6x A= 6-1 I4 BLUE
-
- 344 -
Fig. 6.12 - Arrangement of reinforcement over column of banded
flat plate.
Wall construction
2-#5 continuous
Pour #2
l-5/8-
- 345 -
.6.2.5 Two-Way Slabs With Dropped Panels
Two-way flat plates have been widely used
for spans of under 20 to over 30 ft. By adding
dropped panels to increase the concrete thick-
ness in the column area, spans in the 35 to 45 ft.
range may be constructed with a relatively small
increase in the quantity of concrete and ten-
dons. Elimination of interior columns and longer
spans are particularly important in parking
garages to increase parking space and to make
the garage area more convenient and efficient. A
Fig 6 15 - Outside of wall prior to stresslng the tendons
shown m Fig 6.14 construction photograph of a flat slab with drop
panels is presented in fig. 6.78. Forming for one
of thedropped panels isvisible in the background
Bottom Mat and central stress boxes are in place throughout
the slab. Stressing of central stress tendons is
accomplished in the block-out in the interior of
the slab as opposed to stressing at the exterior
facing. Central stressing eliminates edge pockets
and additional forming for the stressing opera-
tion around the outside of the slab. After
stressing, the central stress block-outs are filled
with concrete.
Detailing of tendons and nonprestressed
reinforcement for two-way slabs with dropped
panels is similar to detailing for two-way flat
plates.
Fig 6 17 - ConstructIon view of a typlcal apartment floor Fig. 6.18 - A flat slab with dropped panels and
of the Edmonton House. central stressing.
- 346 -
6.2.6 Two-Way Joists (Waffle Slab) 6.2.7 Detailing of Anchorage Zones
Waffle slabs or two-way joist construction Design and detailing of the concrete member
may be economical for applications with spans and reinforcement in thearea of tendon anchor-
as low as 35ft. and as high as 65ft. In special ages requires special attention. Specifically, the
circumstances, even longer spans have been following items should be investigated:
built with a modified (large pan size) waffle
layout. In some cases waffle slabs are used for (1) Adequate bearing area must be provided for
architectural purposes such as incorporation of tendon anchorages which utilize bearing plates
lighting fixtures within the space created by the in accordance with Section 3.7.7. Some tendon
pans. This also provides a significant economic anchorages described in Section 2.2 utilize rings
benefit due to reduced costs for lighting fixtures. of steel plate or spiral reinforcement to contain
Detailing for a post-tensioned two-way joist the concrete bursting forces and in these cases
building floor or roof is similar to that used for the projected concrete bearing area in front of
one-way joist buildings except that the tendon the anchorage may be less than specified in
geometry and size must be specified for tendons Section 3.1.7. Details of anchorages presented
in both directions of the slab. Tendon installation in Section 2.2 will generally provide adequate
in a waffle slab is illustrated in fig. 6.79. Fig. 6.20 bearing area. However, special anchor plate
presents typical details for tendon anchorage sizes or details may be required in some
installation at a corner column of a waffle slab circumstances; for example, when tendons are
structure. stressed at relatively low concrete strengths, or
where lightweight aggregate concretes are
used.
(2) Horizontal and vertical reinforcement should
be placed in front of the anchor plate to resist
bursting and spalling stresses in the concrete.
The amount and location of this reinforcement
depends on the size, number and location of
anchor plates with respect to size of the concrete
section, and other variables. Often nominal
reinforcement will suffice for bursting stresses.
In other cases, detailed design of anchorage
zone reinforcement will be required. Procedures
for design of bursting reinforcement are discus-
sed in Section 5.4: 7.
(3) Adequate space and clearance must be
Fig. 6.19 - Tendons in place in a waffle slab as final preparations
provided for anchors, flared ends of conduit,
are made for concrete placement.
access for stressing equipment, and other post-
tensioning system details. Particular care must
be given to detailing of spacing and location of
post-tensioning tendons, anchorages, and non-
prestressed reinforcement to avoid interference
at beam-column, beam-girder, and beam-slab
intersections. The use of bundled column
reinforcement as shown in Fig, 6.27 may be
particularly helpful at main beam-column joints.
Note also in Fig. 6.27 the additional horizontal
ties and vertical reinforcement in front of the
anchor plate which may be proportioned by the
shear-friction concept to assure that the forces
related to the ultimate (factored) column-beam
moment can be transmitted between the beam
and column.
(4) Reinforcement details in anchorage zone
Fig. 6.20 - Typical details for tendon anchorage installation
areas should be reviewed to assure that suffic-
at corner column of waffle slab structure. ient space is provided to permit careful place-
-347-
ment and vibration of concrete behind anchor- tensioned beam is framed monolithically into
age plates. Voids or honey-combing behind relatively stiff columns, the elastic, shrinkage
anchor plates resulting from overly congested and creep shortening of the beam will cause
reinforcement details, or lack of vibration, can high moments and shears in the columns.
result in movement of the anchor plate into the Furthermore, the prestress force in the beam is
member at the time of stressing. This in turn reduced by the amount of force that is required
could cause a more serious failure, or, at a to bend and translate the column sufficiently to
minimum, necessitate repair and delay in accommodate the beam shortening. In multi-
construction. story and multi-bay frames, the effects of
shortening of flexural elements are distributed
, Bundled bars throughout the frame.
I
The restraints due to dimensional changes
can be accommodated in the following ways:
(1) Design or locate supporting elements to
minimize restraint. Relatively long flexible col-
umns may reduce restraint forces to the point
where they can be easily accommodated by
Additional column reinforcement. Lateral load resisting
, vertical reinforcement elements can often be located near the center of
movement so that no restraint develops.
(2) Segment the structure with pour strips or
temporary joints to minimize the movement and
restraint developed during post-tensioning and
due to early volume changes.
(3) Detail the connection between the flexural
elements and columns to permit movement.
Joint details to permit movement between a slab
and a stairwell or elevator core are shown in fig.
.
I-II I
\I
\I
l
l 6.22. Fig. 6.23 shows two examples of joint
I 0
0
0
00 details for concrete slab construction that
L I
i:..
i:..
.... .:.
..:.
.
.:.
.:. provide for rotation and displacement during
9
9
0.
0. 1 post-tensioning and a later structural connec-
.... Additional ties tion. The joint details shown in Fig. 6.23 may
-
1 reduce the shear capacity somewhat. Such
I ;
: : joints require careful detailing, and the possible
0 . reduction of shear strength should be consid-
0 I
I
ered during the design stage.
. , 0.
U In applications of post-tensioning such as
Fig. 6.21 - Typical reinforcement in anchorage zones one-way slabs and two-way flat plates, the
prestressing stress is relatively small. For ex-
ample, average stresses due to post-tensioning
6.2.8 Detailing To Avoid or Minimize Develop- in these applications may be on the order of 150
ment of Restraint to Dimensional Changes psi or even somewhat less. Stresses of this
A primary design rule for engineers working magnitude do not produce large dimensional
with prestressed concrete is to make provision changes in normal sized buildings due to elastic
for movement of the structure in the direction of shortening or due to concrete creep. In such
stressing at the time the prestress force is cases, no special details may be required to
applied. Additional moveme.nt in thedirection of minimize restraint forces. However, even in
stressing will result from plastic deformation or these applications, care should be exercised
creep of concrete with time, as well as from when the building dimensions, or thedimensions
shrinkage and thermal volume changes, and between joints become large, or when the
these movements must also be considered in flexural elements are supported by rigid ele-
detailing connections between flexural elements ments which could produce substantial restraint
and supporting columns or walls. When a post- forces if not properly detailed.
- 348 -
L 3/4 x 7 compressible filter
Fig. 6.22 - Detarls for separation of slab from elevator core or stairwell
6.3 CONSTRUCTION
6 . 3 . 1 Formwork
The forming system is a major factor in
determining the economy and construction
Concrete in shaded section speed of cast-in-place post-tensioned construc-
cast after post-tensioning,
possibly with the column
tion. A five day per floor cycle can be achieved
nln / for the next floor for completely cast-in-place post-tensioned
building projects when careful consideration is
given to the design, and detailing of the forming.
This construction rate can be further reduced by
use of precast bearing walls or precast columns.
Shoring of
fig. 6.24 shows the flying forms used for the
sufficient one-way post-tensioned slabs of the Roosevelt
strength to
support entire
Island project in New York City. Flying forms
column load. have been developed to accommodate compli-
cated structural geometries including up-turned
and/or down-turned spandrel beams. The use of
flying forms or large panel prefabricated forms is
recommended whenever practicable. In all cases,
Metal cone or Styrofoam selection of the basic structural system for a
filler used during
casting of slab
project should be made after careful consider-
l-l l-l
ation of the available forming methods.
For conventional shored plywood and dimen-
sion lumber forming, economy is achieved
through repetition, simplicity of details, use of
reasonable sized shapes, and provisions for
easy installation and removal of bracing.
of sheet material
to reduce friction
Forms should be drilled to receive tendon
stressing hardwareand bearing plates in accord-
ance with the shop drawings. Fabrication and
Frg. 6.23 - Examples of joint details for concrete placement details provided by the post-tension-
floor construction. ing materials fabricator will show end anchorage
- 349 -
details, bolt hole dimensi&ns, tendon identifica- Pre-placed tendons are usually shipped to the
tion, spacing profile, stressing data, clearance job-site in coils about 5 feet in diameter. The coil
requirements for the stressing equipment and is secured by ties at intervals to prevent pre-
anchorage blockout dimensions. mature uncoiling. Each tendon is individually
Forms or scaffolding are often extended de- marked and clearly identified for its location in
yond the tendon terminal to provide space for the job. Tendons may be handled mechanically
the stressing operations. or manually. Care should be exercised in unload-
ing and handling the tendons to prevent damage
6.3.2 Tendon Placing
to the sheathing. Belt or webbing slings are
There are two methods of placing tendons. recommended when tendons are handled mech-
First, pre-assembled tendons may be placed as a anically. Some damage to tendon sheathing may
unit prior to placing concrete. Second, bearing occur in handling. Usually this can be repaired in
plates and duct sheathing may be installed prior the field with duct tape.
to placing the concrete, and then after con- The placing sequence number for flat plate
creting, the prestressing steel and anchorages tendons is indicated on the placing drawings.
may be installed. Supporting ties for pre-placed Coiled tendons should be transported to the
tendons must be adequate to support the tendon deck according to placing sequence number.
weight. When only the duct is placed prior to Each coil should be positioned near the slab
concreting, ties must resist buoyancy forces. edge where the stressing is to be done (shown in
If the tendons are not installed by the post- details). With the coil in a vertical plane, ties at
tensioning materials fabricator, the fabricator the stressing end should be cut first and the
usually provides the technical assistance neces- tendon unrolled along the path that it will take in
sary to instruct job personnel in proper placing, its final position. Remove the other ties only as
stressing, and grouting procedures. Workmen the tendon is uncoiled to help prevent premature
who place reinforcing steel aregenerallyemploy- and sudden straightening of the tehdon. After all
ed to place post-tensioning tendons. Tendons tendons marked for the initial placing sequence
are usually placed before reinforcing steel, elec- have been uncoiled in their approximate position,
trical conduit, and mechanical work. tendons with the second placing sequence num-
- 350 -
ber may be placed as described above. Remain- shimmed so that they are located perpendicular
ing tendons should be placed in numerical to the tendon axis.
sequence. The tubing or duct to form the opening for the
The structural engineer has determined the post-tensioning tendon is normally installed sub-
exact tendon location by careful calculations. sequent to placement of the reinforcing steel. It
Vertical deviations in tendon location should be is made from either 24 or 26 gauge black or
kept to about l/4 in. for slab,thickness dimen- galvanized sheet metal strips formed spirally
sions less than 8 in., and 3/8 in. to l/2 in. for into diameters varying from 2 to 6 in. It is
thicker slabs or beams. Horizontal plane devia- furnished in lengths of 20,30 or 40 ft. and can be
tions which may be necessary to avoid openings, coupled in place with 18 in. long couplers of l/8
ducts, chases, inserts, etc., should have a radius in. larger diameter. Photographs of the tubing
of curvature of not less than 21 ft. are presented in Section 2.2. Tubing location
Concrete cover between tendons and open- should not vary from the location shown on the
ings in slabs should normally be at least 6 in. contract plans by more than l/4 in. at high and
Nonprestressed reinforcing steel may be requir- low points of the tendon profile. When the
ed to control high concrete stresses near voids. tendon is near the neutral axis of the member,
Tendon profiles are maintained by tying to variations of tendon location of up to 1 in. are
reinforcing steel, chairs or other supports with acceptable. The tubing is normally tied with tie-
wire ties. Small tendons (such as single strand) wire to the stirrups at maximum spacings of
should be supported at about 4 ft. centers. about 6 ft. Ties must be sufficient to prevent the
Supports for large tendons which naturally main- tubing from floating during placement of con-
tain an approximately correct profile due to the crete.
stiffness of the tendon should be 10 ft. or less, as After the concrete has sufficiently cured, pre-
required by the tendon stiffness. stressing steel in 12,000 ft. packs or coils is
Placement of tendons should normally pre- delivered to the site. The tendons are then pulled
cede placing reinforcing steel. However, in joists, out of the packs, cut to length, and a Kellums
beams, or girders a reinforcing cage may be grip is fitted over the end of the tendon. A
used with open top stirrups to allow the reinforc- tugger is attached to the Kellums grip to pull the
ing to be fabricated and placed prior to the tendon into the structure. Anchorages are then
tendon placement. Tendons may then be placed placed and the tendon is stressed. This process
down through the open stirrups and secured in is illustrated for various systems in Section 2.2.
final position. Each tendon is designed for a Consult ram clearance charts in Section 2.2
specific location in the structure. Should some for clear distance required for stressing equip-
discrepancy be noted, do not substitute, consult ment.
your post-tensioning materials fabricator. When welding or burning near tendons, care
With the pull through method, only a semi- must be exercised to prevent the tendon from
rigid thin wall tubing is initially placed in the overheating, to keep molten slag from coming in
forms. Prestressing steel is cut to length at the contact with the tendon. Grounding of welding
site and pulled into the sheathing just prior to equipment to the tendon should not be allowed.
stressing. This method of installation was devel-
6.3.3 Concrete Placement
oped in the late 1960s in California and has
subsequently found wide acceptance through- The American Concrete Institutes Recom-
out thecountryfor multi-strand tendons because mended Practice for Measuring, Mixing and
of its inherent advantages. The most important Placing Concrete presents detailed procedures
advantages of this method are -the greatly for these activities which are generally appli-
reduced friction losses due to the reduction of cable to cast-in-place post-tensioned construc-
wobble in semi-rigid tubing - labor for instal- tion. The American Concrete Institute has also
lation is substantially reduced - eliminates the published recommended practices for hot and
possibility of corrosion since prestressing steel cold weather concreting which present special
is installed just prior to stressing - and, prac- considerations relevant to placement of con-
tically no limitation with respect to capacity and crete when the weather conditions are unfavor-
length of a single tendon. able. Much cast-in-place post-tensioned con-
Bearing plates and trumpet assemblies are struction is accomplished in unusually hot or
installed prior to the reinforcing steel when the cold weather. Admixtures known to have no
pull through method of tendon installation is injurious effects on steel or concrete may be
used. Bearing plates are bolted to blockouts and used. CALCIUM CHLORIDE SHOULD NOT BE
-351-
USED IN CONCRETE FOR POST-TENSIONED large enough to ensure that no appreciable
CONSTRUCTION. power drop will occur.
Prior to placing concrete, tendon profiles The post-tensioning materials fabricator will
should be checked at critical locations such as supply simple rules and procedures to follow to
midspan, inflection points, and in negative mom- insure that stressing is accomplished in a satis-
ent areas over columns or walls by measuring factory manner.
from the form soffit to the center of the tendon Stressing is monitored in two ways. First,
diameter. If the tendon sheathing or duct has the gauge reading on the pump may be trans-
been damaged, repairs should be made to pre- lated into force in the tendon at the anchorage.
vent concrete from bonding to the tendon or This information is generally provided in a ten-
from entering the duct. don stressing data table by the post-tensioning
Horizontal alignment should be checked to materials fabricator. Second, the theoretical el-
insure minimum horizontal deviations and prop- ongation of the tendon can be calculated using
er concrete cover at openings. Care should be the formula:
exercised to prevent concrete from entering PL
pockets, sheathing, or anchorage hardware. A Elongation = -
AE
workman should be assigned to maintain proper
tendon alignment slightly ahead of concrete where P = Prestress force in pounds
placement.
L = Length of tendon in inches
Concrete should be placed in such a manner
that tendon alignment and reinforcing steel A = Area of steel in square inches
positions remain unchanged. Special attention
E = Modulus of elasticity
must be given to vibration of concrete at tendon
of prestressing steel, psi
anchorages to insure uniform compaction at
these points. Voids behind the bearing plate, or
The modulus of elasticity of various post-
insufficient concrete strength will cause con-
Crete failure. Careful vibration and propercuring tensioning tendon materials may be assumed as
will eliminate most such difficulty. Voids behind follows:
the bearing plate should be repaired prior to the
Seven-Wire Strand; E = 28,000,OOO psi
stressing operation.
Curing in accordance with American Con- Wire; E = 29,000,OOO psi
crete Institute recommendations should be fol-
Bars; E = 29,000,OOO psi
lowed to insure proper concrete strength.
- 352 -
Stressing equipment supplied by post-ten- understanding with the crew regarding critical
sioning materials fabricators has been carefully elements.
designed and incorporates reasonable factors of Tendon stressing: Jobsite technical instruc-
safety. Occasionally, flaws in material are unde- tion on the proper operation of stressing equip-
tected or the equipment may have been misused. ment is normally provided in accordance with
For this reason, extreme caution should be project specifications by the post-tensioning
exercised at all times as stressing is carried out material fabricator. The inspector must be fam-
at extremely high pressures. THE PRIMARY iliar with the various operations involved in
SAFETY RULE ISTO KEEP PERSONNEL FROM stressing tendons.
DIRECTLY IN BACK OF STRESSING EQUIP-
MENT, OR BETWEEN THE EDGE OF THE 6.3.6 Grouting
BUILDING AND THE EQUIPMENT. Failuredur-
ing the stressing operation may cause serious See Section 3.3 for recommended grouting
injury to any personnel in back of or in the procedures.
immediate vicinity of the stressing equipment.
All of the usual concrete construction safety
regulations apply to post-tensioned construc- 6.3.7 Form Removal and Reshoring
tion. Shoring must be left in place until the
Should stressing reveal that voids exist, (the stressing operation is completed.
bearing plate begins to recede into concrete), Bolts at end anchorages should be removed
release all pressure on the equipment at once; within 24 hours after concrete is placed, other-
remove the faulty concrete and patch the void wise corrosion will cause bolts to freeze.
with suitable material that will attain the required Edge or pocket forms, and bulkheads should
strength before attempting to restress the ten- be removed well ahead of stressing operation.
don. Calcium chloride or admixtures containing Beam or side forms may be removed prior to
calcium chloride should not be used in any stressing with permission from the engineer.
patching operation. Removal of shoring and forms may follow
Should equipment become inoperative or immediately after the stressing operation. After
malfunction and a technical representative is not stressing, reshoring may be required to prevent
immediately available, any reputable hydraulic overloading during additional construction. Us-
equipment repair shop can usually repair the ually reshoring at midspan will suffice, however,
equipment. , standard construction reshoring practices are a
Exercise care in operating the pump to precaution against overloading. Do not wedge
retract the ram. Do not allow pressure build-up shoring tightly against prestressed members.
on the return side, as this may blow the ram seal.
- 353 -
-
Table 6.1
Are fixed end wedges evenly and adequately seated in Are the anchor heads properly machined, cleaned, and
the anchor? protected from corrosion?
Is excessive sheathing stripped at the fixed end? Are the wedges or threaded nuts free of rust and steel
shavings, and of consistent quality?
Is the plastic sheathing of sufficient and uniform
thickness? Is the duct manufactured from quality steel strip with
specified thickness and watertight seams?
Is the grease evenly applied and of consistent texture?
Is the bare prestressing steel free of corrosion and
Does the strand appear to be of new quality, free of
debonding contaminants, and adequately protected
corrosion when sheathing and grease are removed?
during storage?
Are the anchors properly cast with smooth wedge
holes?
Are the wedges free of rust and steel shavings, and of
consistent quality?
Are mill reports and certifications avarlable for the
prestressing steel and other components, as required
by the specifications?
Are the tendon high and low points at the correct Are high and low points of the center of duct at the
elevation? correct elevation?
Are the tendon profiles smooth and correctly shaped Are duct profiles smooth and correctly shaped
(parabolic, circular, or straight) between reference (parabolic, circular, or straight) between reference
points? points?
Do the tendons have excessive horizontal wobble? Are all duct joints properly mated and sealed with
duct tape?
Is the sheathing damaged, and if so, has it been
repaired? Are there any holes in the duct, and if so, have they
been repaired to prevent concrete intrusion?
Does the chair or support-bar system conform to
contract documents? Are there any kinks in the duct which will prevent
prestressing steel installation?
Are the stressing anchors securely fastened to the form
with appropriate pocket formers? Is the support system adequately tied to prevent
displacement and floating of the duct during concrete
Is bursting steel installed behind the anchorages as
placement?
required by the contract documents7
Are the bearing plates securely fastened to the form
Has the method of concrete placement been reviewed
blockouts?
as to its effect on tendon stability during placement?
Is bursting steel installed behind the anchorages as
Has the conventional steel placement been reviewed?
required by the contract documents?
Has the method of copcrete placement been reviewed
as to its effect on duct stability during placement?
Has the conventional steel placement been reviewed?
Are the stressing anchor wedge holes free of grout, Are the anchor heads, wedges and nuts free of
dirt and plastic? corrosion, dirt and grease?
Is a consistent dimension used for the elongation Has the elongation datum mark for the Initial and final
datum mark on the strand? reading been logically and clearly located?
Is the stressing equipment well maintained, and are Is the stressing equipment well maintained, and are
calibration charts available? calibration charts available?
Is the stressing ram operator careful with the Is the stressing ram operator careful with equipment
equipment and consistent from tendon to tendon? and consistent from tendon to tendon?
Are the tendons stressed slowly enough to allow the Are the wedges, shims, or nuts properly seated after
strand to overcome as much friction as possible prior stressing?
to seating?
Are the tendon ends and stressing pockets properly
Are the wedges seated evenly and under pressure? prepared for patching?
After elongation approval, are the tendon tails cut off
well inside the pocket to allow proper grout cover?
Are pocket surfaces sufficiently clean to allow good
grout bond during and after patching?
Reprinted. wth permisslon. from Concrete Construction Magazme (426 South Westgate, Addison. lllmols 60101). Vol 26. No 4. April 1963.
from an artlcle by Raymond F Messer. Walter P. Moore and Associates, Inc
354 -
6.3.9 Slab Penatrations and Openings Place Towers described in Section 1.4.3, it was
necessary to provide stair openings to inter-
To the fullest possible extent, slab penetra- connect floors at 10 separate floor levels follow-
tions in post-tensioned buildings floors should ing completion of the project. Stair openings of
be preplanned. Tendon layouts for most floor
14 ft. by 14 ft. were cut into the post-tensioned
systems provide reasonably large areas of con-
slabs without the use of extensive shoring, and
crete without tendons which permits flexibility in
in most cases, without requiring additional sup-
location of openings and penetrations. For
port beams. Interior designers were asked only
penetration of slabs following construction, it is
to avoid beam locations and end spans when
necessary to locate the tendons and to locate the
locating stair openings, and that did not unduly
openings to avoid tendon damage. In anti- restrict their planning. The process of construc-
cipation of possible future slab penetration, it is ting the opening is illustrated in figs. 6.26, 6.27,
very desirable that the tendon location be and 6.28. After removing the concrete in the
marked on the bottom of the concrete slab as opening location, the tendons were cut with a
illustrated in Fig. 6.25. In this case the concrete
torch while restrained at the edges of the open-
was marked by spraying the forms with paint ing by heavy metal clamps as shown in Fig. 6.26.
along the tendon lines just prior to placement of The metal clamps were used to provide a slow
concrete. Enough of the paint transferred to the release of the tendon force after the tendons
concrete to permanently locate the tendons. were cut. This process permitted detensioning
Forms can also be marked with construction of all tendons through the stairwell openings
crayons or by other physical means to provide a with no damage to the glazing which had already
mark locating each tendon in the bottom of the been installed around the perimeter of the build-
slab. If such a procedure is not followed, it is ings. Tendon anchorages were then reset as
necessary to use a metal detector such as the shown in Fig. 6.27, and after concrete placed in
James R-Meter (available from James Instru- the area in front of the anchor reached the
ments, Inc., Chicago, Illinois) to locate tendons necessary strength, the tendons were restressed
prior to cutting into the slab. at the perimeter of the opening. Finally, forms
In some cases, it is necessary to make large were installed as shown in fig. 6.28, and concrete
openings in post-tensioned floors following con- was placed around the forms to finish the
struction. In the case of the Western Canadian openings.
Fig. 6.25 - Tendon locations marked on bottom of slab by use of Fig. 6.26 - Procedure for detensioning tendons at stairwell
spray paint on the forms prior to concrete placement. openings, Westerh Canadian Place.
- 355-
I .
- 356
Chapter 1
.
Fire
Resistance
of
Post-Tensioned
Structures
7.1 INTRODUCTION
More than 140 full-scale fire tests of prestressed basic data on the strength-temperature relation-
concrete structural components have been con- ships for steel and concrete along with information
ducted in the United States. In addition, re- on temperatures within concrete beams and slabs
searchers have studied the properties of steel and during standard fire tests. Rational design pro-
concrete subjected to high temperatures. They cedures are discussed further in Section 7.7,
have also measured and calculated analytically which includes example calculations of fire endur-
the temperatures that occur in structural com- ance of a post-tensioned flat plate floor.
ponents during fires. This physical and analytical
7.1.2 Standard Fire Tests of Building Construc-
research provides the basis for structural de-
tion and Materials (ASTM E119) W
tailing recommendations for achieving various
fire endurance ratings, and has more recently The fire resistive properties of building com-
made possible the development of rational design ponents are measured and specified according to
procedures for determining the fire endurance of this common standard. Performance is defined as
prestressed concrete structures. the period of exposure to a standard fire before
the first critical end point is reached.
7.1 .l Scope
The standard fire exposure is defined in terms of a
The purpose of this chapter is to present an time-temperature relationship. At. 5 minutes the
overview of pertinent information concerning the furnace atmosphere temperature is IOOOF, at 30
fire endurance of structures with post-tensioned minutes 155OF, at 1 hr 17OOF, at 2 hrs 185OF, and
reinforcement. Information has been gathered at 4 hrs 2000F. The fire represents combustion of
from a number of sources. Results of fire tests of about 10 lb of wood (with a heat potential of 8,000
18 slabs and beams with post-tensioned reinforce- BTU per lb) per sq ft of exposure area per hr of
ment constitute a major source. These results test. Actually, the fuel consumed during afire test
were compared with other information, i.e., tendon is dependent on the furnace design and on the
temperature data were compared with data on heat capacity of the test assembly. For example,
temperatures within unreinforced slabs and the amount of fuel consumed during a fire test of
beams, and then the resulting fire endurances an exposed concrete floor specimen is likely to be
were analyzed. Because the temperatures of the 10 to 20 percent greater than that used for a test of
tendons were in all cases cooler than temperatures a floor with an insulated ceiling, and considerably
at comparable locations in unreinforced slabs, it greater than that for a combustible assembly.
was possible to make conservative recommen-
dations on minimum dimensions for various fire The standard, ASTM E119, specifies minimum
endurances. In addition, results of high temp- sizes of specimens to be exposed in fire tests. For
erature tests of tendon-anchor assemblies make floors and roofs, at least 180 sq ft must be exposed
it possible to determine realistic cover thickness to fire from beneath, and neither dimension can
for anchors. be less than 12 ft. For tests of walls, either
loadbearing or non-bearing, the minimum speci-
As an alternative to achieving fire endurance fied area is 100 sq ft with neither dimension less
through the specified amount of concrete cover than 9 ft, while for beams it is 12 ft.
or use of an undercoat or ceiling, rational design
procedures may now be utilized to evaluate the During fire tests of floors, roofs, beams, load-
fire endurance of structural systems with varying bearing walls, and columns, the maximum permis-
amounts and locations of reinforcement. These sible superimposed load is applied. Floor and roof
procedures make it possible to analyze a number specimens are exposed to fire from beneath,
of options for obtaining a specified period of fire beams from the bottom and sides, walls from one
endurance, and the best solution based on cost side, and columns from all sides.
and other considerations can then be selected.
Rational design procedures have been developed Numbers in raised parentheses designate references listed in
from analyses of fire tests. The procedures utilize Section 7.9
- 358 -
End point criteria for floors and roofs are: 7.2.2 Concrete Strength at High Temperatures
(a) Specimens must sustain the applied load- Fig. 7.2 shows the temperature strength relation-
ing-collapse is an obvious end point. ships for three kinds of concrete. @) Carbonate
(b) Holes, cracks, or fissures through which aggregates include limestoneand dolomite which
flames or gases hot enough to ignite undergo a chemical change at temperatures above
cotton waste must not form. about 13OOF, i.e., carbon dioxide is given off from
(c The temperature of the unexposed sur- the calcium and magnesium carbonates. Heat is
face must not rise an average of 250F or a used up during the reaction so the temperatures
maximum of 325F at ony one point. within the concrete remain somewhat lower than
(d For unrestrained assemblies, based on for non-carbonate aggregates. Also, the resulting
fire tests of restrained assemblies, the products are better insulators than the original
temperature of the steel must not exceed aggregates. Siliceous aggregates include quart-
11OOF for structural steel or reinforcing zite, granite, sandstone, etc. The data for sanded
bars or 800F for cold-drawn prestressing lightweight concrete shown in Fig. 7.2 represents
steel. concretes with a unit weight in the rangeof 105 to
(e For restrained beams spaced more than 4 115 pcf. Note that at 8OOF, concrete retains most
ft on centers, the temperatures given in of its original strength and at 12OOF carbonate and
(d), above, must not be exceeded for the lightweight concrete have nearly all of their
first half of the fire endurance period. For original strengths. Siliceous aggregate concrete
restrained beams spaced 4 ft or less on retains more than half its initial strength at 1200F.
centers and for restrained slabs, the steel
temperatures are disregarded. 7.3 RESULTS OF 18 STANDARD
FIRE TESTS CONDUCTED
Restrained in this case means that thermal
IN THE UNITED STATES
expansion of a specimen is restricted during a fire
test. Two classifications can be derived from fire Data have been published from a total of 18 fire
tests of restrained specimens, unrestrained and tests conducted in the United States on post-
restrained. Only unrestrained assembly clas- tensioned prestressed concrete slabs and beams.
sifications can be obtained from tests of unre- Two fire tests of slabs were conducted by the Fire
strained specimens, in which case there is no limit prevention Research Institute in Gardena, Califor-
on the steel temperature. The most recent versions nia. @ lo) Underwriters Laboratories, Inc., North-
of ASTM El19 include a guide for classifying brook, Illinois, conducted three tests of post-
construction as restrained or unrestrained. The tensioned specimens; one was a slab (11) and two
guide indicates that either restraint to thermal were inverted tee beams. (l*) The Portland Cement
expansion or continuity restraint results in greatly Association fire tested seven post-tensioned
improved fire endurance and that nearly all cast- beams, c7) all of which were modified tee beams
in-place concrete constructions are considered spanning 40 ft. Six tests conducted by the National
to be restrained. Bureau of Standards in 1953 are of historical
100 1
7.2 PROPERTIES OF STEEL AND
CONCRETE AT HIGH TEMPERATURES
Physical properties of steel and concrete are 80
- 359 -
125 1 1 was 3 hr 45 min with no end point occuring. The
specimen had been dried for seven months at
high temperatures prior to the test and the
moisture content of the concrete was low. Based
Sanded Llghtwelghf on the correction procedure for non-standard
moisture content (Appendix A5 of ASTM E119-
83), the heat transmission end point would have
occured at about 4 hr 40 min. No spalling of the
specimen occurred.
Stressed to 0.4 f; during heafmg
Or,glnal strength = f; Sections 7.8.4, 7.8.5 and Reference 12 refer to fire
tests of inverted tee beams prestressed with post-
tensioned tendons. In one specimen the tendon
was bonded while in the other the tendon was
OL----- I unbonded. The superimposed load on the un-
70 400 800 1200 1600 bonded specimen was substantially lower than
Temperature, OF the load on the bonded specimen. Both tests
Fig. 7.2 - Compressive strength of concrete at high temperature. were terminated at 4 hr 15 min even though no
(Reference 8) end point was reached. At the ends of the tests
the midspan deflections were about 1 in. for the
interest, (13) and were part of a series sponsored 17 ft 5 in. spans. A companion pretensioned
by the British Joint Fire Research Organization specimen was also fire tested in the same series.
and the Building Research Station. Noteson each The behavior of the pretensioned specimen was
of the eighteen tests are included in Section 7.8. similar to that of the post-tensioned companions.
Section 7.8.1 and 7.8.2 give pertinent data about As part of a broad series of fire tests, the Portland
these tests which are described in more detail in Cement Association fire tested seven 40-ft beams
References 9 and 10. Both tests involved normal in which the reinforcement was past-tensioned.(7)
weight concrete slabs, 6 in. thick, made with Abstracts of these test results are presented in
siliceous aggregates and post-tensioned un- Sections 7.8.6 through 7.8.72, inclusive. Two
bounded tendons. One of the specimens was an types of reinforcement were used, high strength
integral beam-and-slab assembly; the other was alloy steel bars and cold-drawn wires with button
a flat plate floor. The beams were prestressed heads. Beams were essentially rectangular, 14 in.
longitudinally and the slab was prestressed trans- TABLE 7.1 - Data from PCA Tests (Reference 7)
versely. The minimum clear cover was l-1/2 in. Superimposed Fire
for the slab tendons and 2 in. for the beam Beam Type of Bonded 0, Type of Load Endurance
NO. Reintorcement &bonded concrete lb per It. hr : min.
tendons. In the other specimen, the 6-in. slab
80 Bars Unbonded Normal weight
was prestressed with post-tensioned tendons in 82 BXS Bonded Normal weight
1040
1535
502
4 29
two directions. The minimum cover at midspan 83 BCWS Bonded LIghtweIght 1680 5 01
76 WlreS Unbonded Normal weight 1135 3 04
was l-112 in. 78 WIES Bonded Normal we!ght 1750 3 20
79 WlR?S Bonded Llghtwelght 1740 4 33
Both assemblies were mounted in fixed restrain- 89 WlWS Bonded Normal weight 1760 3 18
- 360 -
companions, and (2) beams with unbonded post- measured steel temperature curves are roughly
tensioned reinforcement had about the same fire parallel to the slab temperatures curves. In each
endurances as their counterparts with bonded case the steel temperatures are somewhat lower
reinforcement. than those estimated from the slab data for the
same distance from the exposed surface. Thus
7.3.4 NBS Tests
the cover requirements based on the slab con-
As noted above, the six tests conducted at the crete temperatures are slightly conservative.
National Bureau of Standards in 1953 involved Based On Fig. 7.3, the cover requirements for
beams manufactured in England and fire tested unrestrained lightweight prestressed concrete
in accordance with the 1932 edition of British
LIGHTWEIGHT CONCRETE
Standard 476. The test procedure of BS476-32 is
similar to that of ASTM El 19except for one major
difference. The loading requirement of BS476-32
called for a superimposed load of l-1/2 times the
design live load rather than one live load. Recent
editions of NS476 have revised that requirement
to one live load -the same as ASTM El 19. Thus
the fire endurances of the six NBS tests were
probably significantly shorter than might be
expected if the normal loading had been applied.
Abstracts of these tests are presented in Sections
7.8.73 through 7.8.78 inclusive. The beams were
rectangular with or without a composite slab.
The steel consisted of wires, 0.1 or 0.2-in. di-
ameter, post-tensioned and grouted. Span was 30 60 90 120 180 240
either 10 ft. or 16 ft. and beams were simply FIRE TEST TIME, MINUTES
supported. Two beams were coated with an inch
thickness of vermiculite concrete. Fire endur- Fug. 7.3 - Temperatures within concrete slabs during fire tests -
expanded shale aggregates - showing strand temperatures in
ances (not adjusted for loading) ranged between hollow-core slabs.
about l-1/2 and 6 hours.
7.4 ANALYSIS OF TEST DATA slabs are approximately 1 in. for 1 hr, l-5/8 in. for
2 hr and 2 in. for 3 hr.
The Fire Resistance Directory,(14) published by
Underwriters Laboratories, Inc., gives unrestrain- A similar, though more complex, procedure was
ed and restrained assembly ratings for many used in analyzing the data for stemmed units and
designs of floors, roofs, and beams. Although inverted teel beams.
many of the ratings are the results of standard fire The procedure used by UL in developing their
tests, most of the ratings given for prestressed classification criteria are essentially those used
concrete assemblies are based on engineering below for analyzing slabs and beams.
studies.
7.4.1 Analysis of Slab Data
In the UL studies that led to the classification
criteria included in the Fire Resistance Direc- Pertinent steel temperature data from the three
tory, measured steel temperatures were compar- tests of slabs are shown in Figs. 7.4, 7.5, and 7.6.
ed with each other and with published data on Fig. 7.4 shows the temperatures of the tendons
temperatures within concrete members during in the beam-and-slab assembly, FPRI SFT-1.
fire tests. For example, steel temperatures during Note that the temperature of the slab tendons
full scale fire tests of 14 hollow-core slabs were with l-1/2 in. cover reached an average of 8OOF
compared with temperatures measured within after 3 hours of fire exposure. This temperature is
plain concrete slabs. Data from four of the tests of far lower than would be expected for l-1/2 in.
lightweight concrete slabs are shown in Fig. 7.3. cover based on the concrete slab temperatures
The basic slab temperature data on which the data. In fact, the beam steel temperatures were
charts are based were developed in the test lower than the 2-in. line on the plot. The low
program described in PCA Research Department recorded temperatures might be due to either or
Bulletin 223.(15) Charts similar to Fig. 7.3 for both of the following items. First, the recorded
carbonate and siliceous aggregate concretes temperatures reflect the average temperature of
were also prepared and analyzed. Note that the the tendon rather than the maximum temperature
- 361 -
that would occur at the bottom off the tendon. plate floor, UL R5084-3, superimposed on a plot
Second, the tendons were greased and wrapped of temperatureswithin lightweightconcreteslabs
and the lubricant and wrapping materials might during fire tests. Again the temperatures are
have kept the tendons cooler during fire exposure. lower, but to a lesser extent than those in Figs. 7.4
and 7.5, possibly because the specimen was kiln-
SILICEOUS AGGREGATE CONCRETE dried prior to the test.
In an attempt to determine required cover thick-
ness for unrestrained slabs with post-tensioned
tendons, an analysis can be made of test times at
which the tendons reached 800F. These values
SFT-1
I%-in. can be compared with corresponding test times
Cover
LIGHTWEIGHT CONCRETE
SFT-1
3-in.
Cover
low during the first 2-l/2 hours and high there- Fig. 7.6 - Temperature withrn concrete slabs during fire tests -
expanded shale aggregates - showing tendon temperatures in
SILICEOUS AGGREGATE CONCRETE UL R5084-3.
B
Corresponding
A Tast Time Distance from
Cover, to Reach Exposed %-A
Test in. 8OOF. hr:min Surface, in. in.
- 362 -
unrestrained slabs with post-tensioned reinforce- CARBONATE AGGREGATE CONCRETE
ment, based on temperatures within slabs with a
3/8 in. reduction, are given in Table 7.3.
Cover requirements shown in Table 7.3 apply to
tendons l/2 in. or larger in size. The values for
1 hr for carbonate and \ightweight aggregate
concretesaregoverned by minimum cover require-
ments for slabs, ACI 318-83.
- 363 -
dimensions roughly comparable to those tested. TABLE 7.5 - Cover Requirements for 8-in.
Wide Beams Prestressed with
On this basis, for beams with post-tensioned Post-Tensioned Reinforcement
reinforcement wider than about 12 in. the cover
For Beams B-in. Wide,
requirements for unrestrained classifications Cover Thickness, in., for
would be those shown in Table 7.4. Fire Endurance
steel Concrete
TYW TYW 1 hr l-112 hr 2 hr 3 hr
FIRE TEST TIME, MINUTES A 1972 reporV@ gives analyses of fire tests of
1. Pretensioned strand. 3. Reinforcing bars.
slabs, beams, and joists and concludes with
2. Post-tensioned bars. 4. Post-tensioned wires. recommended thicknesses of sprayed insulation
for prestressed units. The thickness of sprayed
Fig. 7.9 - Temperatures within concrete slabs during fire tests -
expanded shale aggregates - showing temperatures of corner bars,
mineral fiber, vermiculite cementitious material,
wires or strand during PCA tests of 40-ft beams. or intumescent mastic are given for slabs and
beams of various widths and concrete cover
TABLE 7.4 - Cover Requirements for Beams at Least 12-in. Wide
thickness.
and Prestressed with Post-Tensioned Reinforcement
Even though none of the tests analyzed in that
For Beams at Least 12-in. Wide, report were of members with post-tensioned
Cover Thidtness, in., for
Fire Endurance
reinforcement, the data should be directly appli-
cable to any member with cold-drawn prestres-
steed Concrete
TYpe Type 1 hr 2 hr 3hr 4 hr sing steel. It should be noted that two of the NBS
tests were of specimens coated with vermiculite
Cold-Drawn NW l-1/2 2 2-l/2 3
Cold-Drawn LW l-112 l-314 2 2-1 I2 concrete. In each case the fire endurance of the
H.S.A. Bars N W l-112 l-1/2 l-112 2
H.S.A. Bars LW l-112 l-1/2 l-112 2
- 364 -
coated specimen was more than double that of its Fig. 7. II shows the test set-up. Note that the
uncoated counterpart. The data are not directly bottom anchor assembly was centered within the
applicable to beams or slabs with high strength electric furnace. The concrete cylinder was used
alloy steel bars, but would be conservative if to provide uniform bearing for the anchor. In fact.
applied directly. several of the types of bearing plates must be cast
into the concrete. The cylinder also served to
locate the anchor within the furnace. Some of the
7.5 ANALYSES OF RESULTS OF TESTS
cylinders were jacketed with steel pipes. In such
OF TENDON-ANCHOR ASSEMBLIES
cases, the bearing plates were machined to a
AT HIGH TEMPERATURES
maximum diameter of 3-7/8 in. to ensure that the
A number of tests have been performed to plates did not bear on the steel jacket. A load of
determine if anchors commonly used in America about 1000 lb. was applied to the specimen at the
for post-tensioning continue to function at temper- start of the test and maintained during the heating
atures that occur during fires. Reports of these period. A period of 2 to 3-l/2 hours was required
tests are not readily available, so much of the to heat the specimen to the desired test temper-
pertinent data is included here. ature. When the thermocouples 1, 2, and 3 (Fig.
7.7 7), located on the anchor housing and on the
7.51 Tensile Tests of
tendon, reached the test temperature with a
Tendon-Anchor Assemblies
variation of 15F or less, the tensile load was
Three series of tests were conducted at the increased at a rate of about 8000 lb. per minute
Portland Cement Association Laboratory. In two until failure occurred.
of the series, tests were performed at various
temperatures between 600F and lOOOF, and 70F. Results of the two series of tests conducted at
7OF, 7OOF, 8OOF, 9OOF, and lOOOF, are shown in
In the other series, twelve types of tendon-anchor
Fig. 7.72. Series No. 1 consisted of 0.6-in.
assemblies were tested at 800F and at 70F.
Results of these tests were compared with results diameter strand and a rather massive anchor-
of tensile tests of tendons in which the anchors bearing plate assembly. Both the strand size and
were not heated. the anchor are among the largest in use in
America. They were selected for this series of
;TOP Anchor Assembly
tests because the investigators felt that large
tendon anchor assemblies might be morevulner-
able to heat than smaller ones. Series 12 con-
c 1 sisted of l/2-in. strand and small anchor-bearing
plate assemblies. Duplicate tests were conducted
i--Slrond,
Wtre or
Ear
Anchor Assembly
Showina ~ocottons
of Thermocouples
Electric
n
4 hssx 12 Concrete
Cylinder with
Longltudtinol
C e n t e r Hole Furnace
steel Beormq
Plate
Bottom Anchor
Asacmbl y Furnace
Thermocouple
- 365 -
at 7OF, 7OOF, and 9OOF and triplicate tests at As noted above, the results of Series No. 9 are not
800F. Relatively small differences in the breaking directly comparable to the others since the
loads occurred for duplicate and triplicate tests at temperature-strength relationship for 215 ksi
a specific temperature. Fig. 7.72shows the results hot-rolled steel is probably different than that of
of these tests compared with the tensile strength- cold-drawn strand. From Fig. 7.7 it can be seen
temperature relationship of cold-drawn steel that high strength alloy steel bars (145 ksi) have
strand determined by Abrams and Cruz@) from about 80% of their 70F strength at 800F. Even
tests in which the anchors were not heated. It though the value of 68% for Series No. 9 is lower
can be noted that the test results compare favor- than that for 145-ksi bars, it is considerably
ably with those for strand, differing by 3 percent- higher than the value for 270-ksi cold-drawn
age points or less in all cases. Thus it appears steel, and thus seems to be reasonable.
reasonable to assume that the temperature- From these tests it appears that the anchor does
strength relationships of tendon-anchor assem-
not influence the temperature-strength relation-
blies are about the same as those for the tendon
ship significantly. It should be noted that the
alone.
tendon-anchor assemblies represented a wide
In the third series of tests, twelve typesof tendon- spectrum of those in use in America. it does not
anchor assemblies were tested at temperatures appear that the mass of the anchor has a signifi-
of 800F and 70F. Eight assemblies made use of cant influence on the behavior at high tem-
1.2-in. diameter seven-wire strand, two used peratures.
0.6-in. strand, one used l/4-in. diameter button-
headed wire, and one a 5/8-in. diameter deformed
bar. Fig. 7.73shows the results of the twelve 800F
tests compared with the comparable value report-
ed by Abrams and Cruz@) for strand at 800F. The
value shown for Series No. 9 is not directly
comparable to the others because the tendon
was a 5/8-in. diameter hot-rolled bar having a
tensile strength of 215 ksi. The other tendons
were 270ksi cold-drawn strand or 240-ksi wire.
Note that the average variation from that for
strand was less than 2 percentage points and the
maximum variation was about 4 percentage
points.
X = 2 4 g o . Chrome1 -olumel t h e r m o c o u p l e
L i
PLAN
I r- --_I
ELEVATION
Dimensions fin Inches
Dlmenslon A B C D E F Stronci Sue
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 Specimen A 3 I(/2 214 178 ?8 I/8 0 6111
Specnmen B 112 212 3 314 I I 12 I
SERIES NUMBER
Fig. 7.13 - Results of tests made at 800F compared with value Fig. 7.14 - Details of strand-anchor assemblies embedded in slab
obtained for cold-drawn strand at same temperature.
- 366 -
7.5.2 Fire Tests to Study the Effects of massive; concrete cover thicknesses beneath the
Cover on Tendons and Anchors strand were l-1/2 in., 2-l/4 in. and 3-in. In Speci-
men B, tendons were l/2 in. strand with small
In most post-tensioned structures, exposure to anchors, and cover thicknesses were l-1/2 in.,
fire is likely to be less severe at the anchor than at 2-l/2 in., and 3 in. Covers to the bearing plates
other locations in the beam or slab. However, in
were 3/8 in., l-1/8 in., and l-7/8 in. in Specimen
some cases, the anchors are situated in vulner- A and 3/4 in., 1 in, and 1 in. in Specimen B. Six
able locations. Because the anchors represent thermocouples were located on each tendon
concentrations of metal, it is likely that the strand both at the anchor and away from the anchor.
temperature at the anchor can be different from
that away from the anchor. Fig. 7.75 shows the results of the tests. Tempera-
tures of the tendons at the anchors were higher
To study the magnitude of the temperature differ- than away from the anchor for three of the
ence, fire tests were performed on two slabs in tendons. The difference was insignificant for two
which three tendon-anchor assemblies were em- tendons, and for one tendon, the temperature of
bedded. Slab specimens were 3 ft by 3 ft in plan the tendon at the anchor was cooler than away
and 6 in. thick. Strands in the tendon-anchor from the anchor. Disregarding the tendon that
assemblies were horizontal throughout asshown was cooler at the anchor, the tendons were up to
in Fig. 7.74. In Specimen A, tendons were 0.6 in. about 70 degrees warmer at the anchor than
diameter strand and the anchors were rather away from the anchor. To compensate for the
higher temperature at the anchor, the cover to
the tendon can be increased by about l/4 in.
7.5.3 Fire Tests to Study the Effects of
Awov from / -,
_a
/
/
Different Sheathing Materials for
Unbonding
In America, unbonded post-tensioned tendons
have been greased and sheathed with either kraft
paper or plastic. Paper sheathing is now obsolete.
Plastic sheathing which is now used by all fabri-
cators is in the form of a continuous tube. A fire
test was conducted at the Portland Cement
Association Laboratory to determine if the sheath-
ing material affects the tendon temperature dur-
ing exposure to fire.
30 60 90 120 180 240
The fire test specimen consisted of a concrete
FIRE TEST TIME, MINUTES
(a) Specimen A
slab in which some strands were sheathed with
paper and some with plastic. The 4 in. thick slab
specimen, which was 3 ft by 3 ft in plan, contain-
ed two layers of sheathed strand. Four strands in
the east-west direction had l-in. cover and four in
the north-south direction had 2-in. cover. Ateach
level, the first and third strands were sheathed
with paper and the other two with plastic. Two
thermocouples were positioned on each strand,
one at midspan and the other 12 in. away. The
thermocouples were located on the strand within
the sheaths.
The slab specimen was exposed to a standard
(ASTM E119) fire exposure for 2-l/2 hours.
During the test, thermocouple readings were
60 90 120 180 240 monitored and compared. With l-in. cover,
FIRE TEST TIME, MINUTES strands with paper sheathing were about 15 to 30
lb) Specimen B degrees F cooler than those with plastic sheaths.
Fig. 7.15 - Temperatures wlthln concrete during fire tests - With 2-in. cover, strands with paper sheaths were
compared with temperatures at and away from anchors. 1OF cooler to 15F warmer than those with plastic
- 367 -
sheaths. These differences are not considered to post-tensioned reinforcement behave about the
be significant because of the usual variations in same as reinforced concrete slabs of the same
temperature readings of embedded metal in dimensions. Accordingly the cover for post-
concrete. Thus it appears that the type of sheath- tensioned tendons in slabs should be the same as
ing material (paper or plastic) has only a minor the cover for reinforcing steel in slabs. Cover
influence on the strand temperature and does not thicknesses are suggested in Table 7.7 for slabs
affect the concrete cover requirements signi- with post-tensioned tendons made of cold-drawn
ficantly. steel.
7.6 RECOMMENDATIONS FOR MINIMUM TABLE 7.6 - Suggested Concrete Slab Thickness Requirements
for Various Fire Endurances
DIMENSIONS FOR VARIOUS FIRE
RESISTIVE CLASSIFICATIONS Slab Thickness, in., for
Aggregate Fire Endurance Indicated
7.6.1 Slabs Tvpe 1 h r l-1/2 hr 2 hr 3 hr 4 hr
For heat transmission, i.e., temperature rise of Carbonate 3.114 4-118 4-518 5-314 6-518
Siliceous 3-l/2 4-114 5 6-l/4 7
250F of the unexposed surface, the thickness
Lightweight 2.518 3-114 3.314 4-518 5-114
requirements for concrete slabs should be the
same whether the concrete is plain, reinforced, or
prestressed. Table 7.6 gives slab thicknesses TABLE 7.7 - Suggested Concrete Cover Thickness for Slabs Pre-
suggested in PCA Research Department Bulletin stressed with Post-Tensioned Reinforcement
223(15).
Cover Thickness, in., for
Cover thicknesses for post-tensioned tendons in Restrained or Aggregate Fire Endurance of
unrestrained slabs are determined from results of Unrestrained Type 1 hr l-1/2 hr 2 tir 3 hr 4 hr
fire tests of restrained specimens by the elapsed U n r e s t r a i n e d Carbonate 314 l-1116 t-318 t-718 -
time during a fire test until the tendons reach a U n r e s t r a i n e d Siliceous 314 l-114 l-112 2.118 -
critical temperature. For cold-drawn prestressing U n r e s t r a i n e d Lightweight 314 1 1.114 l-518 -
steel that temperature is 800F. For restrained Restrained Carbonate 314 314 314 1 l-114
slabs there are no temperature limitations. Fire Restrained Siliceous 314 314 314 1 l-114
tests of restrained slabs indicate that slabs with Restrained Lightweight 314 314 314 314 1
TABLE 7.6 - Suggested Cover Thickness for Beams Prestressed with Post-Tensioned Reinforcement
- 368 -
7.6.2 Beams It is apparent from the above description that
Minimum dimensions for beams with post- the moment capacity depends on the steel
tensioned reinforcement for various fire endur- temperature, which in turn depends on (a)
the stress in the steel, and (b) the type of
ances are functions of the types of steel and
steel. The stress in the steel depends on the
concrete, beam width, and cover. For very wide
load intensity on the member. For example, if
beams, the cover requirements should be about
the steel stress is 50 percent of the initial yield
the same as those for slabs.
strength, the critical temperature will be about
For restrained beams spaced more than 4 ft on 112OF. However, if the steel stress is one-
centers, the fire endurance is twice the elapsed third of the yield strength, the critical temper-
time during a fire test at which the steel reaches ature will be about 1220F. The temperatures
the critical temperature. The suggested cover would be different for cold-drawn steel or
thicknesses in Table 7.8 are based on these high strength alloy steel bars. Thus, it can be
criteria. seen that if the load intensity is decreased the
fire endurance will increase. Through rational
For beams or joists less than 8 in. wide, the UL
requirements for pretensioned stemmed mem- design procedures, it is possible to estimate
the increase in fire endurance due to a
bers can be used for members with post-tension-
ed cold-drawn steel. Beams or joists with post- decrease in load intensity.
tensioned high strength alloy steel bars and b) Continuous slabs and beams - Structures
narrower than 8 in. should have the same cover that are continuous or otherwise statically
as reinforced concrete joists of the same size and indeterminate, undergo changes in moments
fire endurance. when subjected to fire.(s)It should be noted
that this is different than simply supported
7.6.3 Anchor Protection members where the applied moments at a
The cover to the prestressing steel at the anchor section remain constant during fire exposure.
should be at least l/4 in. greater than that Consider a two-span continuous slab with
required away from the anchor. Minimum cover rocker-rollers at the outer supports. During
to the steel bearing plate should beat least 1 in. in fire exposure from beneath, the underside of
beams and 3/4 in. in slabs. the slab expands more than the top. This
differential heating causes the ends of the
slab to tend to lift from the outer supports thus
7.7 RATIONiL DESIGN PROCEDURES increasing the reaction at the interior support.
This action results in a redistribution of
7.7.1 General moments, i.e., the negative moment at the
As background for the discussion of rational interior support increases while the positive
moments decrease.
design procedures for evaluating the behavior of
structures during fires, three types of flexural During the course of a fire, the negative
members will be discussed briefly. moment reinforcement remains cooler than
a) Simply supported slabs or beams - Consider the positive moment reinforcement because
a simply supported reinforced concrete slab it is better protected from the fire. Thus the
subjected to fire from below. Assume that the increase in negative moment can be accom-
ends of the slab are free to rotate and expan- modated. The resulting decrease in positive
sion can occur without restriction. Assume moment means that the positive moment
also that the reinforcement consists of steel can withstand a higher temperature
straight bars located near the bottom of the before failure will occur. Thus the fire endur-
slab. With the underside of the slab exposed ance of a continuous member is generally
to fire, the bottom will expand more than the significantly longer than that of a simply
top, and theslab will deflect. Also, the strength supported member having the same cover
of the concrete and steel near the bottom of and load intensity.
the slab will decrease as the temperature Cl Members in which restraint to thermal expan-
increases. When the moment capacity of the sion occurs - If a fire occurs beneath a small
section is reduced to applied moment, flex- interior portion of a large reinforced concrete
ural collapse will occur. Such behavior has slab, the heated portion will tend to expand
been clearly demonstrated in prestressed as and push against the surrounding part of the
well as reinforced concrete members.(2) slab. In turn, the unheated part of the slab
- 369 -
exerts comoressive forces on the heated where fps= stress in prestressed reinforce-
portion. The compressive force, or thrust, ment at nominal strength, psi.
acts near the bottom of the slab when the fire This stress may be calculated for
first occurs, but as the fire progresses the line bonded tendons by equation (18-
of action of the thrust rises as the heated 3) of ACI 318-83 and for unbond-
concrete softens.(J) If the surrounding slab is ed tendons by equations (18-4)
thick and heavily reinforced, the thrust forces and (18~5), respectively, in ACI
that occur can be quite large, but considerably 318-83.
less than that calculated by use of elastic
properties of concrete and steel together with
fpu= specified tensile strength of
post-tensioning tendons, psi.
appropriate coefficients of expansion. At high
temperatures, creep and stress relaxation
play an important role. Nevertheless, the flls3= stress in post-tensioning tendons
thrust is generally great enough to increase at nominal strength at high
the fire endurance significantly, In most fire temperatures, psi.
tests of restrained assemblies, the fire endur-
ance is determined by temperature rise of the
unexposed surface rather than by structural
fpue= tensile strength of post-tension-
ing tendons at high temper-
considerations, even though the steel temper- atures, psi. The value of f,,, at
atures often exceed 1500F. Design procedures various temperatures can be
are discussed in References 17 and 18. obtained by multiplying f,, by the
7.7.2 Design for Fire Endurance percent of strength at 70 degrees
Farenheit from fig. 7.7.
Rational design procedures for fire endurance of
concrete elements rely on basic structural For continuous beams or slabs utilizing con-
engineering principles together with: tinuous draped unbonded tendons exposed to
fire from below, the value of f,,, in the negative
a) Application of the information on structural moment regions must be taken as the same as
behavior outlined in Section 7.7.7.
that in the positive moment region. Since the
b) Use of temperature-strength relationships tendon is unbonded, the capacity at any point
for steel and concrete, as presented in Figs. along its length is limited by the capacity at the
7.7 and 7.2, respectively. point where the steel temperature is highest.
cl Empirical data on temperatures within con- On the basis of the above, it is possible to
crete elements at various intervals during determine the retained theoretical moment
exposure to a standard fire, as presented in strength at a specified period of fire endurance
Figs. 7.3 through 7.9. (say 2 hours) in the positive moment region and
Use of rational design procedures for post- in both negative moment regions of a given
tensioned concrete beams and slabs which are panel in a building. It will usually be possible to
made with bonded post-tensioned tendons are select a critical panel for the fire endurance
essentially the same as those for pretensioned calculations as discussed in reference to the
prestressed concrete elements.(17) Curved ten- design example below. The maximum moment
dons rather than straight or deflected strands capacity at exterior columns must not exceed
introduce only minor differences which do not that which can be transmitted to the column. To
change the design procedures. evaluate retained theoretical moment strength,
it may be assumed that if a fire occurs beneath
As indicated in Section 7.4, tests of post- the floor, a redistribution of moments will occur
tensioned elements indicate that the temper- yielding the negative moment reinforcement. If
ature of the tendons at the end of a fire test can the applied mid-span moment is less than the
be considered to be essentially the same regard- retained moment capacity after redistribution,
less of whether the tendons are bonded or the fire endurance will be adequate. That is:
unbonded. Further, these tests indicate that the
prestressing steel stress at ultimate during fire
M 5 M;o + l/2 (M,,, + M,20)
tests, fpsO, can be estimated from the relationship:
fpso = -
f,, where M,, = retained midspan moment
-
f,, f, capacity
- 370 -
M,,, = retained negative moment Supplemental tendons are provided in the end
capacity at column 1 spans. All tendons are l/2 inch strands with a
guaranteed ultimate strength of 270 ksi. Rein-
M& = retained negative moment
forcing bars are Grade 60, and the 28-day
capacity at column 2
concrete strength is 4000 psi. Slabs are made of
carbonate aggregate concrete and the weight of
If however, the span moment is greater than the the 6-inch slab can be assumed to be 75 psf. The
retained moment capacity, changes must be superimposed dead load is 20 psf and a 40 psf
made in the design. Several options for improv- live load is specified.
ing the fire endurance are available. The options
The first step in the calculations is to determine
include:
the retained theoretical moment strength at 2 hr.
(1) Increase the concrete cover in the positive in the positive moment region and in both
moment region. negative moment regions (over column lines 5
and 6). The moment capacity over line 6 must be
(2) Increase the number of prestressing
transmitted to the columns along line 6, so the
tendons.
maximum value that can be used in the calcula-
(3) Add positive moment reinforcing steel. tions must not exceed that which can be trans-
mitted to the column. It should be assumed that
(4) Add negative moment reinforcing steel.
if a fire occurs between the floor, a redistribution
(5) Undercoat the slab with spray-applied of moments will occur yielding the negative
insulation. moment reinforcement. Thus if the span
moment is less than the retained moment capa-
Of course there are other solutions such as the
city, after redistribution, the fire endurance will
use of a thicker slab, the use of lightweight
be adequate, i.e.,
concrete, or the addition of a fire resistive
ceiling. Also, combinations of the options listed
above can be used. The most appropriate solu- M 5 M,, + 1/2 (M,so + M&J)
tion depends on in-place cost, architectural
acceptability, and perhaps other considerations.
For example, to upgrade thefireenduranceof an
If the span moment is greater than the retained
existing floor, options 1 through 4 are not
moment capacity at 2 hr., changes must be made
applicable, so either an undercoat or a ceiling
in the design as discussed in Section 7.7.2.
might be most appropriate.
- 371 -
Carbonate aggregate Siliceous aggregate Sand-lightweight aggregate
1600 - I I, 117 1600
E
FlRE T E S T T I M E , HR
(a) (b) (c)
Fig. 7.18 -Temperatures within concrete slabs during fire tests. Drawing used by permission of the Prestressed Concrete Institute.
- 373 -
New MA. = 72.6 + 16.2 = 88.8 ft-k ai = I!$!$ (0.43) = 0.59 in.
and a: =88.8 (0.29) = 0.36 in.
72.6 strand M,, = 2.295(72.1)(4.45 - 0.30)/12 =
24
k
-88
-64.4
Wt of #5 bars = 10(12)(1.043)
Option 4: Add negative moment rebars over
Col. 85 = 125.2 Ibs.
Wt of orig. #4 = 6(11)(0.668)
Mio must be increased by
= 44.1 Ibs.
2( 165.2 - 149.0) = 32.4 ft-k
Added Wt = 81.1 Ibs.
Mio must be 88.5 + 32.4 = 120.9 ft-k
- 374 -
Option 5: Undercoat slab with spray-applied Option 2 requires addition of three tendons.
insulation Behavior at normal temperature should be
checked.
From Option 1, l/2-in. additional cover
is adequate. Thus an additional equiva- Option 3 requires addition of 98.9 pounds of
lent concrete cover thickness of l/2 in. reinforcing steel per panel on the positive
will be adequate. From Fig. 7.70 for an moment region.
equivalent concrete cover thickness of
Option 4 requires addition of 81.1 pounds of
l/2 in., the required thickness of spray
reinforcing steel per panel on the negative
mineral fiber or vermiculite cementitious
moment region.
material applied to slabs is less than l/4
in. The minimum practical thickness is Option 5 requires a l/4-in. undercoat of either
about l/4 in. so use l/4 in. of SMFor VCM. sprayed mineral fiber or vermiculite
cementitious material.
Summary of Calculations As illustrated by this example, the advantage of
utilizing rational design procedures is that a
Option 1 requires that the tendons be raised number of options can be analyzed and the best
l/2-in. in the positive moment region. Although solution based on cost and other considerations
raising the tendons will result in a 2-hr. fire can then be selected. Prior to the use of rational
endurance, the behavior and moment capacity design procedures, only one or two solutions
at room temperature may be inadequate, so it is were acceptable - increasing the concrete cover
likely that two or more additional tendons will or using an undercoat or ceiling. Very often the
have to be added to offset the reduction in d and best solution is the addition of some reinforcing
e. Also, raising the tendons might create inter- steel which improves not only the fireendurance
ference with the transverse tendons. These items but also the overall strength and ductility of the
must be checked before the design is completed. floor.
7.8.1
DATE OF TEST: December 6, 1958 AGGREGATES: Sand and gravel.
PLACE OF TEST: Fire Prevention Research Insti- LOAD DURING TEST: One live load (75 psf).
tute, Inc., Gardena, Calif.
SECTION TESTED: Beam-and-slab, post-ten- TEST SPECIFICATIONS: Standard Methods of
sioned, unbonded. Fire Tests of Building Construction and Mate-
rials, ASTM E 119.
PERTINENT TEST DATA: Specimen was 15 ft.
8 in. by 16 ft. 0 in. out to out. Some spalling
of beams occurred during test. Maximum de-
flection: 2.02 in. at 1 hr.; 2.56 in. at 2 hr.;
2.94 in. at 3 hr.; 3.57 in. at 4 hr. Cable tempe-
rature at 4 hr. 11 min.: in slab, maximum
971 F, average 948F; girder 913F.
PRESTRESSING REINFORCEMENT: All cables REPORT: Fire Prevention Research Institute,
composed of four %-in. diameter high tensile February 1959, Fire Test of Prestressed Con-
strength wires coated with mastic and wrap- crete Floor Panel No. I, (SFT-I), by G. E.
ped. Post-tensioned, unbonded. Troxell, FPRI, 19113 S. Hamilton St., Gar-
MINIMUM CONCRETE COVER: 1-X in. for dena, Calif.
slab; 2 in. for beams. DURATION OF TEST: 4 hr. 24 min. exposure.
- 375 -
End point by heat transmission through slab $ Prestresslng tendons
3
was 3 hr. 51 min. Structural end point not 3i--d 1: . .----9 6
reached. T t&n cover =I
14-0 (x17-6)
r
7.0.2 PRESTRESSED REINFORCEMENT: Each ten-
DATE OF TEST: December 19,1959 don composed of five %-in. diameter high ten-
PLACE OF TEST: Fire Prevention Research Insti- sile strength wires. Post-tensioned, unbonded.
tute, Gardena, Cal if. Design stress 144,000 psi.
SECTION TESTED: Two-way flat plate, post-ten- MINIMUM CONCRETE COVER: 1 inch.
sioned, unbonded. AGGREGATE: Expanded shale.
LOAD DURING TEST: One design live load (100
psf).
TEST SPECIFICATIONS: Standard Methods of
Fire Tests of Building Construction and Mate-
PRESTRESSING REINFORCEMENT: Each rials, ASTM E 1 19.
cable composed of six X-in. diameter high PERTINENT TEST DATA: The 140 x 178
tensile strength wires, encased in a stress- slab was supported at the four corners only
gard slippage sheathing. Post-tensioned, un- and restrained on all four sides by grout fill.
bonded. No cracking or spalling occurred on the ex-
MINIMUM CONCRETE COVER: 1 inch. posed surface during fire exposure. Hairline
AGGREGATE: Normal weight aggregates. cracks diagonally across the four corners were
observed on the unexposed surface. Center
LOAD DURING TEST: One design live load (120 point deflections: 2.78 in. at 1 hr; 3.10 in. at
psf). 2 hr.; 3.80 in. at 3 hr.; 4.33 in at 3 hr. 45 min.
TEST SPECIFICATIONS: Standard Methods of Cable temperatures at 3 hr. 30 min.: 570F
Fire Tests of Building Construction and Mate- minimum, 1270F maximum. Slab withstood
rials, ASTM E 119. hose stream and double live load after stand-
PERTINENT TEST DATA: Outside dimensions ard fire test.
of slab were 15 ft. 8 in. by 16 ft. 0 in. with REPORT: Underwriters Laboratories, Inc., Retar-
four supports located symmetrically at each dant 5084-3.
corner and 14 ft. 0 in. on centers in each DURATION OF TEST: 3 hr. 45 min. (No ASTM
direction. Center point deflections: 2.4 in. at end point reached).
1 hr.; 3.2 in. at 2 hr.; 4.2 in. at 3 hr. Cable
temperatures at 3 hr: 545F minimum, 740F
7.8.4
average 1046F maximum.
DATE OF TEST: April 13,1965
REPORT: F i r e P r e v e n t i o n R e s e a r c h I n s t i t u t e ,
February 1960, Fire Test of Six-Inch Deep PLACE OF TEST: Underwriters Laboratories,
Prestressed Concrete Flat Slab (SFT-21, by N o r t h b r o o k , Illinojs.
G. E. Troxell. SECTION TESTED: Post-tensioned (bonded) in-
DURATION OF TEST: 3 hr 10 min. (Corrected verted tee beam.
for furnace temperature lag.) No end point PRESTRESSING REINFORCEMENT: O n e
reached. b o n d e d t e n d o n , f o u r t e e n X-in. cold-drawn
wires. Design stress 168,000 psi.
MINIMUM CONCRETE COVER: l-15/16 in.
7.8.3 AGGREGATE: Natural sand and limestone.
DATE OF TEST: September 12, 1967 LOAD DURING TEST: Beam+filler slabs+live
PLACE OF TEST: Underwriters Laboratories, load = 250+503+1295 = 2048 plf.
Northbrook, Illinois. TEST SPECIFICATIONS: Standard Methods of
SECTION TESTED: Prestressed post-tensioned Fire Tests of Building Construction and Mate-
flat plate floor slab. rials, ASTM El 19.
- 376 -
_ 5- IO ,5:, Fire Tests of Building Construction and Mate-
6 filler slob
rials, ASTM El 19.
PERTINENT TEST DATA: 5 in. bearing area. 17
ft 5 in. c-c bearings. Beam ends restrained by
grout fill. Lateral expansion provided. No
cracking or spalling occurred on the exposed
I L 6 tat ends
or unexposed surface during fire exposure.
Maximum deflections: 0.65 in. at 30 min;
2 :L at $ 0.82 in. at 1 hr; 0.92 in. at 2 hr; 0.94 in. at 3
hr; 0.95 in. at 4 hr. Tendon temperature at
PERTINENT TEST DATA: 5-in. bearing area. 17 centerline was approximately 640F at 3 hr;
ft 5 in. c-c bearings. Beam ends restrained by and 7 1OF at 4 hr. Beam withstood hose
grout fill. Lateral expansion provided. No stream and double live load after standard fire
cracking or spalling occurred on the exposed test.
or unexposed surface during fire exposure. REPORT: Underwriters Laboratories, Inc., Retar-
Maximum deflections: 0.79 in. at 30 min; dant 4123-12A.
0.91 in. at 1 hr; 1.03 in. at 2 hr; 1.09 in. at 3
hr; 1.16 in. at 4 hr. Tendon temperature at DURATION OF TEST: 4 hr 15 min. No ASTM
centerline was approximately 5BOF at 3 hr; end point reached.
and 675F at 4 hr. Beam withstood hose 7.8.6
stream and double live load after standard fire
test. DATE OF TEST: December 17, 1964
REPORT: Underwriters Laboratories, Inc., Retar- PLACE OF TEST: Fire Research Laboratory,
dant 4 123- 12A. Portland Cement Association, Skokie, I II.
7.8.5
DATE OF TEST: April 20,1965
PLACE OF TEST: Underwriters Laboratories,
Northbrook, Illinois.
SECTION TESTED: Post-tensioned (unbended)
inverted tee beam.
_ 5_,_ IO __ 5-
6 filler slab @End
t
I 1 6 +a1 ends MINIMUM CONCRETE COVER: 2% in.
AGGREGATE: Carbonate sand and gravel from
Elgin, Illinois.
LOAD DURING TEST: 1,040 lb per ft. super-
PRESTRESSING REINFORCEMENT: One un-
imposed load.
b o n d e d t e n d o n , f o u r t e e n X-in. cold-drawn
wires. Design stress 168,000 psi. TEST SPECIFICATIONS: Standard Methods of
Fire Tests of Building Construction and Mate-
MINIMUM CONCRETE COVER: l-7/8 in. rials, ASTM E 119.
AGGREGATE: Natural sand and limestone.
PERTINENT TEST DATA: Tested as a simply
LOAD DURING TEST: Beam+filler slabs+live supported beam on a 40-ft span with no end
load = 250+503+880 = 1633 plf. restraint.* No spalling occurred. Average steel
TEST SPECIFICATIONS: Standard Methods of temperatures at midspan: 530F at 2 hr; 695F
- Y// -
at 3 hr; 805F at 4 hr; 938F at 5 hr. Midspan Abrams, and E.A.B. Salse. PCA R&D Bulletin
deflections: 5.1 in. at 2 hr; 7.4 in. at 3 hr; RD 009.01B, 1971.
11.3 in. at 4 hr; and 21.5 in. at 5 hr. DURATION OF TEST: 4 hr 29 min.
REPORT: Fire Resistance of Prestressed Con-
crete Beams. Study C. Structural Behavior 7.8.8
During Fire Tests, by A.H. Gustaferro, M.S. DATE OF TEST: May 4,1965
Abrams, and E.A.B. Salse. PCA R&D Bulletin
PLACE OF TEST: Fire Research Laboratory,
RD 009.01B, 1971.
Portland Cement Association, Skokie, I II.
DURATION OF TEST: 5 hr 02 min. SECTION TESTED: T e e b e a m , p o s t - t e n s i o n e d ,
bonded.
7.8.7
DATE OF TEST: January 29, 1965
PLACE OF TEST: Fire Research Laboratory,
Portland Cement Association, Skokie, I II.
SECTION TESTED: T e e B e a m , p o s t - t e n s i o n e d ,
bonded.
26
25 @G @ End
- 378 -
7.8.9 7.8.10
@ End @I End
PERTINENT TEST DATA: Tested as a simply PERTINENT TEST DATA: Tested as a simply
supported beam on a 40-ft span with no end supported beam on a 40-ft span with no end
restraint.* Average steel temperatures at mid- restraint. * Average steel temperatures at mid-
span: 270F at 1 hr; 500F at 2 hr; 715F at 3 span: 235F at 1 hr; 410F at 2 hr; 590F at 3
hr. Midspan deflections: 4.2 in. at 1 hr; 5.5 in. hr. Midspan deflections: 5.3 in. at 1 hr; 6.3 at
at 2 hr; 13.5 in. at 3 hr. Corner spalls occur- 2 hr; 14.1 at 3 hr. No spalling occurred.
red early in the test. Cracking near midspan Cracking near midspan began at about 2 hr 20
began at about 2 hr 30 min. min.
REPORT: Fire Resistance of Prestressed Con- REPORT: Fire Resistance of Prestressed Con-
crete Beams. Study C. Structural Behavior crete Beams. Study C. Structural Behavior
During Fire Tests, by A.H. Gustaferro, M.S. During Fire Tests, by A.H. Gustaferro, M.S.
Abrams, and E.A.B. Salse. PCA R&D Bulletin Abrams, and E.A.B. Salse. PCA R&D Bulletin
RD 009.01 B, 1971. RD 009.018, 1971.
DURATION OF TEST: 3 hr 04 min. DURATION OF TEST: 3 hr 20 min.
*Supported on rocker-roller bearings, thus end restraint was mini- *Supported on rocker-roller bearings, thus end restraint was mini-
mal, mal.
- 379 -
7.8.11 7.8.12
25
i i
@ End @ End
PERTINENT TEST DATA: Tested as a simply PERTINENT TEST DATA: Tested as a simply
supported beam on a 40-ft span with no end supported beam on a 40-ft span with no end
restraint.* Average steel temperatures at mid- restraint.* Average steel temperatures at mid-
span: 230F at 2 hr; 360F at 3 hr; 520F at 4 span: 230F at 1 hr; 410F at 2 hr; 620F at 3
hr. Midspan deflections: 4.3 in. at 1 hr; 4.5 at hr. Midspan deflections: 5.3 in. at 1 hr; 7.1 at
2 hr; 5.6 at 3 hr; and 10.4 at 4 hr. Some 2 hr; 15.4 at 3 hr. Corner spalls occurred early
minor spalling occured early in the test. in the test. Cracking near midspan began at
REPORT: Fire Resistance of Prestressed Con- about 2 hr 30 min.
crete Beams. Study C. Structural Behavior REPORT: Fire Resistance of Prestressed Con-
During Fire Tests, by A.H. Gustaferro, M.S. crete Beams. Study C. Structural Behavior
Abrams, and E.A.B. Salse. PCA R&D Bulletin During Fire Tests, by A.H. Gustaferro, M.S.
RD 009.016, 1971. Abrams, and E.A.B. Salse. PCA R&D Bulletin
DURATION OF TEST: 4 hr 33 min. RD 009.01B, 1971.
DURATION OF TEST: 3 hr 18 min.
l Suppo~ ted on rocker-roller bearings, thus end restraint was mini- *Supported on rocker-roller bearings, thus end restraint was mini-
mal. mal.
380 -
7.8.13
DATE OF TEST: September 30, 1953
PLACE OF TEST: National Bureau of Standards,
Washington, D.C.
2 95X 2.16 cavity I
SECTION TESTED:Rectangular beam with com- whrch post -tensioned
posite slab. wares were embedded
I cement grout
--/
r~.. AL-/
- 381-
MINIMUM CONCRETE COVER: 3.4 in. bottom except for loading. Time-temperature relation-
and 3.2 in. side. ships are almost identical.)
AGGREGATE: Sand and gravel. PERTINENT TEST DATA: Beam was simply
LOAD DURING TEST: Dead load plus 1.5 live supported on a 16-ft. span. Beam was subjected
loads. Total load was 59,600 Ibs. Live load ap- to fire for over 6 hours and had not failed
plied equally at four points. when test was stopped.
TEST SPECIFICATIONS: British Standard 476, REPORT: Fire Resistance of Prestressed Con-
of 1932. (This is comparable to ASTM E 119 crete Beams, by L.A. Ashton and S.C.C. Bate,
except for loading. Time-temperature relation- Journal ACI, 1961.
ships are almost identical.) DURATION OF TEST: 6 hr. 3 min.
PERTINENT TEST DATA: Beam was simply
supported on 16-ft. span. End point was
reached at 2 hr. 35 min. after the concrete
cover collapsed, at which time 15 of the 24 7.8.17
wires broke. DATE OF TEST: November 9,1953
REPORT: Fire Resistance of Prestressed Con- PLACE OF TEST: National Bureau of Standards,
crete Beams, by L. A. Ashton and S.C.C. Washington, D.C.
Bate, Journal ACI, May 1961.
SECTION TESTED: Rectangular beam
DURATION OF TEST: 2 hr. 35 min.
7.8.16
DATE OF TEST: October 30,1953 5 0,
* oi
PLACE OF TEST: National Bureau of Standards, i
- 2.16~ 2.95covity in
Washington, D.C. I rx--
SECTION TESTED: Rectangular beam with com- -L-2- which post-tensioned
wires were embedded
posite slab coated with vermiculite concrete. 1
1
in cement grout
- 382 -
7.8.18 7.9 REFERENCES
DATE OF TEST: November 18,1953 1. ASTM Designation: E119-83, Standard Methods of Fire
Tests of Building Construction and Materials, Vol. 04.07,
PLACE OF TEST: National Bureau of Standards, ASTM Book ofStandards. American Society for Testing and
Washington, D.C. Materials.
2. Gustaferro, A.H., and Selvaggio, S.L.. Fire Endurance of
SECTION TESTED: Rectangular beam coated Simply Supported Prestressed Concrete Slabs, Journal of
with vermiculite concrete the Prestressed Concrete Institute. V. 12. No. 1, Feb 1967,
pp. 37-52. PCA Research Department Bulletin 272.
3. Abram% M.S., et. al., Fire Endurance of Continuous Re-
inforced Concrete Beams. Report of the Tenth Congress of
the International Association for Bridge and Structural
1 vermiculite concrete Engineering, Tokyo, Sept. 1976. Published by IABSE
Secretariat, Zurich.
2.16 x 2.95 cavity in 4. Selvaggio, S.L. and Carlson, C.C.. Effect of Restraint on
which post-tensioned Fire Resistance of Prestressed Concrete, Fire Test Methods.
wires were embedded ASTM STP No. 344. American Society for Testing and
in cement grout Materials, 1962.
5. Brockenbrough. R.L., and Johnston, B.G., Steel Design
Manual, U.S. Steel Corp., Pittsburgh, Pa., 1968, 246 pp.
6. Abrams, MS., and Cruz, CR.. The Behaviour at High
Temperature of Steel Strand for Prestressed Concrete,
Journal of the PCA Research and Development Labora-
tories, Vol, 3. No. 3, Sept. 1961, pp. 8-19; PCA Research
Department Bulletin 134.
PRESTRESSING REINFORCEMENT: 24 wires
0.20-in dia. embedded in cement grout. Post- 7. Gustaferro, A.H., et al. Fire Resistances of Prestressed
Concrete Beams, Study C: Structural Behaviour During Fire
tensioned. Tests, PCA Research and Development Bulletin (RD
009.078), Portland Cement Association, 1971.
MINIMUM CONCRETE COVER: 3.4 in. bottom
and 3.2 in. side. Also l-in. vermiculite 8. Abrams. M.S.. Compressive Strength of Concrete at
Temperatures to 16OOF, Symposium on Effect of Temper-
concrete. ature on Concrete, American Concrete Institute Publication
SP-25. Detroit, Mich, 1971.
AGGREGATE: Sand and gravel.
9. Troxell. G.E., Fire Test of Prestressed Concrete Floor
LOAD DURING TEST: Dead load plus 1.5 live Panel No. 1. Fire Prevention Research Institute. SFT-1
loads. Total load was 26,200 Ibs. Live load Gardena. Calif.
applied,equally at four points. 10. Troxell, G.E.. Fire Test of 6-in Hardrock Concrete, Post-
Tensioned, Prestressed Plate Slab, Fire Prevention Re-
TEST SPECIFICATIONS: British Standard 476, search Institute. SFT-2, Gardena, Calif.
of 1932. (This is comparable to ASTM El 19 11. Report on Unbonded Post-Tensioned Prestressed, Re-
except for heading. Time-temperature relation- inforced Concrete Flat Plate Floor with Exoanded Shale
ships are almost identical.) Aggregate, Underwriters Laboratories, Inc., R5084-3. Re-
printed in Journal of the Prestressed Concrete Institute,
PERTINENTS TEST DATA: Beam was simply April, 1968.
supported on a 16-ft. span. End point was 12. Report on Prestressed Pretensioned Concrete Inverted
reached at 4 hr. 39 min. when failure by Tee Beams and Report on Prestresed Concrete Inverted Tee
Beams Post-Tensioned, Underwriters Laboratories. Inc.,
yielding of prestressing steel appeared to be R4123-12-12A. PC/ Pubhcation R-119-66
imminent. 13. Ashton, L.A.. and Bate, S.C.C.. The Fire Resistance of
REPORT: Fire Resistance of Prestressed Con- Prestressed Concrete Beams, Journal of the American
Concrete Institute, Vol. 32, May 1961, pp. 1417-1440.
crete Beams, by L.A. Ashton and S.C.C.
14. Fire Resistance Directory, Underwriters Laboratories,
Bate, Journal ACI, May 1961. Inc., Northbrook, Ill., January 1984.
DURATION OF TEST: 4 hr. 39 min. 15. Abrams, M.S., and Gustaferro, A.H.. Fire Endurance of
Concrete Slabs as Influenced by Thickness, Aggregate
Type, and Moisture, Journal. PCA Research and Develop-
ment Laboratories, Vol. 10. No. 2, May 1968, pp. 9-24. PCA
Research Department Bulletin 223.
16. Abrams. M.S., and Gustaferro. A.H., Fire Endurance of
Prestressed Concrete Units Coated with Spray-Applied
Insulation. Journal of the Prestressed Concrete Institute,
Jan.-Feb., 1972.
17. Design for Fire Endurance of Precast Prestressed Con-
crete, Prestressed Concrete Institute, Chicago, Illinois,
1977.81 pages.
18. Reinforced Concrete Fire Resistance, Concrete Reinforc-
ing Steel Institute, Schaumberg, Illinois, 1980, 256 pages.
- 383 -
Appendix
and
Design Aids
A.1 MOMENT COEFFICIENTS FOR CONTINUOUS
POST-TENSIONED STRUCTURES*
Tables are presented to simplify the computation here is not very cumbersome and should be suit-
of moments over the supports in continuous able for general engineering use.
structures under post-tensioning loads. Coeffi- Problems beyond the scope of this paper,
cients are provided for two-span structures and for such as general variation of cross section or non-
symmetric structures of three or more spans. Ten- symmetric structures with more than two spans,
don profiles are parabolic segments. A procedure can be analyzed by slope deflection methods with
accounting for friction losses is included. the fixed end moments computed using the
curves developed by Parme and Parisi3). Fixed
The bending moments in a beam continuous end moments for cubic paradola tendon profiles
over several supports produced by post-tensioned can be computed using formulas presented by
prestressing tendons are usually computed by the Fiesenheiser(5) and those for sine curve tendon
equivalent load method as presented by Moor- profiles can be computed using graphs presented
man( 1). All the forces between the tendon and by Parme and Paris. The moments due to post-
the concrete are applied to the concrete beam, in tensioning can also be obtained by using a general
effect as an exterior load assuming the tendons to digital computer program for frame analysis, such
be omitted. The elastic analysis of continuous as STRUDL(e), if it allows members of the de-
beams under these loads presents no theoretical sired shape with the equivalent loads as the
difficulties; however, it is tedious if performed applied loading. None of these methods consider
manually by moment distribution, slope deflec- the continuity between the beam and its support-
tion or similar methods. Generally, these methods ing columns, except for STRUDL where this
involve two steps: the computation of fixed end effect may be taken into account.
moments; and the elastic distribution of these
moments. The second step is explained in any
text on structural analysist2). The computation Equivalent Loads
of fixed end moments is simplified by various The equivalent vertical distributed tendon
charts and tables. Formulas and graphs for a vari- load imposed on any point of the beam is com-
ety of conditions are presented by Parme and puted as the product of the curvature of the ten-
Parist3) and tables for beams of constant cross don profile and the horizontal component of the
section are presented by Bailey and Ferguson(4). tendon force at that point. It is usually accurate
This paper presents tables which simplify the enough to consider the horizontal tendon force at
bending moment computations for multispan each point equal to the total tendon force, partic-
beams with typical draped parabolic profile ten- ularly if the drape of the tendon profile is less
dons. The restrictions are that the beams must be than 4% of the span length.
prismatic between supports; moreover, for three The tendon profile in an interior span is in the
or more spans, the geometry of the structure shape of three parabolic segments, shown in Fig.
must be symmetric. Except for the two-span case, l(a) as ef, fgh, and hi. Segments ef and hi are the
coefficients are given only for tendon geometry reversed parabolas. Points e, g and i are the hori-
that is symmetric about the centerline of the zontal points of the parabolas and points f and h
structure. Within these restrictions, the coeffi- are points of common tangency. The profile is
cients are given for a range of geometry param- assumed to be symmetric about the centerline of
eters which covers the designs usually encoun- the span with its high point over the supports and
tered. The determination of moments in beams low point at the span centerline.
with long tendons, where friction losses must be The corresponding idealized structure, with
taken into account, is also considered, both for the equivalent loads applied, is shown in Fig.
symmetric tensioning from both ends and for ten- l(b). The magnitude of the upward distributed
sioning from only one end. The method presented loads from the main portion of the tendon is
*From paper in Journal of the Prestressed Concrete Institute, BPC
January-February, 1972, by Peter Turula and Clifford L. Freyer- (1)
muth. w= (1 - 2a)L12
- 386 -
bLE aLE
- 387 -
T A P L F I I N F L U E N C E SFGfJENT COFFFICIENTS FOR 2 SPANS - - l-ST INTERIOR SUPPORT
- LOAn OY OYF S P A N O N L Y -
FIQST 70 O F F I R S T S P A N 00 0.003576 0.004335 0.005180 0.006111 00007132 0.008244 00009447 oa010743
1.AST 70 CIF F I Q S T S P A N 05 0.014459 0.01528 0.020943 Oe024711 Oe028039 0.033333 0.038197 0.043438
LAST 7C OF F I Q S T S P A N 10 0.011971 0.01451? 0.017339 Oa020458 0.023876 0~027596 0.031623 0.035962
LAST 70 O F F I Q S T S P A N 15 o.orl3751 0.011821 0.314124 0*016666 0.019450 0.022480 0.025761 O-029295
FIRS- 40 fF F I Q S T S P A N 00 0.006124 0.007424 0.008871 0.010467 3.012216 3.014119 0.016180 Oe018399
LAST 6n O F FIST S P A N 05 3.017306 0.014918 3.017824 0.021031 0.024545 0.028369 0.032510 0.036970
LAST 6n O F F I Q S T S P A N 19 C.010173 0.312332 0.014735 0.017386 0.020290 0.023452 0.026075 0.030562
1 AST 60 O F F I Q S T SPArZ 15 0.008771 0.017077 0.011980 0.014135 0.016497 0.019067 0.021fl50 Oe024848
pIST 50 F FIOST SPAh! OfI O.OC91?2 3.011034 3.013183 0.015555 0.018154 0.020982 0.024044 Oe027343
LA5T 50 PF FIDST S P A N 05 n.oc9724 0.011789 3.014085 3.016619 0.019396 0.022418 00025690 Oe029214
I-AS1 5 nF FlQST S P A N In 0.007947 0.000634 0.011511 0.013582 Oe015851 0.018320 Oe020994 0.023074
ILAST 5 0 O F F I Q S T SP4N 15 0.006367 0.307712 O.CO9215 09010873 0.012689 0.014667 0.016807 0*019113
I AST 77 0= L A S T SQAY 09 0.017072 0.011679 0.01227n 0.011937 0.011614 0*011309 0.011019 0*010743
FIQST 7:: n= L A S T SPAY 05 0.052652 0.051103 0.349643 0.048264 0.046960 0.045724 0.044552 0.043438
FI5T 7 nc L A S T S4Y 1 P 0.043590 0.042308 0.041099 0.039958 0.038878 0.037855 0.036884 Oe035962
rIO5T 7r) T\= L A S T SPAN 15 0.035510 0.074465 0.033481 0.032551 Oe031671 0*030817 0.030047 0.029295
LAST 40 ?F LAST SPAN 05 0*027?03 0.021647 0.02lOiP 0.020444 0.019891 3.019368 0.018871 0*018400
FI*?T 60 ?= L A S T SPAY C5 0.044R12 0.041494 0.042251 0.041078 0.039967 0.038916 0.037918 Oa036970
=IRST 6r ?F L A S T SPAh: 1 0.037045 3.035955 0.03492R 0.033958 0.033040 0.032171 0.031346 00030562
=15T 6 r L A S T SPAN 15 0.030119 0.029233 0.02A39A 0.027609 Oa026863 09026156 0.025485 00024848
1. b ST SC OC L A S T SPAY 00 0.033143 0.072169 0.031250 0.030381 Oa029560 0.028782 0.028044 0.027343
CI=,T G(! r)F LhST SPAN C5 0.035411 0.034370 0.033388 0.032460 0.031583 0.030752 Oa029963 Oe029214
CID<1 51 nF LA<T SPAN 10 0.02P939 0.028088 0.027285 0.026527 Oe025810 0.025131 C.024487 0.023075
=I?57 53 = L A S T SPAN 15 0.073167 0.022486 0.071843 Oa021237 0.023663 Oe020119 0.019603 0.019113
INIT dnuFhJT Oh LEFT f-NO -0.196969 -0.205882 -0.2142?5 -0.222222 -On229728 -0a236842 -0.243589 -0.250000
U N I T .dgMF*IT OhI QISC(T FUD -0.303030 -0.294117 -0.285714 -0.277777 -0e270270 -0.263157 -0.256410 -0.250000
- - - APPLI=n LOA?S - - -
IJ~IIT r)FAm 1.347 OY I-ST SPAN -n.rl2nRO4 -000?5220 -0.030133 -0.035555 -0.041494 -0e047960 -0.054959 -0e062500
LJ~~IT SFAr LnA? ON i-y? -0.C75757 -0.073529 -0eC7i42R -0-069444 -0.067567 -0.065789 -0.064102 -0.062500
IJNlT A L?AP OP! B0Tl-I S P A N S -0.OQ6562 -0.098749 -0.101562 -0.104999 -0e109062 -0.113749 -0a119062 -0e125000
::
For example, in the third line of coefficients thr 70 and 10 indicate 70% and 10% of the first span.
M
c1 A ff
TAQLF I I INFLUFNCE SFCMENT COEFFICIENTS FOR 3 SPANS - - l-ST INTERIOR SUPPORT
- - SY~FTRIC PRFSTRFSS - -
FNn 70 OF E N D S P A N S (SYM) 0 0 0.002744 0*003350 0.004028 0.004703 0.005615 00006526 0*007519 0.008594
INNFR 70 O F FNO S P A N S 05 0.011096 0.013544 0.016289 0*019339 Oe022703 0*026388 0.030402 0*034750
IN~~FR 70 OF FNO S P A N S 10 0*0091i!7 0*011213 0.013485 Oa016011 090le796 0*021047 0.025170 09028769
INYFQ 7r) O F FNn S P A N S 15 0.007484 0.009134 0.0109R5 0.013043 0*015311 0*017797 Oa020504 0*023436
FND 40 OF E N D S P A N S 00 0.004700 0*005737 0.006899 0.008191 Oa009616 0*011177 Oa012878 0*014719
INNFQ 60 O F F N D S P A N S 05 0.009444 Oa011527 0.013863 09016459 Om019322 09022459 Oe025875 Oa029576
INdFR 60 O F END S P A N S 10 0.007807 Oa009529 0.011460 OaO13606 oe015973 0.018566 Oe021390 Oe024449
INWR 67 O F FN!7 S P A N S 15 0.006347 0.007748 0.009318 0.011062 0.012987 09015095 0.017391 0*019878
cm 50 O F ENn S P A Y 5 00 0.006985 Oe008526 0.010253 Da012173 Oe014291 0.016611 0.019137 Om021875
IMYFP 5 0 O F CNn S P A N S 05 0.007463 0.009109 0.010955 OeO13006 Oe015269 0.017747 0.020447 Oe023371
IYNFQ 50 O F FND SPAh!5 10 0.006099 0.007444 0.000953 0.010629 Om012478 oa014504 O.Ol67lO oa019099
INhlcR 5 0 O F FNn SPANS I5 0.004882 0.005959 0.007167 0*008509 0.009989 0.011611 0.013377 Oa015290
CFNTF7 S P A N 05 0.049709 0.044579 0.047499 0.046467 0.045478 0.044531 0.043622 09042749
CFNTFo SDAN 1P OeO41860 0.040909 0.039999 0.039130 Oa038297 Ob037499 0.036734 oa035999
CFa!TFQ S P A N 15 0.034593 0.073806 0.033055 0.032337 OeO31649 0.030989 0*030357 Oe029750
JrrlIT YONFYTS nd T H F F:JDS -0.151167 -0*159090 -0.166666 -0.173913 -0.180851 -0.187499 -0.193877 -0*200000
- AYTI-SYY1FTQIC PPFSTRFSS -
FN? =O O F FNg SP.(ANTI- 00 0*005131 0.006141 0.007257 OeO00462 0.009774 0*011188 0.012705 Oe014324
I ylh!FQ 7? gC FID SP. -SYM) 05 0.020746 0.024932 0.029320 0.034215 0.039520 0.045237 0.051369 OS057917
INbIrD 70 OF FNO SD. 10 0.017175 0*07055R 0.024274 Oa028327 Oa032719 Oa037452 01042528 Ob047949
I Nh!=R 0 O F EYn S P . 15 0.013990 0.016745 0.019772 Oe023073 0.026650 0.030506 0.034641 Oa039056
F h!r\ 40 OF FUn S P . 00 O.OOR787 0*01051a 0.012419 0.014493 Oa016740 Oe019162 0.021759 Oa024533
I NNFQ f,r) O F FY0 S P . c5 0.017657 0.021134 0.024954 0.029121 OmO33636 0*038501 0.043720 Oa049293
IhJY~? 60 Or F N D S P . IO 00014596 0.017471 0.020629 Oe024073 09027806 oe03182a 09036142 om040749
I NY!F 60 OF Fh!lY S P . 15 0.011867 0.014204 0.016772 0.019572 Oe022607 0.025877 0.029385 0*033131
FYI? 5 0 O F Fbm SP. 00 0.017059 0.015631 0.018457 0.021538 0.024a77 0.028476 0.032336 Om036458
1 *IFR 5 0 O F FND S P . 05 OeOl7953 0.016701 0.019719 Oa023012 O-026580 0~030425 0.034548 Om038953
1 PhFQ 5 0 )F FCln S P . 10 0~011402 0.013648 0.016115 0.018806 0.021721 Oe024064 0.028234 Om031833
IdNED 50 3F FND SP, 15 0*009130 0.010928 0.012903 0.015058 0.017392 0*019908 0.022607 0-025488
IlklIT .(rMFYTS OhI THF FNOS -0e2P2608 -0a291666 -0.300000 -09307692 '0*314814 -0t321428 -0.327586 -0u333333
- - - APPLIED L O A D S - - -
lJYIT nFAn LOAO O N l - S T S P A N -0.027908 -0e027608 -oD032a12 -og03a528 -0.044764 -0m051528 -0.058827
!Jh!IT DFAr, L)A? O N ? - N D -0.058139 -0.056818 -0a055555 -01054347 -0*053191 -0*052083 -0.051020
IJYIT PCAP LnAr, O N 3-RT, 0.006941 o.ooei20 0.009375 0.010702 Oa012098 0~013560 0.015084
I J N I T nFAD LOA) O N A L L S P A N S -0a074106 -0e076306 -0.078993 -0e082173 -09085857 -0.090052 -0.094764
U Y I T n,L. OY SPANS 1 AYn 7 -0*OA1048 -0.084477 -0*08P36f7 -0.092876 -0e097956 -0a103612 -0.109840
IJNIT D.L. ON SPAYS 1 AYD 3 -3.015966 -0*019488 -0.023437 -0*027826 -0~032666 -0.037968 -0.043743
M
TARLF III INFLUFNCF SFGYENT C O F F F I C I F N T S F O R 4 SPANS - - I-ST INTER IOR SUPPORT
- - SYMMFTRIC P R F S T R F S S - -
FND 7 0 O F E N @ S P A N S tSYM) 0 0 0.004215 0.005082 0.006043 0.007097 OaOO0247 0.009493 Oa010836 0.012278
I N Y F R 70 OF FNr, S P A N S 0 5 0.017041 0~020550 0.024433 0.028697 oa033345 0.038383 0.043815 00049643
I N Y F R 70 O F FNn S P A N S 10 0.014lOR O.Ol?Ol3 0.020228 Oe023758 O-027606 0.031777 0.036274 0.041099
INWR 70 O F FYn S P A N S 15 0.011493 0.013859 0.01647A 09019354 0.022489 0.025886 Oe029550 0*033480
FNn 46 OF FNn S P A N S 00 0.007218 O.OOA705 C.010349 Oe012155 0.014124 0.016258 Oa018559 Oa021028
IN\lFQ 60 OF FNh S P A N S 05 0.014504 0.017490 0.020795 0.024424 0.028380 Oe032668 0.037290 Oe042251
INNFQ 6n O F F N D S P A N S 10 0.011990 O*O14459 0.017191 0.020190 Oa023461 Oa027006 0.030827 Om034928
INNED 60 O F FNn S P A N S 15 C.OC9748 0.011755 C.013977 Oe016415 0*019075 Oe021956 0.025063 Oe028398
FNn 50 O F E N D S P A N S 00 0*0107?7 0.012936 0.015380 0.018064 0.020990 0.024161 Oa027580 Oe031250
INNFR 50 O F EN? SPAWS OS 0.011461 0.013821 O.0164?3 O.Ul9300 0.022426 0~025815 0.029468 Oa033388
Ihll\(FR 5 0 O F FNn S P A Y S 10 CeOO9366 0.011295 0.013429 0.015772 09018327 0.021096 0.024082 Oe027285
INkFR 50 O F ENJn S P A Y S 15 0.007498 0.009042 0.010751 0.012627 00014672 0.016889 0.019279 0.021843
T.dO .ln?LF S P A Y S 05 0.03P169 Oe036853 0.035624 0.034475 Oa033398 0.032386 0.031433 0*030535
T*O UI)LF S P A N S 1C Oa0-32142 0.071034 0.029999 Oe029032 0.028124 0.027272 0.026470 Oe025714
T!.n MIn?LF S P A Y S 15 0.026562 OeO25646 0.024791 09023992 Oe023242 Oa022537 0.021875 0.021250
IINIT UnYFNTS OY T H F FNDS -0.232147 -0.241379 -0.250000 -0.258064 -0e265625 -0a272727 -0.279411 -09285714
- AYTI-SYFTQIC P R F S T R F S S -
FNn ?O O F FYn SP.iANTI- 0 0 0.003576 oe004335 0.005180 0.006111 0.007132 Oa008244 0.009447 09010743
INNFQ 7 0 C= EYT, SP. -5Yv) 05 0.014459 0.017528 0.020943 0.024711 0.028839 O-033333 0.038197 Oe043438
INYCR 7 0 O F FNn SP. 10 0.011971 0.014511 0.017339 0.020458 0*023876 01027596 Oe031623 0.035962
1 Y&IF0 70 O F ENr SPm 15 0.009746 D.OllA15 0.014117 0.016657 0*019439 0.022468 0.025747 0.029279
FPlr) 40 O F FND S P . 00 0.006124 0.007474 G.008871 0.010467 0.012216 0~014119 0.016180 O-018399
IYNFQ 60 O= FN, SP. 05 0.012306 0.014918 0.017824 Oe021031 Oe024545 Oe028369 0.032510 Oa036970
lNN=D 60 O F FNn SP. 10 0*010173 0.012332 0.014735 0.017386 OoO20291 00023452 0.026875 0.030562
IhlhlrR 60 O!= FNr, .S~e 15 0.008271 C.010027 0.0119RO 0.014135 O-016497 Oe019067 0.021850 0.024848
CND 5 0 nF Fhp SP. on C.009102 0.011034 0.0131R3 0.015555 0.018154 Oe020982 0.024044 Om027343
IqNrQ 5) O F FNn SPa 05 0.009724 0.011789 C.014085 0.016619 0.019396 00022418 0.025690 Oe029214
INYF 5 0 OF FYn SP. 10 0.007947 0.009634 0.011511 0.013582 0*015851 0~018320 0.020994 O-023874
INYFR 50 c)F FNn SP. 15 O.OC6367 0.007719 O.OC9223 Oa010882 0.012700 0.014679 0.016821 Oa019129
TW l,fIn,oL= SPA15 05 0.064772 0.062867 0.061071 OD059374 0.057770 0~056249 0.054807 09053437
TWO vInnL= SQAYS 1n 0.054545 0.052941 0.05142P 0.049999 Oe048648 0.047368 0.046153 0.044999
TkO tJI?LF S P A N S 15 0~045106 0.043779 Oe04252A 0.041347 0.040229 0.039171 0.038166 Oe037212
!JNIT U?pFLIT=, O N TME FWDS :Oe1')6969 -0.205882 -0.214285 -0.222222 -0.229729 -0.236842 -0.243589 -0.249999
- - - APPLlFn LOPOS - - -
:lNIl nFA" L)Ab O N I-5T S P A N -0.022662 -0.027394 -0.032645 -0.038422 -0.044736 -0.051593 -0.059001 -0.066964
CJYIT r)FA1) LOA ON 7-VD -0.060200 -0.058316 -0.056547 -0.054883 -0*053315 -0.051834 -0.050433 -09049107
IINIT ?-An L?Ar, ON -J-RD 0.015557 0.015212 0.014880 0.014560 Oa014252 0.013955 0.013668 0.013392
IJNIT r\FAn LqAr) O N 4-TH -0.oc1857 -0.002174 -0.002511 -0.002867 -0.003241 -0.003633 -0.004041 -0e004464
!JlIT n=AD LOAr) GIN A L L S P A N S -0.369167 -0.072672 -0.076827 -0~081612 -0.087040 -0.093106 -0.099806 -00107142
IJQIT n.L. O N SPANS 117 AN9 4 -0.084720 -0.387R85 -0.091703 -0.096173 -06101293 -0.107061 -0.113475 -0al20535
IlYl? n.L. O N SDANS 7 A N D 3 -0.044642 -0.043103 -0.041666 -0e040322 -0.039062 -0.037878 -0.036764 -0.035714
lJhlIT 0.L. ON SPANS 1 AND ? -0.007105 -0.012181 -0.017764 -0.023861 -0.030484 -0.037638 -0.045332 -0~053571
UYIT ?.L* ON S P A N S 7 AND 4 -0.062057 -0.060493 -0.05905R -0.057750 -0.056556 -0.055467 -0.054474 -0*053571
TARLF I V INFLLJTYCF SFWFNT COFFFICIFNTS FOP 4 SPANS - - 2-ND I N T E R IOR SUPPORT
- AtiTI-SYMJFT=IC PRFSTQFSS -
0.000000 0.000000 0.000000 0.000000 0.000000 0.000000 0.000000
- - - APPLlE LOAPl5 - - -
UP!17 3FAD LA? Ob l-ST S P A Y 0.006130 0.007392 O.OQR7A9 0*010322 0.011994 O.Ol3P.06 0.015760 0*017857
IJNlT 3rAh LOAD ?\I ?-YP -0.051339 -0.051724 -0.052083 -0.052419 -0.052734 -0*053030 -0.053308 -0.053571
IINIT !?FAD LnAD 011 3-RO -0an51339 -0.051724 -0.052083 -0.052419 -0.052734 -0.053030 -0.053308 -0.053571
IJqlT qFAr\ LAAr, Qh: 4-T+ 0.006130 0.007392 0.00A7PQ 0.010322 0.011994 0.013406 0.015760 0.011057
INIT r)FAr? LOAD OY A L L SPANS -0.090418 -0.ORR663 -3.086588 -0.084193 -0.081479 -0a078446 - 0 . 0 7 5 0 9 6 -0.071428
OhlIT ?eLe w SJAt:S 1 t2 AhJD 4 -0.039079 -0aC136939 -O.O34505 -0.031774 -0.028745 -0.025416 -0.021707 -0.017057
lIF1IT E.L. SV SPAhS 7 AND 3 -0.10?67A -C).ln3448 -0.104166 -0.104838 -0.105468 -0.106060 -0.106617 -0e107142
J\!IT n.La Oh SoAhS 1 AND 3 -0.045209 -0.044331 -0.043294 -0.042096 -0.040739 -0.039223 -0.037548 -0.035714
IlhlT n.L, ON SPAF!S 7 A N D 4 -".045209 -0.O44331 -C.O43294 -0.042096 -0.040739 -0a039223 -0.037548 -0.035714
M-Table III
M-Table Y M-Table YI
TAME V INFLUFNCE SEGMENT COEFFICIENTS FOR 5 SPANS - - l-ST INTERIOR SUPPORT
Ntt-WERS RFFFR TO PFR CFNT OF SPAN - -RATIO OF EXTERIOR SPAN LENGTH TO INTERIOR SPAN LENGTH --
LOADING REVERSE
OFSCRIPTION CURVF 0e650 0*700 oe750 0.800 0.050 09900 0.950 1.000
- - SYMMFTRIC P R E S T R E S S - -
END 10 O F F N D S P A N S (SYMI 0 0 0*003007 Oe004606 oe005493 0.006471 oe007540 OeOOa702 ObOO9950 0*011309
INNFR 70 O F ENr) SPANS 05 Oe015392 0.018624 0.022212 0.026165 oe030497 oe035194 0.040262 08045724
I N N F R 7 0 O F ENr, SPAN5 10 0.012743 0*015410 oe010309 09021662 0*025240 0.029129 0.033333 0.037855
IYhlFR 70 O F FND SPAN5 15 O*O10381 0.012560 0*0149@0 Oeo17646 0002C561 00023729 0.027154 0.030037
FhlO 40 OF FND S P A N S 00 Cle006520 0.007888 0.009409 0.011083 0.012914 O*O14903 0.017054 O-019360
I N N F R 6 0 O F FNr, SPANS 05 0.013100 0.015850 0.019905 0.022269 0.025947 Oa029945 0.034267 0.030916
I N N F R 60 O F END SPAtiS 10 OeOlOR29 0*013103 0001562A 0*018409 Oe021450 O-024755 Oe020320 On032171
INNFP 6 0 OF FYD SPAN5 15 0.008005 0.010653 0.012706 0.014967 0.017439 0.020127 0.023031 0*026156
FN, 50 O F ENn S P A N S OP 0.009689 0.011773 0.013982 Oa016470 0*019191 0.022140 0.025344 0~020702
INN=? 50 O F FNfl SPAN 5 05 0.010352 0.012525 0.014939 0.017597 0.020504 Oe023663 0.027078 0.030752
INV='? 50 OF Fhln S P A Y S In 0*008460 OeOlC236 0*012208 0*014381 Oa016756 0.019338 0.022129 Om025131
INNFQ 5 0 O F END S P A Y S 1= 0.00677) 0.008194 0.009773 0*011513 0.013414 0.015481 0.017716 0.020119
7-m ANI? 4- T H SP A N S 05 0.055161 Ob053437 0.051RlP Oe050294 C9040A57 0.047499 0.046216 oe044999
l-bin Ah!f? 4- TH S P A N S 10 0.046451 0.044999 0.043636 00042352 0*041142 0.039999 0.039910 Oe037094
?-Vn ANI 4-TH S P A N S 15 O-039307 0.037187 0.036060 0.035000 0*034000 0.033055 0.032162 0.031315
CF*!T=Q S P A Y 05 -0.013790 -0.013359 -0.012954 -0.012573 -0.012214 -0.011874 -0*011554 -0.011249
CFhTF? SPAY 10 -0.011612 -0.011249 -0.010909 -0.0105e0 -0.010205 -0e009999 -0.009729 -0.009473
CFNTF, SPAti I5 -0.009596 -0.009296 -0.009315 -0.008750 -0~008500 -0.009263 -0.009040 -0.007020
INIT MnMFYT5 DN T H F cNr\S -0.709677 -0.210750 -0.227272 -0.235294 -0.242057 -0.249999 -0.256756 -0-263157
- ALITI-SV1LAFTR IC PPCSTRFSS -
FND SP.(ANTI- OC 0.003978 o.oo4Ro6 0.005725 0.006735 0.007839 0.009037 0.010330 Oe011720
Fun SP. -SYM) 05 Oe016084 0*@19433 0.023147 0.027233 00031694 0*036538 0.041767 OaO47307
FY SP* 10 0.013316 0.016089 0.019164 0.022546 oe026240 0.030249 0.034579 oe039231
FYQ SP* 15 0.010847 OeO13106 0*015611 0.018366 0.021375 0.024642 0.02016a Oe031950
FNO S P . 00 0.006Rl3 0.008231 0.009a05 oe011535 0*013425 0.015477 0.017692 0.020072
FYT, SP. 05 0.013609 0*016540 0.019701 0.023178 0.026975 0.031097 0.035540 0*040331
FhJT S P . 10 Oe011316 0.013673 0.016206 0.019160 0.022300 0.025707 0.029307 0*033340
FYD SP. 15 O.Ofi9200 0.011116 0.013241 0*015570 0*010130 0.020901 0.021092 0*027107
FNq S P . on 0.010124 0.012233 0.014571 0.017142 0.019951 0.023000 0.026292 Oe029029
FNP, S P . 05 C.010A17 0.013073 0.01556R 0*018315 0.021316 0.024574 0.020091 Oe031070
FNn SP. 10 O.OOAA40 0.010681 0.312722 0.014968 0~017420 oe0200a2 0.022956 O-026045
FNO S P . 15 c.ofl7077 0*009551 0*010105 0~011983 00013946 Oe016077 0.019370 0.020051
T l-l S P A N S 05 0.048033 0.046467 0.044999 0.043622 00042326 0*041105 0.039953 Oe030063
TH SPANS 10 C.O40449 0.079130 0.037A94 0.036734 0.035643 00034615 Oa033644 Oe032727
1H S P A N S 15 0.031475 0.032335 0*031314 oa030355 Oe029454 Oe02t3604 OeO27002 Oe027044
-0~219101 -0.229260 -0.236842 -oe244a97 -0e252475 -0a259615 -0.266355 -0e272727
- - - APPLIFD L O A D S - - -
LJNIT 1FA LqAD OY l-ST S P A Y -0.022644 -0.027379 -C.032633 -0.038415 -0*044734 -o*051590 -0*059013 -00066905
!Jt'IT P)=An LnAO O N 7-hn -0.060347 -0.058423 -0.056618 -0e054921 -0.053323 -0.051016 -0*050391 -0e049043
IJNIT )FAn LnAn O N 3-Rr, OeCl6129 0.1315625 0*015151 0.014705 0*014205 0~013aa0 0*013513 0.013157
lJYIT nFAn LnAD OY 4-TH -0.004168 -0.004076 -09003987 -0.*003901 -0*003010 -0*003739 -0.003662 -0e003500
IJslT DFAD LfiAr) O N 5-Ttc 0.000497 0.000582 0.000672 0e000760 0*00086a 0.000973 0.001002 0.001196
IJIT R=A,n L)Ar, O N A L L SPAYS -0.070534 -0.073671 -0.077414 -0~001764 -0e006723 -0e092291 -0.090471 -09105263
rJNIT 0.L. ml s~Axs i ,7 AND 4 -0.0R7160 -0.OQ9079 -0.093239 -0.097238 -0e101877 -0.107154 -0e113067 -0.119617
tlNTT q.L. nhl SPANS 7+7 A N D 5 -0.043771 -0.042216 -0.040794 -0.039447 -0e030169 -0.036953 -0.035795 -0aO34600
Il!IT .L. ')Y SOAYS le7 Ak:n 5 -0.C10601R -0*011171 -0.016800 -0.022941 -0*0295ao -0.036736 -0.044417 -0.052631
UhTT n.L. nN SPAYS 7 A N D 4 -0.064516 -0.062500 -0~060606 -0*050823 -0e057142 -0.055555 -0*054054 -0e052631
TARLF V I INFLIlFP!CF SIICAFNT COFFFICIFNTS F O R 5 SPANS - - 2-ND INTERIOR SUPPORT
NtI.lRFQ$ RFFFQ TO PFQ CFNT OF SPAY - - RATIO OF EXTFRIOR SPAY LENGTH TO INTERIOR SPAN LENGTH - -
QEVFPSF
CUPvF @*650 0.700 0.750 oe000
- - Svu*FTQIC PRFSTRFSS - -
FV:pI 70 OF Fh!n SPA&S (SYMI on -0.000761 -0.000921 -0.001090 -0e001294 -0~001500 -0.001740 -0.001991 -0.002261
INVFR 70 Or rhln S P A N S 05 -0.00307R -0.003724 -0.034442 -0a005233 -0a006097 -0a007036 -0.000052 -0.009144
INhlFQ 70 O F Fh!n S P A N S 10 -0.002540 -0.0030R3 -0.003677 -0.004332 -0.005040 -0.005R25 -0.006666 -0.007571
Ih!h1~9 70 O F FY? S P A N S 15 -0.002076 -09002512 -0.002996 -0a003529 -0a004112 -0.004745 -0.005430 -OeOO6167
FN, 4 0 O F FNT, S P A N S 00 -0.001304 -0.001577 -0.001001 -0a002216 -0e002502 -0e002900 -0.003410 -0.003073
IhJhlFR 60 O F Fhln S P A N S 05 -0.002620 -0.003170 - 0.003781 -0a004453 -0.005109 -0.005909 -0.006053 -0.007703
IYNFQ bil OF FqO S P A N S 10 -0*O(r2165 -0.0112620 - 0.003125 -0.003601 -0e004290 -0.004951 -0.005665 -0e006434
INNFQ 60 OF FNn S P A N S 15 -0.001761 -0.002130 - 0.002541 -0.002993 -0.003407 -0.004025 -0.004606 -0e005231
F qn 5 0 O= F&In S P A N S 00 -0.001937 -0.002344 - 0.002796 -0.003294 -0e003030 -0.004429 -0.005060 -0.005756
INNCQ 5) CF FNn S P A N S 05 -0.007070 -0.0075c5 - 0.002907 -0.003519 -0.004100 -0.004732 -0.005415 -0.006150
lh!hC~ 50 9F FNl SPAp:S 1C -0aOCl692 -0.OC2047 - 0.002441 -0e002076 -0*003351 -0eOO3067 -0.004425 -0eOO5026
1 Mh!Fp 50 CIF FYP SPAh!S 15 -0*0)1354 -0.001630 - 0.001954 -0a002302 -0e002602 -0e003096 -0.003543 -0a004023
7-vn AY? 4-7~ S P A Y S 05 0.031717 0.032Ch2 0.0323Rh 0.032691 0.032970 Oe033249 0.033506 0.033749
7-yfl A\9 4-TH S P A Y S 19 0.026709 0.026999 0.027272 O-027529 0.02 7771 Oe027999 08020216 Oe020421
l-hln Ah!n 4-7~ 5PAYS 15 0.077072 O*C21312 Oa022537 0.022750 Om022950 O-023130 0.023317 Oe023406
CFh!TFr: SPA&l 05 0.045507 0.045421 0.045340 0.045264 Om045192 Oa045124 0.045060 0 .D44999
CF<TFn SPA&l 10 0.03R372 0.03A249 0.030101 0.030117 0.030057 08037999 0.037945 O-037094
CFNTFQ SPAh! 15 0.071669 0.031609 0.031553 0.031500 0.031450 0:031402 0.031350 0.031315
IIMTT OFh!TS O N THF FNnS 0.041935 0.047750 0.045454 oa047050 Oe040571 oa049999 0.051351 0.052631
- h+dTI-=,YMw=TRIC DQFSTRFSS -
FNn 30 ?= FNr, SP.lAYTI- Or! -0.001326 -0.001602 -0.00190R -09002245 -0a002613 -0.003012 -0.003443 -0e003906
lNh!CQ 70 nF FNn S P . -SYM) )5 -c-J*005361 -0.036477 -0.007715 -0.039077 -0mO10564 -0.012179 -0a013922 -0e015795
IYh!C 7 0 ?F t - Y S P . 10 -0.CO443A -0.005363 -0.0063RA -0*007515 -0e000746 -0eOlOOR3 -0e011526 -0*013077
lNN=D 70 OF FvJD SP. 15 -0e003615 -0.004368 -0.005203 -0e006121 -0.007124 -0e000213 -0.009300 -0.010651
FNfl 40 OF FYn SPe 00 -Ca052271 -0.002743 -0.00326A -0~003045 -0.004475 -0.005159 -0.005097 -0aD06690
INNFF 60 O F FNl SP. 05 -0.004563 -0.005513 -0.006567 -0.007726 -0*00899l -0.010365 -0.011049 -0*013443
INYFQ b,n 9F FNO Spe 10 -0.003772 -0.004557 -0.00542R -0aO06306 -0.007433 -0.000569 -0.009795 -0*011113
lhW=R 6 0 O F =Y? SP. 15 -0.003066 -0.003705 -0.004413 -0e005192 -0.006043 -0.006967 -0.007964 -0*009035
ENn 5 0 OF FYr! SP. co -0.003374 -0.004077 -0.004857 -0.005714 -0mOO6650 -0.007666 -0.000764 -09009943
INNFR 5A ?F FY SPe 05 -n.n?3605 -0.004356 -0.035109 -0a006105 -0~007105 -0a000191 -0.009363 -0a010623
I NYCQ 50 OF FNn SP. 1cI -0.017946 -0.033560 -0.004240 -0.004989 -O.OOSROb -0.006694 -0.007652 -0e000601
IPlhl=D 5n nF F v n SP. 15 -n.on2359 -0.002850 -0.003395 -0*003995 -0a004649 -0s005360 -0.006127 -0a006951
?-h!n A N D 4-TH S P A Y S n5 0.055238 0.055760 0.056249 0.056709 0.057140 0.057547 0.057932 Oe050295
7-h!n AYP 4-TY SPAti. In n.n46516 0.046956 0.047360 0.047755 0*048118 Oe040461 0.040704 0.049090
7-U? AN- L-TY S P A Y S 15 0.03R446 C.03RPlO 0.039150 0.039470 0.039770 0.040053 0.040321 0.040574
IJNIT dOMFNTS O N T H F FNDS 0.073033 0.076OA6 0.070947 Oe001632 Oa004150 Oe006530 0.000705 0*090909
- - - APPLIFD LOADS - - -
IJhlIT DFAb LOAD O N I-ST S P A N 0*006071 0.007340 0.008747 Om010295 0.011907 Oe013024 0.015009 Oe017942
UYIT D E A D LOAD O N 2-ND -0.050851 -0*051358 -0e051834 -0.052280 -0a052701 -0.053090 -0.053473 -0.053027
U N I T r)FAD L?AD O N 7-RD -0.053225 -0a053125 -0e053030 -0a052941 -0e052057 -0.052777 -0.052702 -0e052631
IJNIT OFAD LOAD O N 4-TH 0.013754 0.013058 0.013955 0.014045 0.014130 0.014209 0.014203 oa014354
U N I T D F A D L?AD O N 5-TH -0.001642 -0.001900 -0.002354 -0.002765 -0.003213 -0.003699 -0.004222 -0*004704
tINIT OFAT, LOA? O N A L L S P A Y S -0.OR5R93 -000R5265 -0.004517 -0a003647 -0a002655 -0.001541 -0.000305 -0e070947
U N I T Y.L. Oh: S P A N S 10 AND 4 -0.031024 -0.030159 -0.029131 -0a027939 -0a026504 -0e025064 -0.023300 -0m021531
IJYIT ?.L. c?Y S P A N S 793 A N D 5 -0.135719 -0.106464 -0.107219 -0.107987 -0.100772 -0.109575 -0.110390 -0a 1 1 1 2 4 4
U N I T r).L. 04 S P A N S 1,3 A N D 5 -0.04P796 -0.047765 -0.046638 -0.045411 -0a044003 -0e042652 -0.041116 -0.039473
ltNlT DrL, ON SPANS 2 AND 4 -C.037096 -0.037500 -0.037R7R -0.030235 -0.030571 -0.030000 -0.039109 -0.039473
spans as equivalent to the center span of the for a. Note that the tendon profile is as-
5-span beam. For the 3-span case coefficients are sumed to be symmetric within each in-
given only for the first interior support moment, terior span.
and for the 4- and 5-span cases they are given for
4. Uniform loads applied to specific spans
the first two interior supports. The moment over
for use in computing moments due to
any other support is the same as the correspond-
dead load as well as live load.
ing symmetric support moment if the loading is
symmetric. If the loading is not symmetric, e.g., In this discussion L and I refer to span length and
due to friction losses in a long beam tensioned moment of inertia, respectively; subscripts E, I, L,
from one end only, the moment is obtained by R and C denote exterior, interior, left, right and
reversing the sign of the corresponding anti-sym- center, respectively.
metric component load coefficient as explained Coefficients for reverse curvature segment
in the full PCI Journal article. lengths, other than those tabulated, can be ob-
Within each of the tables, the loadings, con- tained by linear interpolation. For reverse curva-
sidered consist of either uniformly distributed tures of less than 5% the coefficient for the 0%
load segments or applied end moments. In the case can be extrapolated by taking the corre-
first case, the moment M is obtained by multiply- sponding 15% coefficient plus three times the
ing the coefficient by both the intensity of the difference between the 5% coefficent and the
load w and the square of the interior span length 10% coefficient. Similarly, the 20% case can be
Lr; that is, the coefficients are moments for a unit obtained by adding to the 5% case three times the
load intensity applied to a structure with unit in- difference between the 15% and the 10% cases.
terior span length. In the second case the moment These extrapolations give results accurate to
M is obtained by mulitplying the coefficient by about 0.1%. The error due to linear interpolation
the applied end moment ME. is at most 0.3%.
The algebraic signs of all moments follow the Each table for the moment coefficients over a
beam convention: positive for a moment giving support is developed from the influence line for
compression in the top fiber. The moments ob- the moment in the beam over that support. The
tained from the tabulated influence coefficients coefficients are obtained by computing the area
will follow this sign convention provided the sign under the influence line over the segment that is
of the distributed load is positive if it is applied in loaded by a constant distributed load. If the
its usual direction. That is, a distributed dead load coefficient represents the effect of several load
acting downward is positive and a distributed pre- segments, then it is the sum of the area under
stress load acting upward over the major portion each of the segments multiplied by the ratio of
of the tendons is also positive. The distributed the equivalent loads.
load due to the prestressing tendon is always ex-
pressed as that of the major (upward curvature) Example 1
portion. The effect of the reverse curvature por- Consider the 4-span structure shown in Fig. 3.
tion is already included in the tabulated moment The moment at support C is to be computed for
coefficients.
each of the following loadings:
Four types of distributed loads are considered
in the tables: a = distributed prestress load as shown
b = a 1000 k.-ft. end moment acting on both
1. Loads applied to the end portion of the
ends
exterior spans over segment fg denoted by
bLE in Fig. 2(a). Coefficients are given for c = a 3 k./ft. uniform dead load
a b of 30%, 40% and 50%. The end to interior span ratio is 0.75. From
2. Loads applied to the remaining (interior) Table III, the coefficient for the end 40% of the
portion of the exterior spans. The reverse end span is 0.0103. The coefficient for the inner
curvature portion is segment hi in Fig. 60% with 13.3% reverse curve is interpolated as
2(a), denoted by aLE in Fig. 2(a). Coeffi- 0.0150. The coefficient for the middle spans is
cients are tabulated for an a of 5%, 10% 0.0300. So the moment at support C due to the
and 15%. distributed prestress load a is
3. Loads applied to the interior spans. Here M = (0.0103 x 6 + 0.0150 x 4
the reverse curvature segments ef and hi + 0.0300 x 4) 1002 = 2424 k.-ft.
are denoted by aLr in Fig. l(a), with co- The coefficient for end moments is -0.25 so the
efficients given for the above percentages desired moment due to loading b is M = -250
- 394 -
Dcod lood
3k/a
llllltllllllllllillllllllllllllMllllllllf
(01 G e o m e t r y and loodinq
Prestress lood ti
Fig. 3 - 4-span structure for Example 1. considered for these three loadings. Load diagram
(b) was derived by folding the right part of the
structure about its centerline. Load diagram (c) is
k.-ft. The coefficient for unit dead load on all
half the sum of (a) and (b). Load diagram (d) can
spans is -0.0768, so the moment due to the 3
be computed either as the difference between (a)
k./ft. dead load is M = -2304 k.-ft.
and (c) or as half the difference between (a) and
(b). The moment at support B caused by the
Non-Symmetric Loadings
symmetric part of the loading is computed by
As pointed out previously, symmetry is not a using the coefficients in the symmetric prestress
consideration in the 2-span case so only structures portion of Table I I I.
of three or more spans are considered in this sec-
Mes = (2.6 x 0.02103 + 2.0
tion. As long as a structure is symmetric, any
x 0.03493 + 2.0 x 0.0257 1) 502
loading can be separated into two loadings, one of + 600 x (-0.2857)
which is symmetric and the other anti-symmetric. = 268.5 k.-ft.
This division is usually obvious. However, if not,
it can be bbtained by reversing the original load- The moment at support B due to the anti-sym-
ing, taking half of the sum of the original and metric prestress is
reversed loadings as the symmetric part, and half MeA = (1.4 x 0.01840 + 1 .O
of the difference as the anti-symmetric part. The x 0.03056 + 0.5 x 0.04500)502
moments are then computed for both parts using + 400 x (-0.2500) = 97 k.-ft.
the appropriate coefficients. The moments for the The moment at support C due to the symmetric
left half of the structure are equal to the sum of load (Table IV) is
the computed moments; those for the right are
equal to the difference. Mcs = (-2.6 x 0.01051 -2.0
x 0.01746 + 2.0 x 0.07714)502
Example 2 + 600 x 0.1429 = 316 k.-ft.
The moments at the supports of a beam of The moment at support C due to anti-symmetric
constant cross section with four equal spans are prestress is zero.
to be computed. A typical non-symmetric equiva- McA=O
lent prestress loading as produced when tension-
Finally, the moments at the three supports are
ing long beams from one end is considered. End
moments, as considered in this example, would Left
appear only if the tendons are anchored away
from the neutral axis of the cross section, or if left: Me = MBS + M B A
- 395 -
Spans With Different Momeirts Bending Moments Between
Of Inertia The Supports
Two cases of spans with different moments of Bending moments between the supports can
inertia may be analyzed using the tables. First, be computed by two methods. The first method
the cross section of the end spans may be differ- is simply to compute the moment at any point by
ent (e.g. the cross sections of the spans in a 2-span statics using the applied equivalent loads and the
beam). Second, the center span cross section of a computed moments at the supports. The second
5-span beam may be different from the other two method, which requires considerably less compu-
interior spans. tation, is to compute a primary moment which is
If the cross sections of the end spans differ, the moment that would be present if the beam
replace the end span ratio computation LE /Lr by spans were free to rotate at their ends, and a
LE lr/LrIE for selecting coefficients in the tables. secondary moment which is the moment pro-
Then multiply each distributed load applied to duced by restoring beam continuity over the sup-
the end spans by (1~/Ir)2. For the 2-span case, ports.
the ratio is LL In /LR 1~ and the multiplying fac- M;, the primary moment at any point x, is
tor is (IL& )2 applied to a distributed load on the horizontal component of the prestress force
the left span. at that point times the eccentricity of the tendon
The center span section of a 5-span beam may profile from the neutral axis
be different only to the extent that its stiffness
M;, = Pxex (6)
remains the same as for the other interior spans.
The secondary moment is linear between the sup-
That is Ic/Lc = II/L* where C refers to the center
ports and, for a typical span AB
span and 1 refers to the other interior spans. Any
distributed loading applied to the center span M;; = MA (, - f)+ M; ;
must then be multiplied by (Ic/11j2.
where x is the distance from support point A to
Example 3 the point x, L is the length of span AB, M is the
The moment at point C of the symmetric secondary moment at the point indicated by the
beam shown in Fig. 5 is to be computed. The end subscript. The secondary moment at a support, as
span ratio to be used is required in Equation (7), is computed by subtrac-
100 x I,/100 x 1.25 II = 0.8 ting the primary moment from the total moment
obtained by using the moment influence coeffi-
The distributed load factor (IE/II)~ is 1.5625.
cients. So the total moment at any point x is
The center span stiffness requirement is satisfied
obtained from Equations (6) and (7) as
since Ic/Lc = Ir/Lr. Its distributed load factor is
4.0. Hence, the required moment is obtained by MX =PxeX +(MA -PAeA)
using Table VI.
x l - x - +(Me PeeB) L
= 0.04706 x 1000 + (-0.00222 ( LJ
MC
x 5 x 1.56-0.00368x4 Example 4
x 1.56 + 0.02753 x 5 + 0.03812
The moment in the first span of Example 3 is
x 2 x 4.0)100* = 4070 k.-ft.
to be computed. The tendon profile is shown in
Similarly, from Table V, the moment at point B Fig. 6(a), and the horizontal component of the
is tendon force is 1000 k. The primary moments as
MB = 3048 k.-ft. computed by Equation (6) are shown in Fig. 6(b).
The secondary moments at the ends are
MA = MA - Mi = 1000 k.-ft.
- 1000 k.-ft. = 0 (free rotation)
M;; = Me - MB= 3048 k.-ft.
- 3000 k.-ft. = 48 k.-ft.
and the secondary moment for the span as com-
puted by Equation (7) is shown in Fig. 6(c). The
sum of the primary and secondary moments gives
the total moment as shown in Fig. 6(d). The
moment at any point of this curve can be com-
Fig. 5 - 5-span structure with varying moments of inertia for
Example 3. puted directly from Equation (8).
- 396 -
force P, has already been computed, For reason-
able accuracy in this case, Equation (10) should
not be used if the value of KL + ~.ca for the seg-
40 50
ment is greater than about 0.1.
The computed tendon force at various sec-
(a) Tendon profile
tions along the beam can now be plotted. If the
slope of the tendon is large, the horizontal com-
ponent can be computed by multiplying the ten-
don force by (1 - /s*) where s is the tendon
slope. A linear approximation for the tendon
(b) Primary moment force variation with distance along the beam is
P, the horizontal component of the force in the This value will be greater than the AP, computed
prestressing tendons. However, P is not constant by Equation (11). The prestress force plot can be
along the beam since it is reduced by friction los- revised to include the anchor set loss by noting
ses along the tendons. A further variation of force that the friction losses will be reversed in the re-
is caused by anchor set as the load is transferred gions affected. The prestress force at the anchor
from the jacking device. Anchor set causes a will be P, - AP,, and will increase with distance
reversal of friction forces in the end sections. from the anchor at a rate of r.
For short prestressing tendons the friction los-
ses can usually be neglected provided the total
NOTATION
angular change of the tendon profile is small.
However, anchor set losses may be large. In this A = cross-sectional area of the pre-
case both effects may be accommodated by using stressing tendons
a reduced constant value of P for the length of E = elastic modulus of the prestressing
the beam. tendons
For long post-tensioned tendons, the friction = moment of intertia of the cross
IE I 11
losses can-t be neglected in the final analysis. section in the span indicated
An AC1 Building Code17) formula gives the fob
K = friction loss factor related to
lowing value for P at any section x in the beam:
length
= Poe-(KL + ~a) (9)
px L = length of the segment over which
If the value of KL + plcu is below 0.3, in accord- friction loss is computed
ance with the ACI Code, Equation (9) may be LE, LI = length of the span indicated
replaced by AL = tendon movement at the anchor
p, = po due to anchor set
l+KL+ptcr ME = end moment due to eccentricity
Equations (9) or (10) may also be used to of the tendon over the exterior
compute friction losses through any segment of support
the beam(*) in which case the reference section is Mx, MA = bending moment at the point indi-
that end of the segment at which the tendon cated .
- 397 -
M and M = primary and * secondary bending REFERENCES
moments respectively 1. Moorman, R. B., Equivalent Load Method for Analyzing
Prestressed Concrete Structures, Journal of the American
PO = jacking force
Concrete Institute, Vol. 23, No. 5, Jan. 1952, pp. 405416.
APO = loss of prestress force at the jack- 2. Norris, C. H., and Wilbur, J. B., Elementary Structural Anal-
ing end due to anchor set ysis, McGraw-Hill, Inc., New York, 1960.
3. Parme, A. L. and Paris, G. H., Analysis of Continuous Pre-
Pmin = lowest prestress force considering stressed Concrete Structures, Proceedings of the First U.S.
friction losses Conference on Prestressed Concrete, Cambridge, kass., 1951,
p. 195.
px, PA = horizontal component of the pre-
4. Bailey, D. M. and Ferguson, P. M., Fixed-End Moment
stressing tendon force at the point Equations for Continuous Prestressed Concrete Beams,
indicated Journal of the Prestressed Concrete Institute, Vol. 11, No. 1,
Feb. 1966, pp. 76-94.
a = ratio of the reverse curve length to
5. Fiesenheiser, E. I., Rapid Design of Continuous Prestressed
the span length Members, Journal of the American Concrete Institute, Vol.
b = ratio of the end segment length to 25, No. 8, April 1954, pp. 669676.
6. ICES STRUDL-II, Engineering Users Manual, Vol. 1, Frame
the span length in an exterior span
Analysis, Report R68-91, Department of Civil Engineering,
C = drape of the tendon profile, high Massachusetts Institute of Technology, Cambridge, Mass.,
point to low point Nov. 1968.
7. Lin, T. Y., Design of Prestressed Concrete Structures, John
d = drape of the tendon profile in the Wiley & Sons, Inc., New York, 1963.
end segment of an exterior span 8. Building Code Requirements for Reinforced Concrete (AC1
e = eccentricity of the tendon profile 318-63). American Concrete Institute, Detroit, Mich., 1963.
9. Post-Tensioned Box Girder Bridges Design and Construc-
above the neutral axis at the ex-
tion, Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute and Prestressed
terior support Concrete Institute, 1971.
ex , eA, etc. = eccentricity of the tendon profile
above the neutral axis at the point
indicated
r = loss of prestress force per unit
length of beam
S = slope of the tendon profile
W = equivalent upward distributed
load over the major segment of
the tendon profile
WE = equivalent upward distributed
load in the end segment of an ex-
terior span
WR = equivalent downward distributed
load over the reverse curvature
segment of the tendon profile
X = distance from the end of a span to
a point x
a = angular change of the tendon pro-
file in the segment over which fric-
tion loss is computed
P = friction loss factor related to angu-
lar change of the tendon profile
Subscripts:
A and S designate anti-symmetric and symmetric,
respectively.
x, A, B, C, etc. designate points along the beam.
L, R, E, I and C designate left, right, exterior,
interior and center spans, respectively.
- 398
A.2 FRICTION LOSSES
The friction along a cable is calculated according to the The nomogram on page 315 is provided for use with formula
formula: (1) above. It includes scales for T,, T., T, or f,,, f,,, f,,,
and (pa + kx). The dimensionless value for the friction (,~a =
T , = T , . e - (Pm i- kx) kx) can be taken from page 314. When one of the three
forces or stresses in known, the required values of the two
or if (~KZ + kx) is not greater than 0.15, according to the following others may be found by connecting the given force (stress)
simplified formula: and the value (,~a = kx) with a straight line and then ex-
tending it over the 4 scales.
Recommended for
Type of duct Range of values calculations
,
I-( K I-1 K
flexible tubing
non-galvanized 0.18-0.26 5 - 1 0 . lo-Vft. 0.22 7.5 * lo-/ft.
flexible tubing
galvanized 0.14-0.22 3 - 7 * lo-Vft. 0.18 5.0 * lo-4/ft.
greased
and wrapped 0.05-0.15 5 - 1 5 * lo-Vft. 0.07 1 0 * lo-Vft.
Practice has shown that friction losses can vary from case to
case, The recommended values given above are suggested
for calculating the friction losses but in some instances the
k extreme values should also be considered.
- 399 -
Diagram for determining pcu
80"
70"
= 60"
L
kn
a,
D 50"
'I,
F 40"
m
m
z
I- 30"
20"
10"
Illllllllllllll~ Ill11'1"""""'
I I I I I I I I1 I I I I I I II II
0.050 0 100 0.150 0.200 0.250 0.300 0.350
275
250
225
I I / / /
I I // \//
I I / /
25
- 400 -
Nomogram for determining the prestressing
forces and steel stresses along a tendon
-401-
A.3 DERIVATION OF
FORMULAS FOR CALCULATING
THE EFFECTS OF ANCHOR SET
The effects of anchor set on tendon stresses Af L
)(= -
may be calculated with sufficient accuracy for 2d
most conventional applications in accordance
with the diagram and formulas presented below. EALL
- -
- 6x 2d
fjack
f anchor/
t
AL Known
EAL ,,=dF
favg = - AL Known
X
2xd
Af = -
L x Known
- 402 -
A.4 CONCRETE MATERIALS PROPERTIES
3.8
3.6
3.3
3.0
- 403 -
A.5 MATERIALS PROPERTIES PRESTRESSING STEEL
Prestressing Wire
1~-
Diameter I 0.192 0.196 0.256 0.276
0.0302 0.0491 0.0598
0.10 0.17 0.20
250 1 240 1 235
Prestressing Bars
,,
1 Nominal Diameter, in. 1 S/8 1 1 I, 1 1 i-1/4" 1 l-1/4" 1 l-3/8" 1
1 Area. sa. in. 1 0.28 1 0.85 1 0.85 1 1.25 I 1.25 11.56 1
Weight, plf 0.98 3.01 3.01 4.39 4.39 5.56
Ult. strength, f,,ksi 157 150 160 150 160 150
0.66f,,A,,. kips 28.7 84.4 90.0 123.8 132.0 154.4
I 0.75f,,,A,, kim 1 32.6 1 95.9 1 102.2 1 140.6 1 150.0 1 175.5 1
1 f,&, kips 1 43.5 1 127.8 1 136.3 1 187.5 1 200.0 1 234.0 1
-4404-
A.6 MATERIALS PROPERTIES WELDED WIRE FABRIC
Style
designation
1 Spacing of
wires, in. T Size of wires,
AS & W gage
Sectional area,
sq in. per ft T Weight,
lb per
IOOsq f t
Longit. Trans. Longit. Trans. Longit. Trans.
2 x 2-lO/lO 2 2 10 10 .086 ,086 60
2 x 2-14114 2 2 12 12 .052 .052 37
2 x 2-12/12* 2 2 14 14 .030 .030 21
3 x 3-818 3 3 a 8 .082 .082 58
3 x 3-loll0 3 3 10 10 .057 .057 41
3 x 3-12l12" 3 3 12 12 .035 .035 25
3 x 3-14l14" 3 3 14 14 ,020 .020 14
4 x 4-414 4 4 4 4 .120 .120 85
4 x 4-6/6 4 4 6 6 ,087 .087 62
4 x 4-818 4 4 8 8 .062 .062 44
4 x4-10/10 4 4 10 10 ,043 ,043 31
4 x 4-12112" 4 4 12 12 .026 .026 19
6 x 6-O/0 6 6 0 0 ,148 .148 107
6 x 6-212 6 6 2 2 .108 .108 78
6 x 6-414 6 6 4 4 .080 ,080 58
6 x 6-416 6 6 4 6 .080 .058 50
6 x 6-616 6 6 6 6 .058 ,058 42
6 x 6-818 6 6 8 a ,041 .041 30
6 x 6-lO/lO 6 6 10 10 ,029 .029 21
2 x 12-014 2 12 0 4 .443 ,040 169
2 x 12-216 2 12 2 6 ,325 .029 124
2 x 12-418 2 12 4 8 ,239 ,021 91
2 x 12-6110 2 12 6 10 .174 ,014 66
2 x 12-8112 2 12 8 12 .124 .009 46
3 x 12-O/4 3 12 0 4 ,295 .040 119
3 x 12-216 3 12 2 6 .216 .029 87
3 x 12-418 3 12 4 8 ,159 ,021 64
3 x 12-6110 3 12 6 10 .116 .014 46
3 x 12-8112 3 12 8 12 ,082 ,009 32
4 x8-8112 4 8 8 12 ,062 .013 27
4 x8-10/12 4 8 10 12 .043 ,013 20
4 x 12-014 12 0 4 .221 .040 94
4 x 12-216 12 2 6 ,162 ,029 69
4 x 12-418 12 4 8 ,120 ,021 51
4 x 12-6110 12 6 10 ,087 .014 36
4 x 12-10112 12 10 12 ,043 ,009 19
6 x 12-0014 6 12 00 4 .172 ,040 78
6 x 12-014 6 12 0 4 .148 .040 69
6 x 12-212 6 12 2 2 ,108 .054 59
6x 12-414 6 12 4 4 ,080 .040 44
6 x 12-616 6 12 6 6 .058 .029 32
Usually furnished only in galvanized wire
A.7 PROPERTIES OF ASTM STANDARD REINFORCING BARS
WEIGHT
BAR SIZE AREA* POUNDS DIAMETER
DESIGNATION SQ. INCHES PER FT. INCHES
#3 .11 .376 .375
I #4 .20 .668 .500
r--
-7 I I
#5 I .31 I 1.043 I .625
#6 44 1.502 ,750
#7 .60 2.044 .875
#8 .79 2.670 1 .ooo
#9 1.OO 3.400 1.128
#lO 1.27 4.303 1.270
##l 1 1.56 5.313 1,410
2.25 I 7.650 I 1.693
#18 4.00 2.257
Current ASTM Specifications cover bar sizes #14 and #18
in A615 Grade 60 and in A706 only.
*Nominal dimensions.
- 406 -